Merge pull request 'Fixed validation errors in Philippians' (#17) from php_bp2 into master

Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/Bussard/fr_tn/pulls/17

README.md

@@ -1,16 +1,9 @@
-<img src="https://cdn.door43.org/assets/uw-icons/logo-utn-256.png" alt="drawing" width="100"/>
+# Bussard Translation Notes
 
-# unfoldingWord® Translation Notes
-
-This is the repository for the [unfoldingWord® Translation Notes (UTN)](https://www.unfoldingword.org/utn) resource.
 
 ## Description
 
-unfoldingWord® Translation Notes are open-licensed exegetical notes that provide historical, cultural, and linguistic information for translators. It provides translators and checkers with pertinent, just-in-time information to help them make the best possible translation decisions.
-
-## Downloading
-
-If you want to download the UTN to use, go here: [https://www.unfoldingword.org/utn](https://www.unfoldingword.org/utn). UTN is also included in [tS](https://ufw.io/ts) and [tC](https://ufw.io/tc).
+The Bussard Translation Notes are a fork of the unfoldingWord® Translation Notes. These notes are open-licensed exegetical notes that provide historical, cultural, and linguistic information for translators. It provides translators and checkers with pertinent, just-in-time information to help them make the best possible translation decisions.
 
 ## Editing the UTN
 
@@ -24,7 +17,6 @@ Each of these options and their caveats are described below.
 
 The first two options require you to clone the repository to your computer first. You may do this on the command line or using a program such as SmartGit. After making changes to the files you will need to commit and push your changes to the server and then create a Pull Request to merge them to the `master` branch.
 
-Alternately, you may [download the master branch as a zip file](https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/archive/master.zip) and extract that locally. After editing you would need to use the upload file feature in DCS to get your changes ready for a Pull Request.
 
 ### Editing in tC Create
 
@@ -60,10 +52,10 @@ The UTN are structured as one file per book of the bible and encoded in TSV form
 
 The following lists each column with a brief description and example.
 
-* `Book` - USFM book code name (e.g. `TIT`)
-* `Chapter` - Chapter number (e.g. `1`)
-* `Verse` - Verse number (e.g. `3`)
-* `ID` - Four character **alphanumeric** string unique *within* the verse for the resource (e.g. `swi9`)
+* `Book`: USFM book code name (e.g. `TIT`)
+* `Chapter`: Chapter number (e.g. `1`)
+* `Verse`: Verse number (e.g. `3`)
+* `ID`: Four character **alphanumeric** string unique *within* the verse for the resource (e.g. `swi9`)
   * This will be helpful in identifing which notes are translations of the original English tNs and which notes have been added by GLs.
   * The Universal ID (UID) of a note is the combination of the `Book`, `Chapter`, `Verse`, and `ID` fields. For example, `tit/1/3/swi9`.
     * This is a useful way to unambiguously refer to notes.
@@ -71,26 +63,26 @@ The following lists each column with a brief description and example.
 * `SupportReference`
   * Normally a link to a supporting reference text or blank
   * This will usually be a link to translationAcademy, like `rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor`
-* `OrigQuote` - Original language quote (e.g. `ἐφανέρωσεν…τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ`)
+* `OrigQuote`: Original language quote (e.g. `ἐφανέρωσεν…τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ`)
   * Software (such as tC) should use this for determining what is highlighted rather than using the `GLQuote` field
   * An ellipsis character (…) indicates that the quote is discontinuous, software should interpret this in a non-greedy manner
-* `Occurrence` - Specifies which occurrence in the original language text the entry applies to.
+* `Occurrence`: Specifies which occurrence in the original language text the entry applies to.
   * `-1`: entry applies to every occurrence of OrigQuote in the verse
   * `0`: entry does not occur in original language (for example, “Connecting Statement:”)
   * `1`: entry applies to first occurrence of OrigQuote only
   * `2`: entry applies to second occurrence of OrigQuote only
   * etc.
-* `GLQuote` (OPTIONAL) - Gateway language quote (e.g. `he revealed his word`)
+* `GLQuote`: (optional) Gateway language quote (e.g. `he revealed his word`)
   * Software (such as tC) should disregard this field.
   * This field is a reference text for GL translators
   * For certain notes, this field represents the display text for notes that do not relate to a specific word or phrase in the text. There are two such cases in the tN:
     * “Connecting Statement:” and
     * “General Information:”
   * GL translations teams **should not translate** this column. They do need to provide a translation of the above 2 statements.
-* `OccurrenceNote` - The Markdown formatted note itself. For example, `Paul speaks of God’s message as if it were an object that could be visibly shown to people. Alternate translation: “He caused me to understand his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])`
+* `OccurrenceNote`: The Markdown formatted note itself. For example, `Paul speaks of God’s message as if it were an object that could be visibly shown to people. Alternate translation: “He caused me to understand his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])`
   * The text should be Markdown formatted, which means the following are also acceptable:
-    * Plaintext - if you have no need for extra markup, just use plain text in this column
-    * HTML - if you prefer to use inline HTML for markup, that works because it is supported in Markdown
+    * Plaintext—if you have no need for extra markup, just use plain text in this column
+    * HTML—if you prefer to use inline HTML for markup, that works because it is supported in Markdown
 
 ## Composing translationNotes
 
@@ -138,4 +130,4 @@ As a translator of UTN into a GL, you may need to [add new notes](https://gl-man
 
 ## License
 
-See the [LICENSE](https://git.door43.org/Door43/tn-en/src/master/LICENSE.md) file for licensing information.
+See the [LICENSE](https://git.door43.org/Bussard/fr_tn/src/branch/master/LICENSE.md) file for licensing information.

en_tn_02-EXO.tsv

@@ -1737,12 +1737,12 @@ EXO	24	16	27l1	translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ
 EXO	24	17	e4n6	figs-simile	כְּ⁠אֵ֥שׁ אֹכֶ֖לֶת	1	like a devouring fire	This means the glory of Yahweh was very large and seemed to burn brightly like a fire. Alternate translation: “like a big fire burning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 EXO	24	17	k5lj	figs-metaphor	לְ⁠עֵינֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	in the eyes of the Israelites	Their eyes represent seeing, and seeing represents their thoughts or judgment about they saw. Alternate translation: “to the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EXO	24	18	h1wy	translate-numbers	אַרְבָּעִ֣ים י֔וֹם וְ⁠אַרְבָּעִ֖ים לָֽיְלָה	1	forty days and forty nights	“40 days and 40 nights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	25	intro	t23a			0		# Exodus 25 General Notes<br>## Structure:<br>- v. 1-7: Instructions for gifts the Israelites may give to help build the place they will worship God<br>- v. 8-9: Introductory building instructions<br>- v. 10-22: Instructions for building the Box of the Testimony<br>- v. 23-30: Instructions for building the table<br>- v. 31-39: Instructions for building the lampstand<br>- v. 40: Summary instruction<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br>- The tent of meeting and Box of the Testimony are introduced in this chapter.<br>- Translators will need to take care translating the concept of atonement.<br><br><br>## Potential translation issues in this chapter:<br>- There are many unfamiliar items in this chapter. Fortunately they are mostly all physical items. Translators will have to try to understand what each item is and translate it into the closest equivalent in their culture. It may be helpful for translators to try to find images depicting some of the items the Israelites were to make.<br>- There are some biblical weights and measurements that translators may not have encountered before.<br><br>
+EXO	25	intro	t23a			0		# Exodus 25 General Notes<br>## Structure:<br>- v. 1-7: Instructions for gifts the Israelites may give to help build the place they will worship God<br>- v. 8-9: Introductory building instructions<br>- v. 10-22: Instructions for building the Box of the Testimony<br>- v. 23-30: Instructions for building the table<br>- v. 31-39: Instructions for building the lampstand<br>- v. 40: Summary instruction<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br>- The tent of meeting and Box of the Testimony are introduced in this chapter.<br>- Translators will need to take care translating the concept of atonement.<br><br><br>## Potential translation issues in this chapter:<br>- There are many unfamiliar items in this chapter. Fortunately they are mostly all physical items. Translators will have to try to understand what each item is and translate it into the closest equivalent in their culture. It may be helpful for translators to try to find images depicting some of the items the Israelites were to make.<br>- There are some biblical weights and measurements that translators may not have encountered before.<br>- From [verse 11](../25/11.md) until the end of chapter 30 almost every instruction regarding the construction of the tent of meeting and all the associated items are given with a singular form of “you” as if Moses himself would make them. However, it is clear and made explicit in [chapter 31](../31/01.md) that certain skilled craftsmen will receive these instructions from Moses and make these items. In some languages you may need to change from second to third person throughout, following the pattern in [25:10](../25/10.md). See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/[[figs-123person]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]].<br>
 EXO	25	2	tktu	figs-quotations	דַּבֵּר֙ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְ⁠יִקְחוּ־לִ֖⁠י תְּרוּמָ֑ה	1	who is motivated by a willing heart	In some languages you may have to make **and they shall take a contribution for me** a direct quote. Note that this will make it a second-level quotation and you will need to mark it with second-level quotation marking if your language uses them. Alternate translation: “Say to the sons of Israel, ‘You shall take a contribution for me.’ ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EXO	25	2	r5yr	figs-idiom	אֲשֶׁ֣ר יִדְּבֶ֣⁠נּוּ לִבּ֔⁠וֹ	1	who is motivated by a willing heart	This is an idiom that indicates a person’s desire to give an offering. Alternate translation: “who wants to give one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EXO	25	2	k78q	figs-youdual	תִּקְח֖וּ 	1	You must receive	The word **you** is plural and refers to Moses and the leaders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
-EXO	25	4	c1qn	figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠תְכֵ֧לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י	1	blue, purple, and scarlet material	Possible meanings are (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-EXO	25	4	c958		וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י	1	scarlet	A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red”
+EXO	25	4	c1qn	figs-explicit	וּ⁠תְכֵ֧לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י	1	blue, purple, and scarlet material	Possible meanings are (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or ”thread” may be the best understanding. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	25	4	c958	translate-unknown	וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י	1	scarlet	A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	25	5	ayup	translate-unknown	מְאָדָּמִ֛ים 	1	scarlet	When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather) they become reddish. It is not clear if these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	25	5	1po6	translate-unknown	תְּחָשִׁ֖ים 	1	scarlet	The meaning of this word is not known, it may refer to some water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. [Sea cows on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sirenia) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	25	5	d4fa	translate-unknown	שִׁטִּֽים	1	scarlet	A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1785,115 +1785,86 @@ EXO	25	39	ff5p	translate-bweight	כִּכָּ֛ר 	1	one talent	You can convert
 EXO	25	40	4tyr	figs-explicit	וּ⁠רְאֵ֖ה וַ⁠עֲשֵׂ֑ה	1	you are being shown on the mountain	All the items described in this chapter are implied as what Moses is told to **see and make**. You could make that explicit in your translation if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “See and make everything I have described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	25	40	gyte	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠רְאֵ֖ה וַ⁠עֲשֵׂ֑ה	1	you are being shown on the mountain	Here, **see** relates to observing or overseeing, essentially Yahweh is telling Moses to be careful as he observes the pattern on the mountain and as he sees the craftsmen of Israel working on these items so that they are made correctly. Alternate translation: “Watch carefully so you can make these things well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EXO	25	40	l7je	figs-activepassive	אַתָּ֥ה מָרְאֶ֖ה	1	you are being shown on the mountain	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I am showing you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	26	intro	emw7			0		# Exodus 26 General Notes<br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br><br>### The tent of meeting<br>This chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building of a tent where Moses would meet Yahweh and the ark would be stored. This would eventually become the tabernacle. Note: “tabernacle” is simply an English word transcribed from the Latin for “tent” which translates the Hebrew for “dwelling place” that has taken on religious significance via the KJV. Tabernacle and tent should be considered interchangeable. It was to be considered a very holy place. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
-EXO	26	1	hen6			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues telling Moses what the people must do ([Exodus 25:1](../25/01.md)).
-EXO	26	1	ks8r	figs-you		1	You must make	Yahweh is speaking to Moses, so the word **you** is singular. Yahweh probably expected Moses to tell someone else to do the actual work, but Moses would be the one responsible for seeing that the work was done correctly. “Tell a craftsman to make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-EXO	26	1	iww4			1	curtains	These were large, heavy sections of woven cloth that were used to form the covering and dividing walls of the tabernacle.
-EXO	26	1	xvs7			1	scarlet wool	wool dyed a deep red color
-EXO	26	1	n2vm			1	craftsman	a person who is skilled in making beautiful objects by hand
-EXO	26	2	dkr6	translate-bdistance		1	twenty-eight cubits…four cubits	“28 cubits…4 cubits.” A cubit is 46 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	26	3	ba6w	figs-activepassive		1	Five curtains must be joined to each other…must also be joined to each other	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Sew five curtains together to make one set, and sew the other five curtains together to make another set” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	26	4	ghz8			1	one set	“one set of five curtains”
-EXO	26	4	zxx4			1	the second set	“the second set of five curtains”
-EXO	26	6	sns4			1	clasps	The clasps fit into the loops (verses 4 and 5) to hold the curtains together.
-EXO	26	7	k2mi			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues telling Moses what the people must do.
-EXO	26	7	t7t3	translate-numbers		1	eleven	“11” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	26	8	p423	translate-numbers		1	thirty…four	“30…4” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	26	8	v7i1	translate-bdistance		1	cubits	A cubit is 46 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-EXO	26	10	j8yn			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues telling Moses what the people must do.
+EXO	26	intro	emw7			0		# Exodus 26 General Notes<br><br><br>- The sacred tent has four layers (from inside to out): linen, goats’ hair, tanned rams’ skins, and fine leather.<br>- There are multiple different curtains described using three different Hebrew words: one sort to make the walls of the tent ([verses 1-13](../26/01.md)), another to separate the holy and most holy places ([verses 31-34](../26/31.md)), and another for the entrance of the sacred tent ([verses 36-37](../26/36.md)). If there are words in your language that would make a distinction between these sorts of hanging cloths, it would be appropriate to make a distinction in your translation.<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.<br>- v. 1-30: Instructions for constructing the exterior of the sacred tent<br>    - v. 1-6: Inner covering<br>    - v. 7-14: Outer covering layers<br>    - v. 15-30: Wooden framework<br>- v. 31-35: Instructions for arranging the interior of the sacred tent<br>- v. 36-37: Instructions for hanging the entrance curtain<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br><br>### The tent of meeting<br>This chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building of a tent where Moses would meet Yahweh and the ark would be stored. This would eventually become the tabernacle. Note: “tabernacle” is simply an English word transcribed from the Latin for “tent” which translates the Hebrew for “dwelling place” that has taken on religious significance via the KJV. Tabernacle and tent should be considered interchangeable. It was to be considered a very holy place. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
+EXO	26	1	ks8r	figs-you	תַּעֲשֶׂ֖ה 	1	You must make	Yahweh is speaking to Moses, so the word **you** is singular. Yahweh probably expected Moses to tell someone else to do the actual work, but Moses would be the one responsible for seeing that the work was done correctly. “Tell a craftsman to make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+EXO	26	1	iww4	translate-unknown	יְרִיעֹ֑ת 	1	curtains	These were large, heavy sections of woven cloth that were used to form the covering and dividing walls of the tabernacle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	26	1	5fgj		וּ⁠תְכֵ֤לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָן֙ וְ⁠תֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י	1	curtains	Possible meanings are (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
+EXO	26	1	xvs7	translate-unknown	וְ⁠תֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י	1	scarlet wool	A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	26	1	6f3n	translate-unknown	שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֗ר	1	scarlet wool	This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	26	1	n2vm		חֹשֵׁ֖ב 	1	craftsman	a person who is skilled in making beautiful objects by hand
+EXO	26	2	dkr6	translate-bdistance	שְׁמֹנֶ֤ה וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֙ בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה…אַרְבַּ֣ע בָּ⁠אַמָּ֔ה	1	twenty-eight cubits…four cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 12.9m … 184cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	26	3	ba6w	figs-activepassive	חֲמֵ֣שׁ הַ⁠יְרִיעֹ֗ת תִּֽהְיֶ֨יןָ֙ חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ֑⁠הּ וְ⁠חָמֵ֤שׁ יְרִיעֹת֙ חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָֽ⁠הּ	1	Five curtains must be joined to each other…must also be joined to each other	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Join five of the curtains each to another, and join five of the curtains each to another.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EXO	26	4	ghz8		תְּכֵ֗לֶת 	1	one set	“blue yarn” or “blue cloth”
+EXO	26	4	wdum	translate-ordinals	הָ⁠אֶחָ֔ת … הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית	1	one set	 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinals]])
+EXO	26	4	d0sl		בַּ⁠חֹבָ֑רֶת 	1	one set	“in one set of five curtains”
+EXO	26	4	gjt1		בַּ⁠מַּחְבֶּ֖רֶת הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית	1	one set	“in the other set of five curtains”
+EXO	26	6	sns4		וְ⁠עָשִׂ֕יתָ חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים קַרְסֵ֣י זָהָ֑ב וְ⁠חִבַּרְתָּ֨ אֶת־הַ⁠יְרִיעֹ֜ת אִשָּׁ֤ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ⁠הּ֙	1	clasps	The clasps fit into the loops (verses 4 and 5) to hold the curtains together.
+EXO	26	6	b242		אֶחָֽד	1	clasps	“as though it were one piece”
+EXO	26	7	jeaz		לְ⁠אֹ֖הֶל 	1	eleven	This refers to a outer tent over the sacred tent. Alternate translation: “for a outer tent”
+EXO	26	7	t7t3	translate-numbers	עַשְׁתֵּי־עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה	1	eleven	“eleven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+EXO	26	8	p423	translate-numbers		1	thirty…four	“thirty …4 … eleven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+EXO	26	8	v7i1	translate-bdistance	שְׁלֹשִׁים֙ בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה…אַרְבַּ֣ע בָּ⁠אַמָּ֔ה	1	cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 13.8m … 184cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	26	9	9yyr	figs-metonymy	אֶל־מ֖וּל פְּנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֹֽהֶל	1	cubits	Here, **face** is probably referring to the entrance of the tent. The opening for the protective tent and the sacred tent would have been coordinated so they were in the same place. Alternate translation: “in front of the entrance of the tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	26	9	73r7		הָ⁠אֹֽהֶל	1	cubits	As in [verse 7](../26/07.md) this refers to the outer tent over the sacred tent. Alternate translation: “the outer tent”
 EXO	26	10	etf7			1	loops	See how you translated these in [Exodus 26:4](./04.md).
 EXO	26	11	cq36			1	clasps	The clasps fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:6](./06.md).
-EXO	26	12	x5p7			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues telling Moses what the people must do.
-EXO	26	13	k4ci	translate-bdistance		1	cubit	A cubit is 46 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-EXO	26	14	kii8			1	a covering of ram skins dyed red, and another covering of fine leather	See how you translated similar phrases in [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md).
-EXO	26	14	yz3v			1	dyed red	“colored red”
-EXO	26	15	p38r			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people must do.
-EXO	26	15	y85l			1	frames	This refers to frames or panels that they made by joining together smaller pieces of wood.
+EXO	26	12	hftk	translate-fraction	חֲצִ֤י 	1	clasps	The word **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+EXO	26	13	k4ci	translate-bdistance	וְ⁠הָ⁠אַמָּ֨ה…וְ⁠הָ⁠אַמָּ֤ה 	1	cubit	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	26	14	kii8	translate-unknown	תְּחָשִׁ֖ים 	1	a covering of ram skins dyed red, and another covering of fine leather	The meaning of this word is not known, it may refer to some water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. [Sea cows on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sirenia) See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 
+EXO	26	14	yz3v	translate-unknown	מְאָדָּמִ֑ים 	1	dyed red	When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather) they become reddish. It is not clear if these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md). Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	26	15	y85l	translate-unknown	הַ⁠קְּרָשִׁ֖ים 	1	frames	This refers to frames or panels that they made by joining together smaller pieces of wood. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	26	15	tw2h	translate-unknown	שִׁטִּ֖ים 	1	frames	A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in [25:5](../25/05.md). [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EXO	26	16	k4b7	translate-numbers		1	ten cubits…one and a half cubits	“10 cubits…1.5 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	26	19	s45x			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues telling Moses what the people must do.
-EXO	26	19	c9id			1	silver bases	These were silver blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place.
-EXO	26	19	mm1h			1	pedestals	The silver bases kept the wooden board off the ground.
-EXO	26	19	lg39	figs-activepassive		1	There must be two bases	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Put two bases” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	26	21	gag1	figs-explicit		1	and so on	This means that what was said about the first two boards should be done for the rest of the boards. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “and two bases for each of the rest of the boards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	26	22	nw4c			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people must do.
-EXO	26	24	k1ec	figs-activepassive		1	These frames must be separate at the bottom, but joined at the top	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Separate these frames at the bottom, but join them at the top” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	26	25	p2wu			1	silver bases	These were silver blocks that had a slot in them to keep the frame in place. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
-EXO	26	25	q8xh			1	in all	“total”
-EXO	26	25	yr6d	figs-explicit		1	and so on	This means that what was said about the first two frames should be done for the rest of the frames. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:21](../26/21.md). Alternate translation: “and two bases for each of the rest of the frames” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	26	26	c95e			1	General Information:	Yahweh continue to tell Moses how the tabernacle was to be built.
-EXO	26	26	fc8p			1	crossbars	These are horizontal support beams that give stability to the structure.
-EXO	26	27	rn67			1	the back side of the tabernacle to the west	The front was on the east side of the tabernacle.
-EXO	26	29	x8ny			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses how the tabernacle must be constructed.
-EXO	26	29	ji1j			1	for them to serve as holders for the crossbars	“which will hold the crossbars” or “because they will hold the crossbars”
-EXO	26	29	nq3m			1	crossbars	These are horizontal support beams that give stability to the structure. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:26](../26/26.md).
-EXO	26	30	csf9	figs-activepassive		1	you were shown on the mountain	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that I have shown you here on this mountain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	26	31	yqi6			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses how the tabernacle is to be constructed.
-EXO	26	31	uc7w	figs-you		1	You must make	Yahweh is speaking to Moses, so the word **you** is singular. Yahweh probably expected Moses to tell someone else to do the actual work, but Moses would be the one responsible for seeing that the work was done correctly. “Tell a craftsman to make.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-EXO	26	33	p2yq			1	clasps	The clasps fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in [Exodus 26:6](./06.md).
-EXO	26	33	d3gm	figs-explicit		1	you must bring in the ark of the testimony	The ark of the testimony is the chest that contains the commandments. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “you must bring in the chest containing the commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	26	33	jc47	figs-activepassive		1	The curtain is to separate the holy place	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The curtain will separate the holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	26	34	v7t1			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people must do.
-EXO	26	34	mli8			1	atonement lid	This is the lid that sits on top of the ark where the atonement offering was made. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:17](../25/17.md).
-EXO	26	34	b9m2			1	on the ark of the testimony	“on the chest that contains the commandments”
-EXO	26	35	lv9e	figs-explicit		1	The table must be on the north side	This is the table that holds the bread that represents the presence of God. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Place the table for the bread of God’s presence on the north side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	26	36	h3s1			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses how to construct the tabernacle.
-EXO	26	36	p5wf			1	a hanging	This was a large curtain made of cloth.
-EXO	26	36	rr16			1	blue, purple, and scarlet material	Possible meanings are (1) “yarn that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple, and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
-EXO	26	36	f6td			1	fine twined linen	“finely twisted linen.” This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread.
-EXO	26	36	r2fy			1	an embroiderer	“a person who sews designs into cloth” or “a person who embroiders”
-EXO	27	intro	x4f7			0		# Exodus 27 General Notes<br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The tent of meeting<br>This chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building of a tent where Moses would meet Yahweh and the ark would be stored. This would eventually become the tabernacle. It was to be considered a very holy place. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
-EXO	27	1	hj65			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people must do ([Exodus 25:1](../25/01.md)).
-EXO	27	1	qj4j	translate-bdistance		1	five cubits long and five cubits wide	“2.2 meters long on each side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-EXO	27	1	hbg9	translate-bdistance		1	The altar must be square and three cubits high	“The altar must be square and 1.3 meters high” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-EXO	27	1	s8qy	translate-bdistance		1	cubits	A cubit is 46 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-EXO	27	2	lr23			1	You must make extensions of its four corners shaped like ox horns	“You must make projections that look like ox horns on its four corners”
-EXO	27	2	lek3	figs-activepassive		1	The horns will be made	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You must make the horns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	27	2	y4r2			1	must cover them	“must cover the altar and horns”
-EXO	27	3	qn79			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people must do.
-EXO	27	3	m4wm			1	basins	bowls
-EXO	27	3	z5ax			1	firepans	These were pans that held hot coals from the altar.
-EXO	27	3	j5zt			1	utensils	These were any instrument, vessel, or tool that served a useful purpose.
-EXO	27	4	fp9m			1	You must make a grate for the altar, a network of bronze	“You must make a bronze grate for the altar”
-EXO	27	4	hsq3			1	grate	a frame of crossed bars for holding wood when burning
-EXO	27	5	v6n4			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people need to do.
-EXO	27	5	c5em	figs-explicit		1	You must put the grate under the ledge of the altar	The grate was placed inside the altar. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “You must put the grate under the rim of the altar, on the inside of the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	27	5	xc2t			1	grate	This is a frame of crossed bars for holding wood when burning. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md).
-EXO	27	6	wki4	figs-explicit		1	You must make poles for the altar	These poles were used for carrying the altar. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “You must make poles for carrying the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EXO	27	7	fb3t			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people should do.
-EXO	27	7	b3yx	figs-activepassive		1	The poles must be put into the rings, and the poles must be on the two sides of the altar, to carry it	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You must put the poles into the rings and place them on each side of the altar to carry it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	27	8	xj8e			1	planks	a long, flat piece of wood that is thicker than a board
-EXO	27	8	t5ey	figs-activepassive		1	you were shown on the mountain	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that I have shown to you here on this mountain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	27	9	y45x	figs-activepassive		1	There must be hangings…courtyard	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You must place hangings…courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	27	9	id4k			1	hangings of fine twined linen	A “hanging” was a large curtain made of cloth. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md)
-EXO	27	9	v748			1	fine twined linen	“finely twisted linen.” This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread
-EXO	27	9	ce9a	translate-bdistance		1	one hundred cubits	A cubit is 46 centimeters. Alternate translation: “44 meters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-EXO	27	10	sfg8	figs-activepassive		1	There must also be hooks…posts	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You must also attach hooks…posts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	27	10	k7rb			1	posts	a strong piece of wood set upright and used as a support
-EXO	27	11	n95e			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people must do.
-EXO	27	11	gjg5			1	there must be hangings one hundred cubits long	See how you translated many similar words in [Exodus 27:9](./09.md).
-EXO	27	11	x52h			1	there must be hangings	This could be stated as a command. Alternate translation: “you must make hangings”
-EXO	27	11	nr77			1	with twenty posts, twenty bronze bases, hooks attached to the posts, and silver rods	See how you translated many similar words in [Exodus 27:10](./10.md).
-EXO	27	12	p4u4			1	there must be a curtain	This could be stated as a command. Alternate translation: “you must make a curtain”
-EXO	27	12	elw4			1	There must be ten posts	This could be stated as a command. Alternate translation: “You must make ten posts”
-EXO	27	13	w2sg			1	The courtyard must also be fifty cubits long	This could be stated as a command. Alternate translation: “Make the courtyard fifty cubits long”
-EXO	27	14	mzn5			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people must do.
-EXO	27	14	vy7r			1	The hangings	These were large curtains made of cloth. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md).
-EXO	27	14	z8n2			1	posts	These were strong pieces of wood set upright and used as supports. See how you translated these in [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md).
-EXO	27	14	gz7s			1	bases	These were metal blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
-EXO	27	14	u8nm	translate-bdistance		1	fifteen cubits	about seven meters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-EXO	27	16	wv46			1	The courtyard gate must be a curtain twenty cubits long	This could be stated as a command. Alternate translation: “You must make a curtain twenty cubits long to be the courtyard gate”
-EXO	27	16	h4tw	figs-activepassive		1	The curtain must be made…fine twined linen, the work of an embroiderer	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “They must make the curtain…fine twined linen, the work of an embroiderer” or “Embroiderers must make the curtain…fine twined linen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	27	16	kn9u			1	blue, purple, and scarlet material and fine twined linen	Possible meanings are (1) “yarn that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple, and scarlet dye” to dye the linen.
-EXO	27	16	g5wi			1	an embroiderer	a person who sews designs into cloth
-EXO	27	17	wal2			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people must do.
-EXO	27	18	wt7n	translate-bdistance		1	one hundred cubits	“100 cubits.” A cubit is 46 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	27	18	j1zp			1	fine twined linen hangings	“finely twisted linen.” This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md).
-EXO	27	19	w5n8	figs-activepassive		1	all the tent pegs for the tabernacle and courtyard must be made of bronze	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “make all the tent pegs for the tabernacle and courtyard out of bronze” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EXO	27	19	bs7c			1	tent pegs	sharp pieces of wood or metal used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground
-EXO	27	20	wn9n			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people must do.
-EXO	27	21	ge7v			1	tent of meeting	This is another name for the tabernacle.
-EXO	27	21	p7ru			1	ark of testimony	This is the chest that contains the sacred slabs of stone on which Yahweh had written his commandments.
-EXO	27	21	vr7m			1	This requirement will be a lasting statute	“I require that the people do this as a lasting statute”
+EXO	26	16	z2rv	translate-bdistance	עֶ֥שֶׂר אַמּ֖וֹת…וְ⁠אַמָּה֙ וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י הָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה	1	ten cubits…one and a half cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 4.6m … 69cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	26	16	41gf	translate-fraction	וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י 	1	ten cubits…one and a half cubits	The word **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+EXO	26	17	zwfj	translate-unknown	יָד֗וֹת 	1	ten cubits…one and a half cubits	This means a part of the wood sticking out from the rest of the frame so that it can be put into a hole in another object. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	26	19	c9id		אַדְנֵי־כֶ֔סֶף	1	silver bases	These were silver blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place and off the ground.
+EXO	26	19	o357	figs-explicit	שְׁנֵ֨י אֲדָנִ֜ים תַּֽחַת־הַ⁠קֶּ֤רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָד֙ לִ⁠שְׁתֵּ֣י יְדֹתָ֔י⁠ו וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֧י אֲדָנִ֛ים תַּֽחַת־הַ⁠קֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָ֖ד לִ⁠שְׁתֵּ֥י יְדֹתָֽי⁠ו	1	silver bases	The effect of this is to start a list and the hearer will assume it should be completed. Try to translate this in the way that a speaker of your language would give instructions that are meant to be carried out on a whole group of objects. This same phrasing occurs again in [verse 21](../26/21.md) and [verse 25](../26/25.md).  Alternate translation: “two bases under the first frame for its two tenons, and then two bases under the next frame for its two tenons, and so for all the frames” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	26	21	rlcf	figs-explicit	שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֗ים תַּ֚חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֣רֶשׁ הָֽ⁠אֶחָ֔ד וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֔ים תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָֽד	1	silver bases	The effect of this is to start a list and the hearer will assume it should be completed. Try to translate this in the way that a speaker of your language would give instructions that are meant to be carried out on a whole group of objects. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).  Alternate translation: “two bases under the first frame, and then two bases under the next frame, and so for all the frames” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	26	25	0p52	figs-explicit	שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֗ים תַּ֚חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֣רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָ֔ד וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֔ים תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָֽד	1	silver bases	The effect of this is to start a list and the hearer will assume it should be completed. Try to translate this in the way that a speaker of your language would give instructions that are meant to be carried out on a whole group of objects. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).  Alternate translation: “two bases under the first frame, and then two bases under the next frame, and so for all the frames” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	26	25	p2wu	translate-unknown	וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֣ם …אֲדָנִ֑ים …אֲדָנִ֗ים …אֲדָנִ֔ים 	1	silver bases	These were silver blocks that had a slot in them to keep the frame in place. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	26	26	fc8p	translate-unknown	בְרִיחִ֖ם 	1	crossbars	These are horizontal support beams that give stability to the structure. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	26	29	ji1j		בָּתִּ֖ים לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם	1	for them to serve as holders for the crossbars	“which will hold the crossbars” or “because they will hold the crossbars”
+EXO	26	29	nq3m		לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם 	1	crossbars	These are horizontal support beams that give stability to the structure. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:26](../26/26.md).
+EXO	26	30	csf9	figs-activepassive	הָרְאֵ֖יתָ בָּ⁠הָֽר	1	you were shown on the mountain	This can be stated in active form. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EXO	26	31	yqi6			1	General Information:	See how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
+EXO	26	33	p2yq	translate-unknown	הַ⁠קְּרָסִים֒ 	1	clasps	The clasps fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in [Exodus 26:6](./06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	26	35	lv9e		הַ⁠שֻּׁלְחָן֙ …הַ⁠מְּנֹרָה֙ 	1	The table must be on the north side	This is the **table** Yahweh told Moses how to make in [25:23-30](../25/23.md) and the **lampstand** he told him how to make in [25:31-39](../25/31.md).
+EXO	26	36	tiz7			1	The table must be on the north side	See how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
+EXO	26	36	rr16		תְּכֵ֧לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י	1	blue, purple, and scarlet material	Possible meanings are (1) “yarn that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple, and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
+EXO	26	36	f6td	translate-unknown	וְ⁠שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֑ר	1	fine twined linen	This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	26	36	r2fy	translate-unknown	רֹקֵֽם	1	an embroiderer	“a person who sews designs into cloth” or “a person who embroiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	26	37	av60			1	an embroiderer	See how you translated very similar instructions in [verse 32](../26/32.md).
+EXO	27	intro	x4f7			0		# Exodus 27 General Notes<br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.<br>- v. 1-8: Instructions for constructing the altar<br>- v. 9-19:  Instructions for constructing the outer curtain walls forming the courtyard around the sacred tent<br>- v. 20-21: Instructions for the lampstand<br><br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The tent of meeting<br>This chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building of the courtyard area around the tent of meeting containing the altar where priests made sacrifices to Yahweh.<br><br>## Potential translation issues<br>- The verb **make** at the beginning of [verse 9](../27/09.md) is the only verb from verses 9-18. Some languages may be able to translate a clause chain this long without additional verbs, others (including English), will need to supply at least a minimum number of verbs (ULT) or quite a few verbs (UST) for naturalness.<br>- There continues to be a number of possibly unknown terms, still all tangible objects.
+EXO	27	1	s8qy	translate-bdistance	חָמֵשׁ֩ אַמּ֨וֹת…וְ⁠חָמֵ֧שׁ אַמּ֣וֹת…וְ⁠שָׁלֹ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת	1	cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 2.3m … 2.3m … 138cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	4	hsq3		רֶ֣שֶׁת 	1	grate	a frame of crossed bars for holding wood when burning
+EXO	27	5	c5em	figs-explicit	וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֣ה אֹתָ֗⁠הּ תַּ֛חַת כַּרְכֹּ֥ב הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֖חַ מִ⁠לְּ⁠מָ֑טָּה וְ⁠הָיְתָ֣ה הָ⁠רֶ֔שֶׁת עַ֖ד חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּֽחַ	1	You must put the grate under the ledge of the altar	The grate was placed inside the altar. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “And you shall put the grate under the rim of the altar, on the inside of the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EXO	27	7	b3yx	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הוּבָ֥א אֶת־בַּדָּ֖י⁠ו	1	The poles must be put into the rings, and the poles must be on the two sides of the altar, to carry it	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “And you shall put its poles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EXO	27	8	ecmh	figs-123person	הֶרְאָ֥ה 	1	The poles must be put into the rings, and the poles must be on the two sides of the altar, to carry it	Here, **he** refers to Yahweh in the third person. If it would be unnatural in your language for someone to refer to himself in this way you may need to change it. Alternate translation: “I showed” or “Yahweh showed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+EXO	27	8	frcs	figs-123person	יַעֲשֽׂוּ	1	The poles must be put into the rings, and the poles must be on the two sides of the altar, to carry it	Here, **they** refers to whomever will make all these items. It is an indication that even though Yahweh has been speaking to Moses in the singular throughout that these instructions are meant to be conveyed to craftsmen in Israel. See [25:intro](../25/intro.md) for more. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+EXO	27	9	v748	translate-unknown	שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֗ר	1	fine twined linen	This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	27	9	ce9a	translate-bdistance	מֵאָ֤ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּה֙	1	one hundred cubits	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	10	qq8f		וְ⁠עַמֻּדָ֣י⁠ו עֶשְׂרִ֔ים וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֥ם עֶשְׂרִ֖ים נְחֹ֑שֶׁת	1	one hundred cubits	Here, **bronze** may refer to both the **pillars** and the **bases** or just to the **bases.** The pillars inside the tent were wood overlaid with gold, these may be wood overlaid with bronze.
+EXO	27	11	gjg5			1	there must be hangings one hundred cubits long	See how you translated many similar words in [Exodus 27:9-10](../27/09.md).
+EXO	27	11	ynao	figs-ellipsis	מֵ֣אָה 	1	there must be hangings one hundred cubits long	Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. Alternate translation: “100 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+EXO	27	11	xev2	translate-bdistance	מֵ֣אָה 	1	there must be hangings one hundred cubits long	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	12	p4u4	translate-bdistance	חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּ֑ה	1	there must be a curtain	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	13	w2sg	translate-bdistance	חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים אַמָּֽה	1	The courtyard must also be fifty cubits long	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	14	u8nm	translate-bdistance	וַ⁠חֲמֵ֨שׁ עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה	1	fifteen cubits	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 6.9m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	14	z8n2		עַמֻּדֵי⁠הֶ֣ם 	1	posts	These were strong pieces of wood set upright and used as supports. See how you translated these in [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md).
+EXO	27	14	gz7s		וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 	1	bases	These were metal blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
+EXO	27	15	s2cc	translate-bdistance	חְמֵ֥שׁ עֶשְׂרֵ֖ה	1	fifteen cubits	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 6.9m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	15	hlzp		עַמֻּדֵי⁠הֶ֣ם 	1	posts	These were strong pieces of wood set upright and used as supports. See how you translated these in [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md).
+EXO	27	15	2z7b		וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 	1	bases	These were metal blocks that had a slot in them to keep the board in place. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
+EXO	27	16	kn9u			1	blue, purple, and scarlet material and fine twined linen	See how you translated a nearly identical passage in [26:36](../26/36.md).
+EXO	27	16	g5wi	/translate-bdistance	עֶשְׂרִ֣ים אַמָּ֗ה	1	an embroiderer	You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	18	wt7n	translate-bdistance	מֵאָ֨ה בָֽ⁠אַמָּ֜ה…חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים…חָמֵ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת	1	one hundred cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46m … 23m … 2.3m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	27	18	mu6b	figs-ellipsis	חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֗ים	1	one hundred cubits	Here, “cubits” is omitted because it is understood as a repetition of the instructions in verse 9. Alternate translation: “50 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+EXO	27	19	bs7c	translate-unknown	יְתֵדֹתָ֛י⁠ו …יִתְדֹ֥ת 	1	tent pegs	These are sharp pieces of metal used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground or tied to ropes to create tension on something stood upright to stabilize it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EXO	27	21	p7ru	figs-synecdoche	הָ⁠עֵדֻ֗ת 	1	ark of testimony	This refers to the chest that contains the sacred slabs of stone on which Yahweh had written his commandments. If it would be more clear to your readers you may include a reference to the chest. Alternate translation: “Box of the Testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+EXO	27	21	nlwz		אֹת֨⁠וֹ יַעֲרֹךְ֩ אֹת֨⁠וֹ	1	ark of testimony	Here, **it** refers to the lamp mentioned in the previous verse and **arrange** means to set it up for burning and light it. Alternate translation: “shall set up the lampstand and light it”
+EXO	27	21	j41s	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה	1	ark of testimony	Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in front of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EXO	27	21	vr7m		חֻקַּ֤ת עוֹלָם֙ לְ⁠דֹ֣רֹתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠אֵ֖ת בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	This requirement will be a lasting statute	See how you translated a similar statement in [12:14](../12/14.md)
 EXO	28	intro	r3yx			0		# Exodus 28 General Notes<br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Holy garments<br>Because Yahweh is holy, only the priests could approach him, and when they did they must be wearing specially made clothing. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
 EXO	28	1	bsm1			1	General Information:	Yahweh continues telling Moses what the people must do ([Exodus 25:1](../25/01.md)).
 EXO	28	1	e1xb	figs-you		1	Call to yourself	Here “yourself” refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@@ -2361,7 +2332,7 @@ EXO	36	13	j75x	translate-numbers		1	fifty gold clasps	“50 gold clasps” (See:
 EXO	36	14	m2ac			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:7](../26/07.md).
 EXO	36	14	us17	translate-numbers		1	made eleven	“made 11” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 EXO	36	15	fa6i			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:8](../26/08.md).
-EXO	36	15	ret8	translate-numbers		1	thirty cubits	“30 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	36	15	ret8	translate-numbers		1	thirty cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 13.8m … 184cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	36	16	wwj6			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:9](../26/09.md).
 EXO	36	17	qt9b			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:10](../26/10.md).
 EXO	36	17	jm1l	translate-numbers		1	fifty loops	“50 loops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -2370,7 +2341,7 @@ EXO	36	18	a7mn	translate-numbers		1	fifty bronze clasps	“50 bronze clasps” (
 EXO	36	19	p3ke			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:14](../26/14.md).
 EXO	36	20	t739			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:15](../26/15.md).
 EXO	36	21	prx5			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:16](../26/16.md).
-EXO	36	21	gci3	translate-bdistance		1	ten cubits…one and a half cubits	“10 cubits…1.5 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+EXO	36	21	gci3	translate-bdistance		1	ten cubits…one and a half cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 4.6m … 69cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	36	22	l8yx			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:17](../26/17.md).
 EXO	36	22	vq4m			1	two wooden pegs for joining	A wooden peg is a small piece of wood sticking out beyond the end of the board so it can be secured.
 EXO	36	23	ev65			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:18](../26/18.md).
@@ -2403,7 +2374,7 @@ EXO	36	38	pr67			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these wor
 EXO	37	intro	mt99			0		# Exodus 37 General Notes<br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The ark of the covenant<br>The ark, mentioned in previous chapters, is constructed in this chapter. There are other furnishings of the tabernacle that are also produced in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])
 EXO	37	1	byr3			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 25:10](../25/10.md).
 EXO	37	1	xz1t	translate-names		1	Bezalel	This is the name of a man. See how you translated this in [Exodus 31:2](../31/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-EXO	37	1	ps6e	translate-bdistance		1	two and a half cubits…one cubit and a half	A cubit is 46 centimeters. Alternate translation: “2.5 cubits…1.5 cubits” or “115 centimeters…69 centimeters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+EXO	37	1	ps6e	translate-bdistance		1	two and a half cubits…one cubit and a half	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 115cm … 69cm … 69cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	37	2	kb3s			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md).
 EXO	37	3	pb6v			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 25:12](../25/12.md).
 EXO	37	3	ut8d	figs-metaphor		1	its four feet	These four pieces of wood that supported the ark are spoken of as if they were human or animal feet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2411,7 +2382,7 @@ EXO	37	4	nr8y			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these word
 EXO	37	4	n9kr			1	He made	Though “he” refers to Bezalel, “he” may include all of the workers who assisted him.
 EXO	37	5	v9j7			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 25:14](../25/14.md).
 EXO	37	6	liw8			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 25:17](../25/17.md).
-EXO	37	6	ba8a	translate-bdistance		1	two and a half cubits…one and a half cubits	A cubit is 46 centimeters. Alternate translation: “2.5 cubits…1.5 cubits” or “115 centimeters…69 centimeters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+EXO	37	6	ba8a	translate-bdistance		1	two and a half cubits…one and a half cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 115cm … 69cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	37	7	nhi3			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md).
 EXO	37	8	g96y			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 25:19](../25/19.md).
 EXO	37	8	y13s	figs-activepassive		1	They were made as one piece	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “He made them as one piece” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2419,7 +2390,7 @@ EXO	37	9	e6na			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these word
 EXO	37	9	r7nm	figs-personification		1	The cherubim spread out their wings upward and overshadowed	Bezalel placed the statues of the cherubim as if they were real cherubim which were spreading their wings and overshadowing the atonement lid. Alternate translation: “They placed the winged creatures so that their wings touched each other and spread out over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 EXO	37	9	zsq1			1	The cherubim faced one another and looked toward	“The faces of the cherubim were towards each other, and they looked toward”
 EXO	37	10	ktf8			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 25:23](../25/23.md).
-EXO	37	10	fnt3	translate-bdistance		1	two cubits…one cubit…one and a half cubits	A cubit is 46 centimeters. Alternate translation: “2 cubits…1 cubit…1.5 cubits” or “92 centimeters…46 centimeters…69 centimeters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+EXO	37	10	fnt3	translate-bdistance		1	two cubits…one cubit…one and a half cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 92cm … 46cm … 69cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	37	11	l2kv			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 25:24](../25/24.md).
 EXO	37	12	i1ba			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 25:25](../25/25.md).
 EXO	37	12	j4iq	translate-bdistance		1	handbreadth	This was the width of a man’s hand with fingers spread out. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
@@ -2449,7 +2420,7 @@ EXO	37	24	uz5h			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these wor
 EXO	37	24	arz1	translate-bweight		1	one talent	“33 kilograms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
 EXO	37	25	el8w			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 30:1-2](../30/01.md).
 EXO	37	25	li9d			1	Connecting Statement:	Bezalel’s work crew continues to build the tabernacle and furniture.
-EXO	37	25	c8mg	translate-bdistance		1	cubit	A cubit is 46 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	37	25	c8mg	translate-bdistance		1	cubit	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46cm … 46cm … 92cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	37	25	xq8k	figs-activepassive		1	Its horns were made as one piece with it	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “He made the horns as one piece with the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	37	26	ep66			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 30:3](../30/03.md).
 EXO	37	27	zez2			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 30:4](../30/04.md).
@@ -2462,7 +2433,7 @@ EXO	37	29	akg9			1	the work of a perfumer	A perfumer is skilled in mixing spices
 EXO	38	intro	hp86			0		# Exodus 38 General Notes<br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The altar<br>The altar is constructed in this chapter. There are other furnishings of the tabernacle that are also produced in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])<br><br>### Materials<br>The list of materials being used is intended to give the reader an understanding of the scale of the tabernacle. It should fill the reader with awe concerning the power of Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EXO	38	1	r81c			1	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:1](../27/01.md).
 EXO	38	1	gk19			1	Connecting Statement:	Bezalel’s work crew continues to build the tabernacle and furniture.
-EXO	38	1	g5ex	translate-bdistance		1	cubits	One cubit is 46 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	38	1	g5ex	translate-bdistance		1	cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 2.3m … 2.3m … 138cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	38	2	g71x			1	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md).
 EXO	38	2	se9l	figs-activepassive		1	The horns were made of one piece	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “He made the horns as one piece” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	38	3	v73t			1	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:3](../27/03.md).
@@ -2481,17 +2452,17 @@ EXO	38	8	e1wq			1	mirrors	A mirror is a piece of polished metal or glass that re
 EXO	38	9	clk6			1	General Information:	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:9](../27/09.md).
 EXO	38	9	j2nq			1	Connecting Statement:	Bezalel’s work crew continues to build the tabernacle and furniture.
 EXO	38	9	i24a	translate-numbers		1	one hundred	“100” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	38	9	su7e	translate-bdistance		1	cubits	A cubit is 46 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	38	9	su7e	translate-bdistance		1	cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	38	10	nz6q			1	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md).
 EXO	38	10	x9jn	translate-numbers		1	twenty	“20” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 EXO	38	11	mp6n			1	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:11](../27/11.md).
 EXO	38	11	kl3h	translate-numbers		1	one hundred…twenty	“100…20” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	38	11	xl4c	translate-bdistance		1	cubits	A cubit is 46 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	38	11	xl4c	translate-bdistance		1	cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	38	12	g5iz			1	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:12](../27/12.md).
 EXO	38	12	vuw5	translate-numbers		1	fifty…ten	“50…10” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 EXO	38	13	iju3			1	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:13](../27/13.md).
 EXO	38	13	fw1k	translate-numbers		1	fifty	“50” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	38	13	jl57	translate-bdistance		1	cubits	A cubit is 46 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	38	13	jl57	translate-bdistance		1	cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 23m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	38	14	n1xj			1	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:14](../27/14.md).
 EXO	38	14	b85e	translate-numbers		1	fifteen…three	“15…3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 EXO	38	15	dlq7			1	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:15](../27/15.md).
@@ -2502,7 +2473,7 @@ EXO	38	17	va1m	figs-activepassive		1	The hooks and rods for the posts were made
 EXO	38	17	i3bf	figs-activepassive		1	All the courtyard posts were covered with silver	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “They covered the courtyard posts with silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	38	18	hmi5			1	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:16](../27/16.md).
 EXO	38	18	h4ki	translate-numbers		1	twenty…five	“20…5” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-EXO	38	18	yf6z	translate-bdistance		1	cubits	A cubit is 46 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
+EXO	38	18	yf6z	translate-bdistance		1	cubits	You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m … 9.2m … 9.2m … 2.3m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EXO	38	18	trz5	figs-activepassive		1	The curtain was made of	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “They made the curtain out of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EXO	38	19	fjw4			1	General Information	See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:17](../27/17.md).
 EXO	38	19	kqf3	translate-numbers		1	four	“4” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])

en_tn_09-1SA.tsv

@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1SA	1	5	k5i7		מָנָ֥ה אַחַ֖ת אַפָּ֑יִם	1	one portion of two faces	The phrase, **one portion of two faces** could mean: (1) Elkanah gave Hannah a double portion. Alternate translation: “a double portion”  (2) Elkanah gave Hannah especially desirable portions of meat. Alternate translation: “a special portion”
 1SA	1	5	b7ri	figs-euphemism	סָגַ֥ר רַחְמָֽ⁠הּ	1	had shut her womb	The phrase **shut her womb** is used figuratively to mean that Yahweh had not allowed Hannah to become pregnant. If it would be clearer in your language, you can use a phrase that would be most natural in your language. Alternative translation: “made her barren” or “prevented her from becoming pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 1SA	1	5	cg80	translate-unknown	מָנָ֥ה	1	portion	Here, **portion** refers to the portion of meat that God let the people eat from the animal which they sacrificed.  (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1SA	1	6	f5cg	grammar-connect-logic-result<br><br>	וְ⁠כִֽעֲסַ֤תָּ⁠ה צָֽרָתָ⁠הּ֙ גַּם־כַּ֔עַס בַּ⁠עֲב֖וּר הַרְּעִמָ֑⁠הּ	1	And her rival would provoke her, even with provocation in order to cause her to thunder	This means that Peninnah would intentionally seek ways to humiliate and mock Hannah so that she would feel emotionally disturbed and be greatly troubled in spirit. You can translate this in a way that would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And Peninnah would intentionally provoke Hannah severely, for the purpose of hurting her feelings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1SA	1	6	f5cg	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠כִֽעֲסַ֤תָּ⁠ה צָֽרָתָ⁠הּ֙ גַּם־כַּ֔עַס בַּ⁠עֲב֖וּר הַרְּעִמָ֑⁠הּ	1	And her rival would provoke her, even with provocation in order to cause her to thunder	This means that Peninnah would intentionally seek ways to humiliate and mock Hannah so that she would feel emotionally disturbed and be greatly troubled in spirit. You can translate this in a way that would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And Peninnah would intentionally provoke Hannah severely, for the purpose of hurting her feelings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1SA	1	6	1tlc	figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠כִֽעֲסַ֤תָּ⁠ה צָֽרָתָ⁠הּ֙ גַּם־כַּ֔עַס	1	And her rival would provoke her, even with provocation	The word **provocation** is an abstract noun. If it would be more natural in your language you may translate this word using a verb phrase or adjective. Alternate translation: “And Peninnah would intentionally provoke Hannah severely” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
 1SA	1	6	mw8a		צָֽרָתָ⁠הּ֙	1	her rival	Here, **her rival** refers to Hannah’s rival Peninnah. It is probable that Elkanah took Peninnah as his second wife after Hannah was unable to bear children so that he could have offspring by Penninah. This would result in Hannah and Peninnah viewing each other as rivals. You can use a word or phrase that would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his second wife” or “her co-wife”
 1SA	1	6	gq73	figs-simile	הַרְּעִמָ֑⁠הּ	1	cause her to thunder	The phrase **cause her to thunder** is a figurative way of saying that Peninnah’s actions caused Hannah to be greatly irritated or troubled. The point of this comparison is that Peninnah would cause Hannah to be greatly bothered and disrupted in a way that is similar to the sky being disrupted to the point of thundering. You can communicate this in a way which would be most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

en_tn_15-EZR.tsv

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
 EZR	front	intro	fa5r			0		# Introduction to Ezra<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of Ezra<br><br>1. The first Jewish exiles return to Jerusalem from Persia (1:1–2:70)<br>2. The people rebuild and dedicate the temple in Jerusalem (3:1–6:22)<br>3. More exiles return; Ezra teaches the Law of Yahweh (7:1-8:36)<br>4. The problem of the people marrying foreigners, and how it is solved (9:1–10:44)<br><br>### What is the Book of Ezra about?<br><br>The book of Ezra is about how the people of Israel returned from Babylon and tried to worship Yahweh again as the law required. To do this, they needed to rebuild their temple so that they could sacrifice to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>The book of Ezra is named for the priest Ezra who led the first group of Jews out of exile and back to Judah. Translators can use the traditional title “Ezra.” Or they might choose a clearer title, such as “The Book about Ezra.”<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### Why were Israelites not allowed to marry people from other nations?<br><br>Foreigners worshiped many false gods. Yahweh did not allow his people to marry foreigners because he knew that this would cause the people of Israel to worship false gods. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])<br><br>### Did all of the people of Israel return to their homeland?<br><br>Many of the Jews remained in Babylon instead of returning to the land of Israel. Many of them were successful in Babylon and desired to remain there. However, this meant that they were unable to worship Yahweh in Jerusalem as their ancestors had done.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### How does the Book of Ezra use the term “Israel”?<br><br>The book of Ezra uses the term “Israel” to refer to the kingdom of Judah. It was mostly made up of the tribes of Judah and Benjamin. The other ten tribes had ended their loyalty to any kings descended from David. God allowed the Assyrians to conquer the other ten tribes and take them into exile. As a result, they mixed with other people groups and did not return to the land of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/israel]])<br><br>### Are the events in the Book of Ezra told in the order that they actually happened?<br><br>Some of the events in the Book of Ezra are not told in the order that they happened, but are grouped according to theme. Translators should pay attention to notes that signal when events are probably out of chronological order.
-EZR	1	intro	dd25			0		# Ezra 01 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The chapter records the story of the first Jews as they return from Persia to Judea.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### King Cyrus<br><br>King Cyrus allowed the Jews to return because he wanted them to rebuild the temple. Those who stayed behind gave gifts to those who left to help them on their journey and resettlement. This practice was common under the reign of Cyrus and was used as a way to maintain peace throughout his kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Jews<br><br>After they returned to Judea, the focus of the rest of the Old Testament is on the Jewish people.
+EZR	1	intro	dd25			0		# Ezra 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The chapter records the story of the first Jews as they return from Persia to Judea.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### King Cyrus<br><br>King Cyrus allowed the Jews to return because he wanted them to rebuild the temple. Those who stayed behind gave gifts to those who left to help them on their journey and resettlement. This practice was common under the reign of Cyrus and was used as a way to maintain peace throughout his kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Jews<br><br>After they returned to Judea, the focus of the rest of the Old Testament is on the Jewish people.
 EZR	1	1	nnrv	writing-newevent	וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנַ֣ת	1		The word **now** introduces a new event in the story. Use the normal method for introducing the beginning of a true story in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EZR	1	1	ath4	figs-explicit	וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנַ֣ת אַחַ֗ת לְ⁠כ֨וֹרֶשׁ֙ מֶ֣לֶךְ פָּרַ֔ס	1		The original Jewish readers of this book would have known that this is not a reference to the year when Cyrus first became king of the Persians. Rather, it is a reference to the later year when, by conquering Babylon, he became king over the Jews, since Babylon is the nation that had previously conquered the Jews and taken them into exile. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “During the first year after Cyrus, the king of Persia, conquered Babylon and became ruler over the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	1	1	qvp1		וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנַ֣ת אַחַ֗ת לְ⁠כ֨וֹרֶשׁ֙ מֶ֣לֶךְ פָּרַ֔ס	1		This expression could mean that sometime during the first year that he ruled over the Jews, Cyrus issued the decree that this verse describes. However, it could also mean that he issued this decree as soon as he became their ruler. Alternate translation: “As soon as Cyrus, the king of Persia, conquered Babylon and became the ruler of the Jews”
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ EZR	1	3	hz9g	figs-idiom	וְ⁠יַ֕עַל לִ⁠ירוּשָׁלִַ֖ם	1		C
 EZR	1	3	k839	figs-distinguish	לִ⁠ירוּשָׁלִַ֖ם אֲשֶׁ֣ר בִּ⁠יהוּדָ֑ה	1		Cyrus once again provides background information about the city. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem, in the province of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 EZR	1	3	gxbj	figs-metaphor	בֵּ֤ית יְהוָה֙	1		Here, **house** figuratively means a temple. Cyrus continues to speak of this temple as if it would be a house in which Yahweh lived, since Yahweh’s presence would be there. Alternate translation: “a temple for Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	1	3	o6x4	figs-distinguish	יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל ה֥וּא הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר בִּ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָֽם׃	1		Here Cyrus provides further background information to inform his subjects who Yahweh is. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, the God whom the people of Israel worship, who should have a temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-EZR	1	3	3gt1	figs-possession	אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1		The phrase **the God of Israel** does not mean that God belongs to Israel, but that this is the God whom Israel worships. Alternate translation: “the God whom Israel worships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+EZR	1	3	agt1	figs-possession	אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1		The phrase **the God of Israel** does not mean that God belongs to Israel, but that this is the God whom Israel worships. Alternate translation: “the God whom Israel worships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 EZR	1	4	t7ux		וְ⁠כָל־הַ⁠נִּשְׁאָ֗ר מִֽ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠מְּקֹמוֹת֮ אֲשֶׁ֣ר ה֣וּא גָֽר־שָׁם֒ יְנַשְּׂא֨וּ⁠הוּ֙ אַנְשֵׁ֣י מְקֹמ֔⁠וֹ	1	Whoever survives in any place where he lives, let the people in that place help him	The structure of this sentence may present difficulties for translation because the long phrase at the beginning actually describes who will receive the action, rather than who will do the action. To make things clearer for your readers, you could say first who will do the action. Alternate translation: “Let the people who live in any place where Jewish survivors are in exile help them”
 EZR	1	4	fr03	figs-idiom	וְ⁠כָל־הַ⁠נִּשְׁאָ֗ר	1		This phrase refers to any Israelite who is a surviving member of the group that was taken into exile, or who is a descendant of someone in that group. The word **remaining** refers to people who are remaining or left over from a larger group. In this context, that larger group is all of the Israelites who lived in the land of Judah before the Babylonians conquered it. Alternate translation: “Any survivor of the Jews who were taken from their land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	1	4	vvzw	figs-idiom	מִֽ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠מְּקֹמוֹת֮ אֲשֶׁ֣ר ה֣וּא גָֽר־שָׁם֒	1		**Sojourning** means living somewhere other than in one’s native land. Here, **he** refers to any Jew such as is described in the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “in any of the places where a Jew may be living in exile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ EZR	1	4	p5jk	figs-gendernotations	יְנַשְּׂא֨וּ⁠הוּ֙ אַנְש
 EZR	1	4	d9rn	figs-idiom	יְנַשְּׂא֨וּ⁠הוּ֙	1		**Lift** here is an idiom that means help. Alternate translation: “let … help him by providing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	1	4	f6tk	figs-explicit	הַ֨⁠נְּדָבָ֔ה	1		The book expects readers to know that these would be extra gifts, beyond the necessities already listed. They might include money to help rebuild the temple and vessels to be used in the temple, such as the ones listed in [1:7–11](../01/07.md). Alternate translation: “any extra gifts that they want to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	1	4	swvz	figs-metaphor	לְ⁠בֵ֥ית הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר בִּ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָֽם׃	1		**House** figuratively means a temple. Cyrus continues to speak of this temple as if it would be a house in which God lived, since God’s presence would be there. The book repeatedly uses the expressions **house**, **house of God**, and “house of Yahweh” to mean the temple in Jerusalem. It will be helpful to your readers if you translate these expressions consistently every time. Alternate translation: “for the temple that the Jews will rebuild for God in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EZR	1	5	i39z	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יָּק֜וּמוּ	1		The word **then** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous verses have described. Alternate translation: “In response to this decree ... prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+EZR	1	5	i39z	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יָּק֜וּמוּ	1		The word **then** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous verses have described. Alternate translation: “In response to this decree … prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EZR	1	5	kkxf	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יָּק֜וּמוּ	1		In this context, the term **arose** means that these leaders took action to get an enterprise under way. It does not indicate that these leaders had been sitting or lying down and that they stood up. Alternate translation: “Then … started making preparations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	1	5	hgd0	figs-ellipsis	רָאשֵׁ֣י הָ⁠אָב֗וֹת	1		This is an abbreviated way of saying the heads of the father’s houses. Alternate translation: “the clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EZR	1	5	v371		רָאשֵׁ֣י הָ⁠אָב֗וֹת	1		Among the Israelites, the expression “father’s house” or “house of the father” originally described an extended-family group. It later came to be used more generally to refer to a larger clan within a tribe. In this expression, the word “house” (which does not appear in the abbreviated version here) figuratively describes all the people descended from a particular person. The term views all of those descendants as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “the clan leaders”
@@ -60,13 +60,13 @@ EZR	1	8	w8rk	figs-idiom	וַֽ⁠יִּסְפְּרֵ⁠ם֙ לְ⁠שֵׁשְׁ
 EZR	1	8	wb5a	translate-names	לְ⁠שֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֔ר	1		This leader of the first group of exiles to return to Judah, who is called **Sheshbazzar** here and in [1:11](../01/11.md), [5:14](../05/14.md), and [5:16](../05/16.md), seems to be the same person who is called Zerubbabel in the rest of the book. The reason for the difference in names is not clear. Some interpreters suggest that he was known as Sheshbazzar in the Persian court and that he used the name Zerubbabel as governor of Judah. There are examples in the Bible of Jews having both a Persian name and a Hebrew name. It would probably be best simply to translate both names consistently where they appear without calling attention to the difference, but you could add this possible explanation in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	1	8	qsti		הַ⁠נָּשִׂ֖יא לִ⁠יהוּדָֽה׃	1		The book says in [5:14](../05/14.md) that Cyrus appointed Sheshbazzar to be the governor of the province of Judah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use that phrase to describe him here. Alternate translation: “whom Cyrus had appointed to be the governor of the province of Judah”
 EZR	1	9	hu9c	figs-idiom	וְ⁠אֵ֖לֶּה מִסְפָּרָ֑⁠ם	1	General Information:	This expression means that what follows is the number of each kind of utensil that Cyrus is returning (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EZR	1	9	noww		מַחֲלָפִ֖ים	1	General Information:	This word occurs only here in the Hebrew Bible, and there is some disagreement about its meaning. It is probably a borrowed term from a related language that means<br>“knife, <br>” but the ancient Greek translation took its meaning to be “replacements,<br>” that is, basins to replace others that became unusable. You may see translations that follow the ancient Greek, but we recommend following the Hebrew.<br>
+EZR	1	9	noww		מַחֲלָפִ֖ים	1	General Information:	This word occurs only here in the Hebrew Bible, and there is some disagreement about its meaning. It is probably a borrowed term from a related language that means<br>“knife,”<br>but the ancient Greek translation took its meaning to be “replacements,”<br>that is, basins to replace others that became unusable. You may see translations that follow the ancient Greek, but we recommend following the Hebrew.
 EZR	1	10	ja6u		כְּפ֤וֹרֵי כֶ֨סֶף֙ מִשְׁנִ֔ים	1	bowls	This means that these bowls were a different type of bowl than the gold ones just mentioned. This could also mean that they were second in rank of status or honor behind the gold bowls. It does not mean that the silver was of a different type than the silver in the basins described in [1:9](../01/09.md).
 EZR	1	11	z55f		כָּל־כֵּלִים֙ לַ⁠זָּהָ֣ב וְ⁠לַ⁠כֶּ֔סֶף חֲמֵ֥שֶׁת אֲלָפִ֖ים וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֣ע מֵא֑וֹת	1	5400	This expression means that the total number of these gold and silver objects was **5,400**. Verses [1:9](../01/09.md) and [1:10](../01/10.md) actually list only 2,499 items, and it is not clear why the numbers are different. The explanation does not seem to be that the total here includes other miscellaneous items because the last item on the list itself is other vessels. It would probably be best simply to report this total without calling attention to the difference and trying to explain it, since there is no clear reason for it.
 EZR	1	11	i30r	figs-idiom	הַ⁠כֹּ֞ל הֶעֱלָ֣ה שֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֗ר עִ֚ם הֵעָל֣וֹת הַ⁠גּוֹלָ֔ה מִ⁠בָּבֶ֖ל לִ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָֽם	1		Like the similar expression in [1:3](../01/03.md), here the book says **brought up** and **going up** because the Jews had to travel from a river valley up into the mountains to return from exile to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Sheshbazzar brought all these vessels along when he traveled to Jerusalem with the group of Jews who had been taken away from their homeland but who were now returning from Babylon to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	1	11	kt84	figs-abstractnouns	הַ⁠גּוֹלָ֔ה	1		The abstract noun **exiles** refers, in this context, to the community of Jews who were living in Babylon because the Babylonians had relocated them away from their homeland when they conquered Jerusalem. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the group of Jews who had been taken away from their homeland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EZR	1	11	fi2e	translate-names	מִ⁠בָּבֶ֖ל	1		**Babylon** is the name of a city. The book also uses this name for the empire that was once ruled from that city, and for the region that had been at the heart of this empire that became a province in the Persian Empire. The name occurs many times in the book, and it will be helpful to your readers if you translate it consistently each time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-EZR	2	intro	rr42			0		# Ezra 02 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Genealogy<br><br>People had to prove through their genealogies that they were priests or that they<br>were even Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]])
+EZR	2	intro	rr42			0		# Ezra 2 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Genealogy<br><br>People had to prove through their genealogies that they were priests or that they<br>were even Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]])
 EZR	2	1	ezk9	figs-idiom	בְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠מְּדִינָ֗ה	1	General Information:	Here, **the sons of the province** is an idiom that means that these people originated in the province of Judah. Alternate translation: “the people from the province of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	2	1	ponw	figs-metonymy	הַ⁠מְּדִינָ֗ה	1		**The province** means the province of Judah. The book is referring to Judah by something associated with it, its status as a province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EZR	2	1	byc2	figs-idiom	הָֽ⁠עֹלִים֙	1	went up	**Went up** means traveled from Babylon back to Judah, since that involves going from a river valley up into the mountains. Alternate translation: “those who returned to Judah from Babylon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -113,13 +113,13 @@ EZR	2	19	i6kg	figs-metaphor	בְּנֵ֣י חָשֻׁ֔ם	1	General Information:
 EZR	2	19	j9nm	translate-names	חָשֻׁ֔ם	1	Hashum	**Hashum** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	2	20	r5bq	figs-metaphor	בְּנֵ֥י גִבָּ֖ר	1	Gibbar	Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Gibbar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	2	20	g26q	translate-names	גִבָּ֖ר	1	ninety-five	**Gibbar** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-EZR	2	21	iu4s	figs-idiom	בְּנֵ֣י בֵֽית־לָ֔חֶם מֵאָ֖ה עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁלֹשָֽׁה	1	The sons of Bethlehem	The list speaks here of the **sons of Bethlehem**. This is an idiom that means that <br>these men were from families that had originally lived in that town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Bethlehem, 123 returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EZR	2	21	iu4s	figs-idiom	בְּנֵ֣י בֵֽית־לָ֔חֶם מֵאָ֖ה עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁלֹשָֽׁה	1	The sons of Bethlehem	The list speaks here of the **sons of Bethlehem**. This is an idiom that means that<br>these men were from families that had originally lived in that town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Bethlehem, 123 returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	2	21	j7z9	translate-names	בֵֽית־לָ֔חֶם	1		**Bethlehem** is the name of a town. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	2	22	v2ky	translate-names	אַנְשֵׁ֥י נְטֹפָ֖ה חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים וְ⁠שִׁשָּֽׁה׃	1	Netophah	**Netophah** is the name of a town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Netophah, 56 returned.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	2	23	l29x	translate-names	אַנְשֵׁ֣י עֲנָת֔וֹת מֵאָ֖ה עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁמֹנָֽה	1	Anathoth	**Anathoth** is the name of a town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Anathoth, 128 returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-EZR	2	24	qlw7	figs-idiom	בְּנֵ֥י עַזְמָ֖וֶת	1	forty-two	The list speaks here of the **sons of Azmaveth**. This is an idiom that means that <br>these men were from families that had originally lived in that town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Azmaveth, 42 returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EZR	2	24	qlw7	figs-idiom	בְּנֵ֥י עַזְמָ֖וֶת	1	forty-two	The list speaks here of the **sons of Azmaveth**. This is an idiom that means that<br>these men were from families that had originally lived in that town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Azmaveth, 42 returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	2	24	d37s	translate-names	עַזְמָ֖וֶת	1	Azmaveth	**Azmaveth** is the name of a town. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-EZR	2	25	y9xa	figs-idiom	בְּנֵ֨י קִרְיַ֤ת עָרִים֙ כְּפִירָ֣ה וּ⁠בְאֵר֔וֹת	1	Kiriath Arim … Kephirah … Beeroth	The list speaks here of the **sons of Kirjath-Arim, Kephirah, and Beeroth**. <br>This is an idiom that means that these men were from families that had originally lived in those towns. Alternate translation: “From the towns of Kirjath-Arim, Kephirah, and Beeroth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EZR	2	25	y9xa	figs-idiom	בְּנֵ֨י קִרְיַ֤ת עָרִים֙ כְּפִירָ֣ה וּ⁠בְאֵר֔וֹת	1	Kiriath Arim … Kephirah … Beeroth	The list speaks here of the **sons of Kirjath-Arim, Kephirah, and Beeroth**.<br>This is an idiom that means that these men were from families that had originally lived in those towns. Alternate translation: “From the towns of Kirjath-Arim, Kephirah, and Beeroth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	2	25	rw2o	translate-names	קִרְיַ֤ת עָרִים֙ כְּפִירָ֣ה וּ⁠בְאֵר֔וֹת	1		**Kirjath-Arim, Kephirah**, and **Beeroth** are the names of towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	2	26	iyhq	figs-idiom	בְּנֵ֤י הָ⁠רָמָה֙ וָ⁠גָ֔בַע	1		The list speaks here of the **sons of Ramah and Geba**. This is an idiom that means that these men were from families that had originally lived in those towns.<br>Alternate translation: “From the towns of Ramah and Geba” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	2	26	k69y	translate-names	הָ⁠רָמָה֙ וָ⁠גָ֔בַע	1	Geba	**Ramah** and **Geba** are the names of towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ EZR	2	36	c52r		הַֽ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֑ים	1	General Information:	**The priest
 EZR	2	36	xd3k	figs-metaphor	בְּנֵ֤י יְדַֽעְיָה֙ לְ⁠בֵ֣ית יֵשׁ֔וּעַ תְּשַׁ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת שִׁבְעִ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁלֹשָֽׁה	1	Jedaiah	Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Jedaiah who were descendants of Jeshua, 973 returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	2	36	m352	translate-names	יְדַֽעְיָה֙…יֵשׁ֔וּעַ	1	Jeshua	**Jedaiah** is the name of a man, and **Jeshua** is the name of one of his male descendants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	2	36	u51b	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠בֵ֣ית יֵשׁ֔וּעַ	1		Here, **house** describes all the people descended from a particular person. The book is describing all of the descendants **of Jeshua** figuratively as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “who were descendants of Jeshua” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EZR	2	37	vauy	figs-metaphor	בְּנֵ֣י אִמֵּ֔ר	1		Here,**sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Immer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EZR	2	37	vauy	figs-metaphor	בְּנֵ֣י אִמֵּ֔ר	1		Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Immer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	2	37	u9p4	translate-names	אִמֵּ֔ר	1		**Immer** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	2	38	fvt0	figs-metaphor	בְּנֵ֣י פַשְׁח֔וּר	1		Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Pashhur” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	2	38	w3dr	translate-names	פַשְׁח֔וּר	1		**Pashhur** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -186,21 +186,21 @@ EZR	2	59	kgcj	translate-names	מִ⁠תֵּ֥ל מֶ֨לַח֙ תֵּ֣ל חַר
 EZR	2	59	gd69		וְ⁠לֹ֣א יָֽכְל֗וּ לְ⁠הַגִּ֤יד	1		Alternate translation: “but they had no records to prove”
 EZR	2	59	ay8y	figs-parallelism	בֵּית־אֲבוֹתָ⁠ם֙ וְ⁠זַרְעָ֔⁠ם אִ֥ם מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֖ל הֵֽם	1		All three of these phrases, **the house of their fathers**, **their seed**, and **whether they were from Israel**, mean very similar things. They are used together to give clarity and emphasis. The first phrase refers to a person being able to name a well-known ancestor. The second phrase refers to a person being able to list his ancestors going back to the one that is well-known. The third phrase summarizes the other two: if a person cannot name an ancestor or recite his ancestry, then he cannot claim to be from Israel. If there would be no distinction between these phrases in your language, you could combine them into one phrase. Alternate translations: “that their ancestors had been Israelites” or “what clan they were from or who their ancestors were, whether they were really Israelites” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EZR	2	59	an9o	figs-metaphor	בֵּית־אֲבוֹתָ⁠ם֙	1		Among the Israelites, the expressions father’s house or **house of their fathers** originally described an extended-family group. It later came to be used more generally to refer to a larger clan within a tribe. In this expression, the word “house” figuratively describes all the people descended from a particular person. The term views all of those descendants as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “what clan they were from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EZR	2	59	yqp3	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠זַרְעָ֔⁠ם	1		Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning "offspring." In the Bible, the term refers most often to a person’s descendants. Here it is describing the ancestors of these people, that is, whose seed they were. Alternate translation: “or who their ancestors were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EZR	2	59	yqp3	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠זַרְעָ֔⁠ם	1		Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” In the Bible, the term refers most often to a person’s descendants. Here it is describing the ancestors of these people, that is, whose seed they were. Alternate translation: “or who their ancestors were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	2	60	k7wr		בְּנֵי־דְלָיָ֥ה בְנֵי־טוֹבִיָּ֖ה בְּנֵ֣י נְקוֹדָ֑א שֵׁ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁנָֽיִם	1	652	Alternate translation: “In this group were 652 men from the descendants of Delaiah, Tobiah, and Nekoda”
-EZR	2	60	v01g	figs-metaphor	בְּנֵי־דְלָיָ֥ה בְנֵי־טוֹבִיָּ֖ה בְּנֵ֣י נְקוֹדָ֑א	1		Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Either the men named here were not recognized clan heads of Israel, or the 652 people could not prove that they were descendants of these men. Alternate translation: “The descendants of Delaiah, Tobiah, and Nekoda” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EZR	2	60	v01g	figs-metaphor	בְּנֵי־דְלָיָ֥ה בְנֵי־טוֹבִיָּ֖ה בְּנֵ֣י נְקוֹדָ֑א	1		Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Either the men named here were not recognized clan heads of Israel, or the 652 people could not prove that they were descendants of these men. Alternate translation: “The descendants of Delaiah, Tobiah, and Nekoda” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	2	60	xr2g	translate-names	דְלָיָ֥ה…טוֹבִיָּ֖ה…נְקוֹדָ֑א	1	Delaiah … Tobiah … Nekoda	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	2	61	io29		וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵי֙ הַ⁠כֹּ֣הֲנִ֔ים	1		Alternate translation: “Some of the men who returned from those towns were descendants of the priests”
 EZR	2	61	heb8	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵי֙ הַ⁠כֹּ֣הֲנִ֔ים	1		Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “And descendants of the priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	2	61	mpkp	figs-metaphor	בְּנֵ֥י חֳבַיָּ֖ה בְּנֵ֣י הַקּ֑וֹץ בְּנֵ֣י בַרְזִלַּ֗י	1		Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “they were from the descendants of Habaiah, Hakkoz, and Barzillai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	2	61	vg3t	translate-names	חֳבַיָּ֖ה…הַקּ֑וֹץ…בַרְזִלַּ֗י	1	Habaiah … Hakkoz … Barzillai	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	2	61	d6en		אֲשֶׁ֣ר לָ֠קַח מִ⁠בְּנ֞וֹת בַּרְזִלַּ֤י הַ⁠גִּלְעָדִי֙ אִשָּׁ֔ה	1		You could start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Barzillai married a woman who was one of the descendants of Barzillai the Gileadite”
-EZR	2	61	bwy5	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנ֞וֹת בַּרְזִלַּ֤י הַ⁠גִּלְעָדִי֙	1		Here, **daughters** figuratively means female descendants. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Barzillai the Gileadite” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EZR	2	61	bwy5	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנ֞וֹת בַּרְזִלַּ֤י הַ⁠גִּלְעָדִי֙	1		Here, **daughters** figuratively means female descendants. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Barzillai the Gileadite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	2	61	cxge		וַ⁠יִּקָּרֵ֖א עַל־שְׁמָֽ⁠ם	1		Alternate translation: “and he took the name of her clan as his own name”
 EZR	2	62	yiq1	figs-activepassive	אֵ֗לֶּה בִּקְשׁ֧וּ כְתָבָ֛⁠ם הַ⁠מִּתְיַחְשִׂ֖ים	1	the records of their ancestry	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “They searched for a mention of their names in the lists of people who were descendants of the priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EZR	2	62	epi8	figs-activepassive	אֵ֗לֶּה בִּקְשׁ֧וּ כְתָבָ֛⁠ם הַ⁠מִּתְיַחְשִׂ֖ים וְ⁠לֹ֣א נִמְצָ֑אוּ	1	the records of their ancestry	There are two possible meanings for what these people **sought** in the **record**. (1) They were seeking their own names from among a list of descendants from Israelite clan leaders. See the UST. (2) They were seeking the names of the clan leaders listed in verse 61 from among a list of names of Israelite clan leaders. Alternate translation: “The people in that group searched in the documents that had the names of the ancestors of all the clans, but they did not find the names of these men” <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])<br><br>
+EZR	2	62	epi8	figs-activepassive	אֵ֗לֶּה בִּקְשׁ֧וּ כְתָבָ֛⁠ם הַ⁠מִּתְיַחְשִׂ֖ים וְ⁠לֹ֣א נִמְצָ֑אוּ	1	the records of their ancestry	There are two possible meanings for what these people **sought** in the **record**. (1) They were seeking their own names from among a list of descendants from Israelite clan leaders. See the UST. (2) They were seeking the names of the clan leaders listed in verse 61 from among a list of names of Israelite clan leaders. Alternate translation: “The people in that group searched in the documents that had the names of the ancestors of all the clans, but they did not find the names of these men”<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])<br><br>
 EZR	2	62	lls0	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠לֹ֣א נִמְצָ֑אוּ	1	the records of their ancestry	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “but they were not able to find any mention of their names there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EZR	2	62	r2wi	figs-activepassive	וַֽ⁠יְגֹאֲל֖וּ מִן־הַ⁠כְּהֻנָּֽה	1	the records of their ancestry	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “So the Jewish officials did not allow them to be priests" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EZR	2	62	r2wi	figs-activepassive	וַֽ⁠יְגֹאֲל֖וּ מִן־הַ⁠כְּהֻנָּֽה	1	the records of their ancestry	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “So the Jewish officials did not allow them to be priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	2	62	qt2w	figs-abstractnouns	וַֽ⁠יְגֹאֲל֖וּ מִן־הַ⁠כְּהֻנָּֽה	1	they were excluded from the priesthood as defiled	The abstract noun **priesthood** refers to the work that a priest does and the status that a priest holds as a representative of God to the people. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “And so they were not allowed to serve as priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EZR	2	63	d82e	translate-unknown	הַ⁠תִּרְשָׁ֨תָא֙	1		**Tirshatha** was the formal Persian title for the governor of a province, so this would be referring to Sheshbazzar, who may be the same person as Zerubbabel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the title with a word like “governor,” or you could state the title and then explain it. Alternate translation: “the Tirshatha, that is, the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EZR	2	63	jyg6	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר…לָ⁠הֶ֔ם אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־יֹאכְל֖וּ מִ⁠קֹּ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִׁ֑ים	1		The phrase **the holiest holy food** refers to the most sacred part of the food offerings, which was reserved for only the priests to eat. Alternate translation: “told them that they would not be allowed to eat the most sacred food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -222,12 +222,12 @@ EZR	2	69	ln9c	translate-bmoney	וְ⁠כֶ֕סֶף מָנִ֖ים חֲמֵ֣שׁ
 EZR	2	69	h3zd	translate-unknown	וְ⁠כָתְנֹ֥ת כֹּהֲנִ֖ים מֵאָֽה	1	tunics	**Tunics** were the special garments that priests would wear while performing their duties in the temple. Alternate translation: “100 special garments for the priests to wear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EZR	2	70	w7fw		וַ⁠יֵּשְׁב֣וּ הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֣ים וְ֠⁠הַ⁠לְוִיִּם וּֽ⁠מִן־הָ⁠עָ֞ם וְ⁠הַ⁠מְשֹׁרְרִ֧ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שּׁוֹעֲרִ֛ים וְ⁠הַ⁠נְּתִינִ֖ים בְּ⁠עָרֵי⁠הֶ֑ם וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠עָרֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	and all Israel lived in their cities	This is a summary conclusion to the list. See how you translated each of these terms within the list: priests in v. [36](../02/36.md), Levites in v. [40](../02/40.md), singers in v. [41](../02/41.md), gatekeepers in v. [42](../02/42.md), and Nethinim in v. [43](../02/43.md). Review the notes to each of these verses if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “So the priests, Levites, other Israelites, singers, gatekeepers, and temple servants returned to Judah and settled in the places where their ancestors had formerly lived”
 EZR	2	70	gg6o	figs-parallelism	וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠עָרֵי⁠הֶֽם	1		This sentence summarizes the previous sentence, which was itself a summary of the chapter. It shows the result of the journey, that the return of the Israelites was accomplished successfully. You could include this meaning with the previous sentence if stating it separately might be confusing for your readers because of the repetition. Its meaning is included in the alternate translation suggested for the previous sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-EZR	3	intro	rp9a			0		# Ezra 03 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter begins the story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of worship in the new temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Rebuilding the temple<br><br>They immediately began the temple worship even though the temple had not yet been built because they feared the people of the surrounding nations.
+EZR	3	intro	rp9a			0		# Ezra 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter begins the story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of worship in the new temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Rebuilding the temple<br><br>They immediately began the temple worship even though the temple had not yet been built because they feared the people of the surrounding nations.
 EZR	3	1	us0g	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וַ⁠יִּגַּע֙	1		The word **then** indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After this group had returned to Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 EZR	3	1	lr47	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּגַּע֙ הַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י	1		This phrase refers to the beginning of the seventh month in the Jewish religious calendar, which is the first month in the Jewish civic calendar. The phrase is actually giving the reason why the people gathered in Jerusalem at this time. It was the start of a new year, and the leadership had decided to resume community worship, including daily sacrifices, as of the beginning of that year, as [3:6](../03/06.md) indicates. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “At the start of the seventh month, because it was the beginning of a new civic year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	3	1	h84e	translate-ordinal	הַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י	1		Alternate translation: “month seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 EZR	3	1	a2ka	translate-hebrewmonths	הַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י	1	the seventh month	You could convert the Hebrew **month** into an equivalent on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the equivalency will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to use the number of the Hebrew month. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
-EZR	3	1	d1d0	figs-distinguish	וּ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בֶּ⁠עָרִ֑ים ס וַ⁠יֵּאָסְפ֥וּ הָ⁠עָ֛ם…אֶל־יְרוּשָׁלִָֽם	1		Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers why the Israelites were not all in Jerusalem already and would have had to come there from various places. Alternate translation: “the Israelites came from the different places where they had settled and they gathered ... in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+EZR	3	1	d1d0	figs-distinguish	וּ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בֶּ⁠עָרִ֑ים ס וַ⁠יֵּאָסְפ֥וּ הָ⁠עָ֛ם…אֶל־יְרוּשָׁלִָֽם	1		Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers why the Israelites were not all in Jerusalem already and would have had to come there from various places. Alternate translation: “the Israelites came from the different places where they had settled and they gathered … in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 EZR	3	1	vth3	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1		Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. The book is envisioning all of the Israelites as descendants of the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	3	1	hh94	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יֵּאָסְפ֥וּ הָ⁠עָ֛ם	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “And they gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	3	1	hwv6	figs-idiom	כְּ⁠אִ֥ישׁ אֶחָ֖ד	1	as one man	**As one man** is an idiom that means they gathered as if they were a single person, that is, all in one place at the same time for the same purpose. Alternate translation: “as if they were a single person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ EZR	3	13	isem	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠אֵ֣ין הָ⁠עָ֗ם מ
 EZR	3	13	fpsh	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠אֵ֣ין הָ⁠עָ֗ם מַכִּירִים֙ ק֚וֹל תְּרוּעַ֣ת הַ⁠שִּׂמְחָ֔ה לְ⁠ק֖וֹל בְּכִ֣י הָ⁠עָ֑ם כִּ֣י הָ⁠עָ֗ם מְרִיעִים֙ תְּרוּעָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֔ה	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the action that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the people who were happy were shouting so loudly, no one could distinguish their cries from the sounds of weeping of the other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EZR	3	13	u6pc	figs-explicit	וְ⁠אֵ֣ין הָ⁠עָ֗ם מַכִּירִים֙ ק֚וֹל תְּרוּעַ֣ת הַ⁠שִּׂמְחָ֔ה לְ⁠ק֖וֹל בְּכִ֣י הָ⁠עָ֑ם כִּ֣י הָ⁠עָ֗ם מְרִיעִים֙ תְּרוּעָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֔ה	1		In its first occurrence here, the phrase **the people** means all the Israelites who had gathered for this ceremony. In its second occurrence, the phrase refers to one group of them, the older leaders who had seen the first temple and were weeping. In its third occurrence, it refers to another group of them, the younger Israelites who were shouting for joy. Alternate translation: “Because the people who were happy were shouting so loudly, no one at the ceremony could distinguish their cries from the sounds of the people who were weeping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	3	13	rvdj	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הַ⁠קּ֥וֹל נִשְׁמַ֖ע עַד־לְ⁠מֵ⁠רָחֽוֹק	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the combined sound was so loud that those who lived far away from Jerusalem could hear it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EZR	4	intro	x878			0		# Ezra 04 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of the temple worship continues in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Helping to build the temple<br><br>The people of the surrounding nations offered to help to build the temple. It is unknown why the Jews refused their help, although it seems likely that the Jews considered these people to not truly belong to the people of God. These other people became their enemies and tried to hinder the work. They even persuaded the king of Persia to stop the Jews from building.
+EZR	4	intro	x878			0		# Ezra 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of the temple worship continues in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Helping to build the temple<br><br>The people of the surrounding nations offered to help to build the temple. It is unknown why the Jews refused their help, although it seems likely that the Jews considered these people to not truly belong to the people of God. These other people became their enemies and tried to hinder the work. They even persuaded the king of Persia to stop the Jews from building.
 EZR	4	1	v368	writing-background	וַֽ⁠יִּשְׁמְע֔וּ	1	General Information:	The word **Now** indicates that the sentence it introduces will provide background information that will be needed to understand what the book describes next. You can translate it with the word or phrase in your language that is most similar in meaning and significance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 EZR	4	1	miqb	figs-personification	יְהוּדָ֖ה וּ⁠בִנְיָמִ֑ן	1		Here the book is referring figuratively to the people who came from the tribe of Judah as if they were a single person, their ancestor Judah. It is referring similarly to the people of the tribe of Benjamin as if they were a single person, their ancestor Benjamin. Alternate translation: “the people of the tribes of Judah and Benjamin” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 EZR	4	1	i4dx	figs-hendiadys	יְהוּדָ֖ה וּ⁠בִנְיָמִ֑ן	1		Here the book may be expressing a single idea figuratively by using two words connected with **and**. Together the two words may be a way of referring to all of the Israelites, since at this point the community consisted essentially of people from the tribes of Judah and Benjamin. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ EZR	4	1	vflf	figs-synecdoche	וַֽ⁠יִּשְׁמְע֔וּ…כִּֽי־ב
 EZR	4	1	syf6	figs-idiom	בְנֵ֤י הַ⁠גּוֹלָה֙	1		As indicated in [2:1](../02/01.md) and [8:35](../08/35.md), the phrase **the sons of the exile** refers specifically to the group of Jewish people who returned to the land of Judah from Babylon. Babylon was the country where King Nebuchadnezzar had taken many Jews as captives after he conquered Jerusalem. Alternate translations: “the Jews who had returned from exile” or “the Jews who had returned to their homeland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	4	1	czf3	figs-distinguish	לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1		This phrase provides further background information about Yahweh and it likely expresses the perspective of the enemies on the situation. Alternate translations: “Yahweh, the God they worshiped” or “Yahweh, the God whom the people of Israel worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 EZR	4	2	dkbu	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יִּגְּשׁ֨וּ	1		The word **So** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result, they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-EZR	4	2	zxfn	figs-go	וַ⁠יִּגְּשׁ֨וּ	1		Use the motion verb that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: "So they went" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+EZR	4	2	zxfn	figs-go	וַ⁠יִּגְּשׁ֨וּ	1		Use the motion verb that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “So they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 EZR	4	2	spx4	translate-names	זְרֻבָּבֶ֜ל	1	Zerubbabel	**Zerubbabel** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [2:2](../02/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	4	2	zcwc	figs-ellipsis	רָאשֵׁ֣י הָֽ⁠אָב֗וֹת	1		As in [1:5](../01/05.md) and elsewhere in the book, this is an abbreviated way of saying “**the heads of** father’s houses.” Alternate translation: “the clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EZR	4	2	exyv	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֤וּ לָ⁠הֶם֙ נִבְנֶ֣ה עִמָּ⁠כֶ֔ם	1		Since the book says in the previous verse that these people were enemies of the Jews, the implication is that they were not sincere when they claimed that they wanted to help build the temple. Instead, they were probably looking for a way to hinder the building project from within. The Jewish leaders refused their offer, and that suggests that they themselves suspected that these people were insincere. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say something like that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and attempting to deceive the Jews, they said to them, ‘We would like to help you build the temple’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ EZR	4	3	xp3f	translate-names	זְרֻבָּבֶ֜ל וְ⁠יֵשׁ֗וּעַ	1
 EZR	4	3	hbhq	figs-ellipsis	רָאשֵׁ֤י הָֽ⁠אָבוֹת֙	1		This is an abbreviated way of saying “**the heads of** father’s houses.” See how you translated this expression in [1:5](../01/05.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “the clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EZR	4	3	isv8	figs-idiom	לֹֽא־לָ֣⁠כֶם וָ⁠לָ֔⁠נוּ	1	You may not build a house for our God with us	This expression is an idiom that means “it is for us alone.” Alternate translation: “You may not help us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	4	3	bl6x	figs-metaphor	בַּ֖יִת לֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ	1		Alternate translation: “a temple for our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EZR	4	3	0u2w	figs-exclusive	לֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ	1		Here, **our** is exclusive, excluding the non-Jewish hearers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+EZR	4	3	bu2w	figs-exclusive	לֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ	1		Here, **our** is exclusive, excluding the non-Jewish hearers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EZR	4	3	ezs2	figs-possession	לֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ	1		The Israelites could say that Yahweh is **our God** not in the sense that they possess or control him, but in the sense that they worship him exclusively. Alternate translation: “for the God whom we worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 EZR	4	3	jpin	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	כִּי֩	1		The word **but** indicates that the clause it introduces draws a contrast between what the men asked and what the Jewish leaders were prepared to allow. To indicate this contrast, you could begin the sentence with a word or phrase such as “no,” “rather,” or “on the contrary.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EZR	4	3	jkgy	figs-exclusive	אֲנַ֨חְנוּ יַ֜חַד נִבְנֶ֗ה לַֽ⁠יהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1		**We ourselves** here does not include the addressees. If your language marks that distinction, be sure that this is clear in your translation. **Together** does not mean the Jewish people and these foreign peoples together. It means the whole Jewish community together. Alternate translation: “it is all of us Israelites who will build a temple for Yahweh, the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ EZR	4	12	tbqv	figs-go	סְלִ֨קוּ֙	1		If it is more natural in your langua
 EZR	4	12	ns5b		עֲלֶ֥י⁠נָא אֲת֖וֹ לִ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם	1		Alternate translation: “have settled near us in Jerusalem”
 EZR	4	12	fu8s	figs-metonymy	קִרְיְתָ֨⁠א מָֽרָדְתָּ֤⁠א ו⁠באישת⁠א	1	the rebellious and evil city	Here the officials are describing the inhabitants of Jerusalem figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the **city** where they live. The officials are not saying that the walls and buildings would be rebellious if they were rebuilt. Rather, they are saying that the people who have lived in this city have continually revolted against their foreign rulers. Alternate translation: “that city whose people are constantly rebelling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EZR	4	12	kke9	figs-doublet	מָֽרָדְתָּ֤⁠א ו⁠באישת⁠א	1		**Rebellious and evil** mean similar things. The officials use them together to emphasize their certainty that, because the people of Jerusalem are so evil or wicked (in this context meaning rebellious against authority), they would revolt against Artaxerxes if they were able to rebuild and fortify their city. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these words into a single expression. Alternate translation: “constantly rebelling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-EZR	4	12	jr26	figs-parallelism	וְשׁוּרַיָּ֣א שַׁכְלִ֔ילוּ וְ⁠אֻשַּׁיָּ֖⁠א יַחִֽיטוּ	1	repairing the foundations	Here, **completing** is a way of saying “building.” Several times in this section of Ezra, the text uses the two words **repairing** and **completing** together to mean <br>“building,” or it uses them as poetic parallels. (For example, “which a great king of Israel built and completed,” [5:11](../05/11.md), and “to build this house and to complete this structure,” [5:3](../05/03.md).) The term **completing** by itself here seems similarly to have the meaning of “building.” **Repairing** here could also mean “digging out.” Either way, this is a reference to preparing foundations so that buildings can be set up on them. So the officials are describing the project of restoring the city by referring to the work on two parallel parts of it, its walls and its buildings. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this without using a similar figure of speech. Alternate translations: “they are working throughout the city to restore it” or “they are rebuilding the walls and preparing foundations for buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+EZR	4	12	jr26	figs-parallelism	וְשׁוּרַיָּ֣א שַׁכְלִ֔ילוּ וְ⁠אֻשַּׁיָּ֖⁠א יַחִֽיטוּ	1	repairing the foundations	Here, **completing** is a way of saying “building.” Several times in this section of Ezra, the text uses the two words **repairing** and **completing** together to mean<br>“building,” or it uses them as poetic parallels. (For example, “which a great king of Israel built and completed,” [5:11](../05/11.md), and “to build this house and to complete this structure,” [5:3](../05/03.md).) The term **completing** by itself here seems similarly to have the meaning of “building.” **Repairing** here could also mean “digging out.” Either way, this is a reference to preparing foundations so that buildings can be set up on them. So the officials are describing the project of restoring the city by referring to the work on two parallel parts of it, its walls and its buildings. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this without using a similar figure of speech. Alternate translations: “they are working throughout the city to restore it” or “they are rebuilding the walls and preparing foundations for buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EZR	4	13	daq3		כְּעַ֗ן	1		The word **now** is similar to the expression “and now” in [4:10](../04/10.md) and [4:11](../04/11.md). Here, **now** introduces an important point within the letter. If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation.
 EZR	4	13	vkk4	figs-123person	יְדִ֨יעַ֙ לֶהֱוֵ֣א לְ⁠מַלְכָּ֔⁠א	1		As in [4:12](../04/12.md), the officials address the king here in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be clearer in your language, you could indicate this respect by using an expression such as “O king.” Alternate translation: “we would like you to know, O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EZR	4	13	cd84	figs-activepassive	יְדִ֨יעַ֙ לֶהֱוֵ֣א לְ⁠מַלְכָּ֔⁠א	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “we would like you to know, O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ EZR	4	15	mcvp	figs-123person	דִּ֡י יְבַקַּר֩	1		Here again the off
 EZR	4	15	fujm	figs-idiom	בִּֽ⁠סְפַר־דָּכְרָ֨נַיָּ֜⁠א דִּ֣י אֲבָהָתָ֗⁠ךְ	1		Although **book** is singular, this expression actually refers to the collection of documents that Artaxerxes possessed that recorded events and decrees from the reigns of earlier kings. He responds in [4:19](../04/19.md) that he had his court officials search in this collection. Verses [6:1–2](../06/01.md) describe how Darius earlier made a similar search. Alternate translation: “in the royal chronicles” or “in the archives of the previous kings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	4	15	u1i3	figs-metaphor	בִּֽ⁠סְפַר־דָּכְרָ֨נַיָּ֜⁠א דִּ֣י אֲבָהָתָ֗⁠ךְ	1		Here, **fathers** figuratively means “predecessors.” This would include some who were direct ancestors of Artaxerxes, including his father Ahasuerus (Xerxes) and grandfather Darius. But it also seems to include the Assyrian and Babylonian kings to whose empires the Persian kings were now the heirs. The revolts of Jerusalem that this search discovered, as reported in [4:19](../04/19.md), were against the Babylonians. Indeed, Artaxerxes says that his officials investigated the matter back to ancient days, presumably back to the times of earlier empires. Alternate translation: “the chronicles of previous kings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	4	15	zvmc	figs-doublet	וּ֠⁠תְהַשְׁכַּח בִּ⁠סְפַ֣ר דָּכְרָנַיָּ⁠א֮ וְ⁠תִנְדַּע֒	1		The words **discover** and **learn** mean similar things. The officials use the two words together to emphasize how certain it is that the chronicles will show that Jerusalem has always been rebellious. If it would be clearer in your language, you can use only one word instead of two. Alternate translation: “The chronicles will certainly confirm for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-EZR	4	15	sa9b	figs-parallelism	דִּי֩ קִרְיְתָ֨⁠א דָ֜ךְ קִרְיָ֣א מָֽרָדָ֗א וּֽ⁠מְהַנְזְקַ֤ת מַלְכִין֙ וּ⁠מְדִנָ֔ן וְ⁠אֶשְׁתַּדּוּר֙ עָבְדִ֣ין בְּ⁠גַוַּ֔⁠הּ מִן־יוֹמָ֖ת עָלְמָ֑⁠א	1	a rebellious city	These two phrases mean similar things. The officials say essentially the same thing twice for emphasis. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “that the people living in Jerusalem have constantly rebelled against their kings and governors and refused to pay tribute” However, there is a slight difference in meaning. The second phrase intensifies the first phrase, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. Alternate translation: “that the people of Jerusalem have rebelled against emperors and governors and refused to pay tribute, long being a center of revolt ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+EZR	4	15	sa9b	figs-parallelism	דִּי֩ קִרְיְתָ֨⁠א דָ֜ךְ קִרְיָ֣א מָֽרָדָ֗א וּֽ⁠מְהַנְזְקַ֤ת מַלְכִין֙ וּ⁠מְדִנָ֔ן וְ⁠אֶשְׁתַּדּוּר֙ עָבְדִ֣ין בְּ⁠גַוַּ֔⁠הּ מִן־יוֹמָ֖ת עָלְמָ֑⁠א	1	a rebellious city	These two phrases mean similar things. The officials say essentially the same thing twice for emphasis. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “that the people living in Jerusalem have constantly rebelled against their kings and governors and refused to pay tribute” However, there is a slight difference in meaning. The second phrase intensifies the first phrase, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. Alternate translation: “that the people of Jerusalem have rebelled against emperors and governors and refused to pay tribute, long being a center of revolt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EZR	4	15	z1fu	figs-idiom	וּֽ⁠מְהַנְזְקַ֤ת	1		In light of the similar expression in [4:13](../04/13.md), “and the revenue of the kings will suffer harm,” this likely means that the people of Jerusalem have refused to pay tribute to foreign emperors. Alternate translation: “and refused to pay tribute to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	4	15	iw58	figs-metonymy	וּ⁠מְדִנָ֔ן	1		Here, **provinces** refers to the rulers of provinces, that is, governors. The officials are describing them figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the jurisdictions that they rule. Alternate translation: “and governors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EZR	4	15	au5i	figs-activepassive	עַ֨ל־דְּנָ֔ה קִרְיְתָ֥⁠א דָ֖ךְ הָֽחָרְבַֽת	1	this city was destroyed	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Because the people of Jerusalem kept rebelling against them, the Babylonians finally came and destroyed that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -465,8 +465,8 @@ EZR	4	19	n9ss	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠מְרַ֥ד וְ⁠אֶשְׁתַּדּ
 EZR	4	20	as5z	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠מַלְכִ֣ין תַּקִּיפִ֗ין הֲווֹ֙ עַל־יְר֣וּשְׁלֶ֔ם	1		These kings are described here in a spatial metaphor as being higher than or above Jerusalem to indicate that this was the place in which and from which they ruled. Alternate translation: “And powerful kings ruled from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	4	20	ewxu	writing-background	וְ⁠שַׁ֨לִּיטִ֔ין	1		This word **even** introduces further information. Alternate translation: “in fact, they ruled” (See: Connect – [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 EZR	4	20	vmb6		וְ⁠שַׁ֨לִּיטִ֔ין בְּ⁠כֹ֖ל עֲבַ֣ר נַהֲרָ֑⁠ה	1	the Province Beyond the River	Alternate translation: “in fact, they ruled over the whole area that is Beyond-the-River province”
-EZR	4	20	s7mv	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠מִדָּ֥ה בְל֛וֹ וַ⁠הֲלָ֖ךְ מִתְיְהֵ֥ב לְ⁠הֽוֹן	1	Tax,tribute, and custom were paid to them	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “these kings conquered other nations and made them pay tribute” or “these kings conquered other nations and made them pay taxes, tribute, and duty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EZR	4	20	bo7z	figs-doublet	וּ⁠מִדָּ֥ה בְל֛וֹ וַ⁠הֲלָ֖ךְ	1	Tax,tribute, and custom were paid to them	See how you translated this phrase in [4:13](../04/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]. A doublet can involve the use of more than two words.)
+EZR	4	20	s7mv	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠מִדָּ֥ה בְל֛וֹ וַ⁠הֲלָ֖ךְ מִתְיְהֵ֥ב לְ⁠הֽוֹן	1	Tax, tribute, and custom were paid to them	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “these kings conquered other nations and made them pay tribute” or “these kings conquered other nations and made them pay taxes, tribute, and duty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EZR	4	20	bo7z	figs-doublet	וּ⁠מִדָּ֥ה בְל֛וֹ וַ⁠הֲלָ֖ךְ	1	Tax, tribute, and custom were paid to them	See how you translated this phrase in [4:13](../04/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]. A doublet can involve the use of more than two words.)
 EZR	4	21	c4sp	grammar-connect-words-phrases	כְּעַן֙	1	give a command	The word **Now** is similar to the expression “and now” in [4:10](../04/10.md), [4:11](../04/11.md), and [4:17](../04/17.md). As in [4:13](../04/13.md) and [4:14](../04/14.md), it introduces an important point within a letter. If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 EZR	4	21	ie6i	figs-explicit	שִׂ֣ימוּ טְּעֵ֔ם לְ⁠בַטָּלָ֖א גֻּבְרַיָּ֣⁠א אִלֵּ֑ךְ	1	give a command	**These men** means the Jews. This is a reference back to the letter from the Samaritan officials in which they speak of “the Jews who went up from near you” and who “have come to us at Jerusalem” ([4:12](../04/12.md)). The implication is that the Jews are to stop rebuilding the walls and buildings in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “issue a decree to make those Jews who returned to Jerusalem from exile stop rebuilding the walls and buildings in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	4	21	emg2	grammar-connect-logic-goal	וְ⁠קִרְיְתָ֥⁠א דָךְ֙ לָ֣א תִתְבְּנֵ֔א עַד־מִנִּ֖⁠י טַעְמָ֥⁠א יִתְּשָֽׂם	1	give a command	The phrase **so that** indicates that the clause that follows describes the purpose for which Artaxerxes wants the officials to issue a decree. It is to make the Jews stop working on the walls and houses. He does not want there to be any rebuilding in Jerusalem unless he authorizes it personally. Alternate translation: “because I want this decree to prevent all rebuilding unless I issue a decree permitting it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
@@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ EZR	4	23	v0na	figs-explicit	וּ⁠בַטִּ֥לוּ הִמּ֖וֹ בְּ⁠א
 EZR	4	24	kj9i	figs-explicit	בֵּ⁠אדַ֗יִן בְּטֵלַת֙ עֲבִידַ֣ת בֵּית־אֱלָהָ֔⁠א דִּ֖י בִּ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם	1	the work on the house of God which is in Jerusalem ceased, and it remained stopped until the second year of the reign of Darius	The book now returns to the point in the story where it left off at the end of [4:5](../04/05.md). (If it would be helpful, review the note to [4:6](../04/06.md). That note explains how the book tells of later events in [4:6–23](../04/06.md) to show that the Jews were wise not to trust the Samaritans when they offered to help rebuild the temple during the reign of Cyrus, since they demonstrated by their repeated future opposition that they really were the enemies of the Jews.) It might be useful to include a heading before this verse to alert the reader that there is a change of timeframe at this point, such as, “Building the Temple in the Time of Darius.” Also, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could say something explicitly here that would show how the book is returning to the time of Cyrus and his immediate successors. Alternate translation: “This is how the enemies of the Jews tried, under later kings, to stop them from rebuilding Jerusalem. They attempted the same thing under King Cyrus and his successors and they were able to stop the work on the temple for a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	4	24	s03r	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠הֲוָת֙ בָּֽטְלָ֔א	1	the work on the house of God which is in Jerusalem ceased, and it remained stopped until the second year of the reign of Darius	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the Jews did not start rebuilding again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	4	24	v4gi	translate-names	דָּרְיָ֥וֶשׁ	1	the work on the house of God which is in Jerusalem ceased, and it remained stopped until the second year of the reign of Darius	**Darius** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [4:5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-EZR	5	intro	rn2j			0		# Ezra 05 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of the temple worship continues in this chapter from where it left off in [4:5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Rebuilding the temple<br><br>The prophets Haggai and Zechariah encouraged the Jews to begin again to build the temple. This was very important to life in Judah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
+EZR	5	intro	rn2j			0		# Ezra 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of the temple worship continues in this chapter from where it left off in [4:5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Rebuilding the temple<br><br>The prophets Haggai and Zechariah encouraged the Jews to begin again to build the temple. This was very important to life in Judah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
 EZR	5	1	puq2	writing-newevent	וְ⁠הִתְנַבִּ֞י	1	Iddo	Here, the word **Then** introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural method in your language to introduce a new event here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EZR	5	1	buty	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	וְ⁠הִתְנַבִּ֞י	1	Iddo	The word **Then** indicates that the event the story will now relate took place at the time just named in [4:24](../04/24.md), that is, in the second year of the reign of Darius as king of Persia. Alternate translation: “At that time … prophesied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 EZR	5	1	bdb8	translate-names	וּ⁠זְכַרְיָ֤ה בַר־עִדּוֹא֙	1	Iddo	**Zechariah** is the name of a man, and **Iddo** is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -512,14 +512,14 @@ EZR	5	3	zz1b		מַן־שָׂ֨ם לְ⁠כֹ֜ם טְעֵ֗ם	1	the Province Bey
 EZR	5	3	a23k	figs-parallelism	בַּיְתָ֤⁠א דְנָה֙ לִ⁠בְּנֵ֔א וְ⁠אֻשַּׁרְנָ֥⁠א דְנָ֖ה לְ⁠שַׁכְלָלָֽה	1	the Province Beyond the River	These two phrases mean essentially the same thing. As noted in [4:12](../04/12.md), **complete** is another way of saying **build** when the terms are paired like this. The officials say essentially the same thing twice for emphasis. If that would be confusing for your readers, you can say it once and provide emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “to build a large temple such as this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EZR	5	3	rp2r	figs-metaphor	בַּיְתָ֤⁠א דְנָה֙	1	the Province Beyond the River	“this temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	5	4	jznw	grammar-connect-time-sequential	אֱדַ֥יִן	1	the Province Beyond the River	Here, the word **Then** is indicating that the enemies asked the question in this verse right after the question they asked in the previous verse. (The word is not indicating that the two questions were asked on separate occasions.) Alternate translation: “In addition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-EZR	5	4	tp1s	translate-textvariants	אֲמַ֣רְנָא לְּ⁠הֹ֑ם מַן־אִנּוּן֙ שְׁמָהָ֣ת גֻּבְרַיָּ֔⁠א	1		Here, the Aramaic text reads **we said**. The pronoun does not seem to fit the context here, because of the sudden, unexplained shift from third person “they” in verse 3 to first person “we” here. In [5:10](../05/10.md), in their letter to Darius, Tattenai and his associates use “we” when they report that they were the ones who asked this question. So the word “we” could have been mistakenly copied into this verse from that one. Other ancient versions say “they,” and it will likely be clearest for your readers if you translate the phrase in that way. Alternate translation: “they said to them, 'What are the men's names” or “they said to them, 'Who are the men” It is also possible that the verse is not reporting a question in direct speech, but is simply describing what was said as a statement. In that case, **we** would refer to the Jews. Alternate translation: “we told them who the men were” or “we told them the names of the men [who were building this building.”] (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-EZR	5	4	4wgj	figs-quotations	אֲמַ֣רְנָא לְּ⁠הֹ֑ם מַן־אִנּוּן֙ שְׁמָהָ֣ת גֻּבְרַיָּ֔⁠א דִּֽי־דְנָ֥ה בִנְיָנָ֖⁠א בָּנַֽיִן	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you can present this sentence as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+EZR	5	4	tp1s	translate-textvariants	אֲמַ֣רְנָא לְּ⁠הֹ֑ם מַן־אִנּוּן֙ שְׁמָהָ֣ת גֻּבְרַיָּ֔⁠א	1		Here, the Aramaic text reads **we said**. The pronoun does not seem to fit the context here, because of the sudden, unexplained shift from third person “they” in verse 3 to first person “we” here. In [5:10](../05/10.md), in their letter to Darius, Tattenai and his associates use “we” when they report that they were the ones who asked this question. So the word “we” could have been mistakenly copied into this verse from that one. Other ancient versions say “they,” and it will likely be clearest for your readers if you translate the phrase in that way. Alternate translation: “they said to them, 'What are the men's names” or “they said to them, “Who are the men” It is also possible that the verse is not reporting a question in direct speech, but is simply describing what was said as a statement. In that case, **we** would refer to the Jews. Alternate translation: “we told them who the men were” or “we told them the names of the men [who were building this building.”] (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+EZR	5	4	cwgj	figs-quotations	אֲמַ֣רְנָא לְּ⁠הֹ֑ם מַן־אִנּוּן֙ שְׁמָהָ֣ת גֻּבְרַיָּ֔⁠א דִּֽי־דְנָ֥ה בִנְיָנָ֖⁠א בָּנַֽיִן	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you can present this sentence as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EZR	5	5	ewqj	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וְ⁠עֵ֣ין	1	the Province Beyond the River	Here, the word **But** indicates that the sentence it introduces draws a contrast between what Tattenai and his associates were trying to accomplish, which was an immediate end to the rebuilding of the temple, and what actually happened. You could begin the sentence with a word such as “however” to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EZR	5	5	gv23	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠עֵ֣ין אֱלָהֲ⁠הֹ֗ם הֲוָת֙ עַל־שָׂבֵ֣י יְהוּדָיֵ֔⁠א	1	the eye of God was on	Here, **eye** stands for seeing, and in this context, seeing figuratively means giving care, protection, and favor. Alternate translation: “God was making sure that the Jewish leaders would be alright” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	5	5	mvci	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠לָא	1	the eye of God was on	Here the word **and** indicates that the clause it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “as a result … not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EZR	5	5	eu4e	figs-explicit	וְ⁠לָא־בַטִּ֣לוּ הִמּ֔וֹ עַד־טַעְמָ֖⁠א לְ⁠דָרְיָ֣וֶשׁ יְהָ֑ךְ	1	a report could be sent to Darius and a decree was returned concerning this matter	Here the word **they** refers to Tattenai and his associates. The implication is that they did not make the Jewish leaders stop rebuilding the temple right away. Rather, they chose to wait until they could send a report about the rebuilding to Darius, to see what he would say about it. Alternate translation: “and Tattenai and his associates did not make the Jews stop rebuilding the temple right away, but they decided instead to report the matter to King Darius” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	5	5	udsx	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וֶ⁠אֱדַ֛יִן	1	a report could be sent to Darius and a decree was returned concerning this matter	This phrase indicates that this event would take place after the event the story has just described. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-EZR	5	5	y8gi		יְתִיב֥וּן נִשְׁתְּוָנָ֖⁠א עַל־דְּנָֽה	1	a report could be sent to Darius and a decree was returned concerning this matter	Here the word **they** primarily refers to Darius. As in [4:18](../04/18.md), the plural may be used to indicate the king and his officials, who would consider the matter openly in the royal court. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the singular. Alternate translation: “he sent back a letter to tell them what to do about this"
+EZR	5	5	y8gi		יְתִיב֥וּן נִשְׁתְּוָנָ֖⁠א עַל־דְּנָֽה	1	a report could be sent to Darius and a decree was returned concerning this matter	Here the word **they** primarily refers to Darius. As in [4:18](../04/18.md), the plural may be used to indicate the king and his officials, who would consider the matter openly in the royal court. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the singular. Alternate translation: “he sent back a letter to tell them what to do about this”
 EZR	5	6	jbg5	translate-names	תַּתְּנַ֣י…וּ⁠שְׁתַ֤ר בּוֹזְנַי֙	1	This is a copy of the letter	These are the names of two men. See how you translated them in [5:3](../05/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	5	6	uq1x		וּ⁠כְנָ֣וָתֵ֔⁠הּ	1	the Province Beyond the River	Alternate translation: “and their colleagues”
 EZR	5	7	tqh1	figs-quotemarks	לְ⁠דָרְיָ֥וֶשׁ מַלְכָּ֖⁠א שְׁלָמָ֥⁠א כֹֽלָּ⁠א	1	the Province Beyond the River	Here the book begins to quote the letter that Tattenai and his associates sent to King Darius. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@@ -542,8 +542,8 @@ EZR	5	11	r5fg	figs-explicit	אֱלָ֨הּ שְׁמַיָּ֜⁠א וְ⁠אַר
 EZR	5	11	a1ui	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠בָנַ֤יִן בַּיְתָ⁠א֙	1	that was built many years ago, which a great king of Israel built and completed	**House** means the temple. This seems to be an abbreviated way of saying the “house of God,” a figurative description of the temple as the place where God lived. Alternate translation: “and we are rebuilding the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	5	11	y9hr	figs-hendiadys	וּ⁠מֶ֤לֶךְ לְ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ רַ֔ב בְּנָ֖⁠הִי וְ⁠שַׁכְלְלֵֽ⁠הּ	1	completed	In this section of the book, **completed** is another way of saying **built** when the two words are used together. (Review the note about this at [4:12](../04/12.md) if that would be helpful.) So the Jewish elders are expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning with a single word. Alternate translation: “which a great king of Israel constructed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 EZR	5	12	mnpe	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	לָהֵ֗ן	1	completed	The word **However** indicates that there will be a contrast between the sentence that it introduces and the previous one. This sentence expresses the opposite of what someone would hope and expect to happen after a great king built a temple for God, so you could begin the sentence with a word such as “unfortunately” to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-EZR	5	12	un5r	figs-metaphor	מִן־דִּ֨י הַרְגִּ֤זוּ אֲבָהֳתַ֨⁠נָא֙ לֶ⁠אֱלָ֣הּ שְׁמַיָּ֔⁠א	1	General Information:	Here, **fathers** figuratively means ancestors. Alternate translation: “because our ancestors angered the God who rules in heaven” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EZR	5	12	pqp8	figs-metaphor	יְהַ֣ב הִמּ֔וֹ בְּ⁠יַ֛ד נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֥ר	1	provoked the God of heaven to wrath	Here, **hand** figuratively represents power and control. Alternate translation: “God allowed Nebuchadnezzar to conquer them” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EZR	5	12	un5r	figs-metaphor	מִן־דִּ֨י הַרְגִּ֤זוּ אֲבָהֳתַ֨⁠נָא֙ לֶ⁠אֱלָ֣הּ שְׁמַיָּ֔⁠א	1	General Information:	Here, **fathers** figuratively means ancestors. Alternate translation: “because our ancestors angered the God who rules in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EZR	5	12	pqp8	figs-metaphor	יְהַ֣ב הִמּ֔וֹ בְּ⁠יַ֛ד נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֥ר	1	provoked the God of heaven to wrath	Here, **hand** figuratively represents power and control. Alternate translation: “God allowed Nebuchadnezzar to conquer them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	5	12	cy4x	figs-metonymy	יְהַ֣ב הִמּ֔וֹ בְּ⁠יַ֛ד נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֥ר	1	he gave them into the hand of Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon, the Chaldean, who destroyed this house and deported the people	Nebuchadnezzar alone did not conquer the kingdom of Judah. Rather, the elders are describing his armies figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the emperor who commanded them. Alternate translation: “God allowed them to be conquered by the armies of Nebuchadnezzar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EZR	5	12	lfdn	translate-names	נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֥ר מֶֽלֶךְ־בָּבֶ֖ל	1	he gave them into the hand of Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon, the Chaldean, who destroyed this house and deported the people	**Nebuchadnezzar** is the name of a man, and **Babylon** is the name of the empire that he ruled. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	5	12	soz8	figs-distinguish	כַּסְדָּאָ֑ה	1	he gave them into the hand of Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon, the Chaldean, who destroyed this house and deported the people	Here the elders provide some further background information about who Nebuchadnezzar was. Even though he was the ruler of the Babylonian Empire, he was not from the Babylonian people group himself, but rather from the Chaldean people group. Alternate translation: “who was from the Chaldean people group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
@@ -555,17 +555,17 @@ EZR	5	13	t6xc	translate-names	לְ⁠כ֥וֹרֶשׁ	1	King Cyrus issued a comm
 EZR	5	13	g9o0	figs-explicit	מַלְכָּ֖⁠א דִּ֣י בָבֶ֑ל	1	King Cyrus issued a command to rebuild the house of God	Cyrus was the king of the Persian Empire, but since under his leadership the Persians had conquered the Babylonians, he also had the right to use the title **king of Babylon**. The implication may be that as the heir and successor to the throne of Babylon, Cyrus had the same power over the temple as Nebuchadnezzar, and so he could order it to be rebuilt. Alternate translation: “who conquered Babylon.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	5	14	q6am		וְ֠⁠אַף מָאנַיָּ֣⁠א דִֽי־בֵית־אֱלָהָ⁠א֮ דִּ֣י דַהֲבָ֣⁠ה וְ⁠כַסְפָּ⁠א֒ דִּ֣י נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֗ר הַנְפֵּק֙ מִן־הֵֽיכְלָ⁠א֙ דִּ֣י בִֽ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֔ם וְ⁠הֵיבֵ֣ל הִמּ֔וֹ לְ⁠הֵיכְלָ֖⁠א דִּ֣י בָבֶ֑ל הַנְפֵּ֨ק הִמּ֜וֹ כּ֣וֹרֶשׁ מַלְכָּ֗⁠א מִן־הֵֽיכְלָ⁠א֙ דִּ֣י בָבֶ֔ל וִ⁠יהִ֨יבוּ֙ לְ⁠שֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֣ר	1	General Information:	This sentence may be hard for readers to follow because, in it, the direct object (that is, the thing that receives the action) comes first, and it consists of a very long phrase. If it would be clearer in your language, you could break this sentence into two sentences. Alternate translation: “Nebuchadnezzar had taken the gold and silver objects that were used in worship out of the temple in Jerusalem and brought them to the temple in Babylon. King Cyrus took them out of the temple in Babylon and gave them to … Sheshbazzar” See also the UST.
 EZR	5	14	ukn9	translate-unknown	מָאנַיָּ֣⁠א דִֽי־בֵית־אֱלָהָ⁠א֮	1	General Information:	This means specifically the bowls, basins, and other objects listed in [1:9–10](../01/09.md). These **vessels** were used during worship in the temple. Alternate translation: “the objects that were used in worship in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-EZR	5	14	6rht	figs-go	וְ⁠הֵיבֵ֣ל	1	General Information:	If it is more natural in your language, rather than **had brought**, you could say “had taken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+EZR	5	14	drht	figs-go	וְ⁠הֵיבֵ֣ל	1	General Information:	If it is more natural in your language, rather than **had brought**, you could say “had taken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 EZR	5	14	qsv0	figs-activepassive	וִ⁠יהִ֨יבוּ֙	1	General Information:	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and Cyrus presented them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	5	14	w7ix	translate-names	לְ⁠שֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֣ר	1	Sheshbazzar	**Sheshbazzar** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [1:8](../01/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	5	15	kwvp	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וַ⁠אֲמַר	1	Let the house of God be rebuilt	Here, **then** indicates that the event that the elders will now describe came after the events that they have just described. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-EZR	5	15	pdri	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠אֲמַר־לֵ֓⁠הּ	1	Let the house of God be rebuilt	This means “Then Cyrus said to Sheshbazzar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+EZR	5	15	pdri	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠אֲמַר־לֵ֓⁠הּ	1	Then he said to him	This means “Then Cyrus said to Sheshbazzar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EZR	5	15	ebgs	figs-quotesinquotes	אֵ֚ל מָֽאנַיָּ֔⁠א שֵׂ֚א אֵֽזֶל־אֲחֵ֣ת הִמּ֔וֹ בְּ⁠הֵיכְלָ֖⁠א דִּ֣י בִ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם וּ⁠בֵ֥ית אֱלָהָ֖⁠א יִתְבְּנֵ֥א עַל־אַתְרֵֽ⁠הּ	1	Let the house of God be rebuilt	This is a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. The book is quoting from the letter that Tattenai and his associates sent to King Darius. Within that letter, they are quoting what the Jewish elders told them in response to their question. And within that response, the elders are quoting what King Cyrus told Sheshbazzar to do. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off this part of the verse within tertiary quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Another option would be to present this as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 EZR	5	15	q6r3	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠בֵ֥ית אֱלָהָ֖⁠א יִתְבְּנֵ֥א עַל־אַתְרֵֽ⁠הּ	1	Let the house of God be rebuilt	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “I authorize you to rebuild the temple on its original site” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	5	16	x9zt	grammar-connect-time-sequential	אֱדַ֨יִן֙	1	General Information:	The elders use the word **then** to indicate that the event they will now describe came after the events they have just described. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 EZR	5	16	batc		שֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֣ר דֵּ֔ךְ אֲתָ֗א	1	General Information:	The implication is that he came here, that is, from the perspective of the elders who are speaking, he came to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “that man named Sheshbazzar came here”
-EZR	5	16	54ml	figs-explicit	יְהַ֧ב אֻשַּׁיָּ֛⁠א	1	General Information:	Sheshbazzar did not do the work himself. If it would be clearer in your language, you can refer to others who did the work, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EZR	5	16	iuxm		וּ⁠מִן־אֱדַ֧יִן וְ⁠עַד־כְּעַ֛ן מִתְבְּנֵ֖א וְ⁠לָ֥א שְׁלִֽם	1	General Information:	In several places the book uses the terms **built and complete** together to mean “constructed.” (Review the note about this at [5:11](../05/11.md) if that would be helpful.) But this expression means something different here. Because there is a <br>**not** before the second verb, here the expression means that the temple was only partially rebuilt, and then the work was interrupted. Be sure that your translation shows this difference. Alternate translation: “And ever since then, we have been trying to rebuild the temple, but we still have much work to do on it”
+EZR	5	16	e4ml	figs-explicit	יְהַ֧ב אֻשַּׁיָּ֛⁠א	1	General Information:	Sheshbazzar did not do the work himself. If it would be clearer in your language, you can refer to others who did the work, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EZR	5	16	iuxm		וּ⁠מִן־אֱדַ֧יִן וְ⁠עַד־כְּעַ֛ן מִתְבְּנֵ֖א וְ⁠לָ֥א שְׁלִֽם	1	General Information:	In several places the book uses the terms **built and complete** together to mean “constructed.” (Review the note about this at [5:11](../05/11.md) if that would be helpful.) But this expression means something different here. Because there is a<br>**not** before the second verb, here the expression means that the temple was only partially rebuilt, and then the work was interrupted. Be sure that your translation shows this difference. Alternate translation: “And ever since then, we have been trying to rebuild the temple, but we still have much work to do on it”
 EZR	5	16	d7m8	figs-activepassive	מִתְבְּנֵ֖א וְ⁠לָ֥א שְׁלִֽם	1	it has been under construction, but is not complete	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “we have been trying to rebuild the temple, but we still have much work to do on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	5	16	myr8	figs-quotemarks	וְ⁠לָ֥א שְׁלִֽם	1	under construction	Here the letter ends its quotation of what the Jewish elders told Tattenai and his associates. If you decided in [5:11](../05/11.md) to mark their words as a secondary quotation, you should indicate that ending here with a closing secondary quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EZR	5	17	f4m4	grammar-connect-words-phrases	וּ⁠כְעַ֞ן	1	General Information:	As in [4:10](../04/10.md) and [4:11](../04/11.md), **and now** translates an Aramaic expression that introduces the main business of a letter. In this case, it comes near the end of the letter. If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ EZR	5	17	gidq	figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠בֵ֨ית גִּנְזַיָּ֜⁠א דּ
 EZR	5	17	vii9	figs-activepassive	הֵ֣ן אִיתַ֗י דִּֽי־מִן־כּ֤וֹרֶשׁ מַלְכָּ⁠א֙ שִׂ֣ים טְעֵ֔ם לְ⁠מִבְנֵ֛א בֵּית־אֱלָהָ֥⁠א דֵ֖ךְ בִּ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם	1	if it is so that a command was issued by King Cyrus	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whether King Cyrus issued a decree to rebuild the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	5	17	fzez	figs-123person	וּ⁠רְע֥וּת מַלְכָּ֛⁠א עַל־דְּנָ֖ה יִשְׁלַ֥ח עֲלֶֽי⁠נָא	1	if it is so that a command was issued by King Cyrus	Tattenai and his associates continue to address the king in third person as a form of respect. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the second person and indicate respect in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Please tell us, O king, what you would like us to do about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EZR	5	17	ieh1	figs-quotemarks	וּ⁠רְע֥וּת מַלְכָּ֛⁠א עַל־דְּנָ֖ה יִשְׁלַ֥ח עֲלֶֽי⁠נָא	1	if it is so that a command was issued by King Cyrus	Here the book ends its quotation of the letter that Tattenai and his associates sent to King Darius. If you decided in [5:7](../05/07.md) to mark their words as a quotation, you should indicate that by ending the quotation here with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EZR	6	intro	y5d8			0		# Ezra 06 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The completion of the story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of the temple worship occurs in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Temple taxes<br><br>The king said that the Jews were right and ordered money from his taxes to be used to help them with their sacrifices.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Darius<br><br>In this chapter, Darius is called the king of Assyria. In reality, besides ruling over the former Assyrian Empire, Darius was also king of Persia. Persia had conquered Babylon, which had previously conquered Assyria. This made the king of Persia to be the king of Assyria as well. It was unusual to refer to Darius as the king or ruler of Assyria. Ezra may have referred to him in this way to contrast Darius’ actions with those of the former rulers of Assyria, who had treated the Jews very cruelly. Those earlier Assyrian rulers were the ones who had conquered the northern tribes of Israel and deported them to other lands. It was for this reason that the northern tribes lost their identity and were no longer a distinct people group.
+EZR	6	intro	y5d8			0		# Ezra 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The completion of the story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of the temple worship occurs in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Temple taxes<br><br>The king said that the Jews were right and ordered money from his taxes to be used to help them with their sacrifices.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Darius<br><br>In this chapter, Darius is called the king of Assyria. In reality, besides ruling over the former Assyrian Empire, Darius was also king of Persia. Persia had conquered Babylon, which had previously conquered Assyria. This made the king of Persia to be the king of Assyria as well. It was unusual to refer to Darius as the king or ruler of Assyria. Ezra may have referred to him in this way to contrast Darius’ actions with those of the former rulers of Assyria, who had treated the Jews very cruelly. Those earlier Assyrian rulers were the ones who had conquered the northern tribes of Israel and deported them to other lands. It was for this reason that the northern tribes lost their identity and were no longer a distinct people group.
 EZR	6	1	cmmn	grammar-connect-logic-result	בֵּ⁠אדַ֛יִן	1	issued a command and a search was made	Here, **Then** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentences described. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EZR	6	1	spf8	figs-explicit	דָּרְיָ֥וֶשׁ מַלְכָּ֖⁠א שָׂ֣ם טְעֵ֑ם וּ⁠בַקַּ֣רוּ	1	issued a command and a search was made	The implication is that King Darius ordered his officials to search in the royal archives to investigate the claims that the Jewish elders had made in response to the questions that Tattenai and his associates asked them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “King Darius commanded his officials to investigate whether King Cyrus had issued a decree to rebuild the temple in Jerusalem by searching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	6	1	pb3s	translate-names	דָּרְיָ֥וֶשׁ	1	issued a command and a search was made	**Darius** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [4:5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ EZR	6	4	q3hv	figs-explicit	נִדְבָּכִ֞ין דִּי־אֶ֤בֶן גּ
 EZR	6	4	tny3	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִ֨פְקְתָ֔⁠א מִן־בֵּ֥ית מַלְכָּ֖⁠א תִּתְיְהִֽב	1	let the cost be paid by the king’s house	Here, **house** is a metaphor for property, meaning everything that a person keeps in his house, and by extension, everything that he owns. So **house** in this context figuratively represents the wealth and income of the king. Alternate translation: “I will pay the expenses from the royal revenue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	6	4	yh2n	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִ֨פְקְתָ֔⁠א מִן־בֵּ֥ית מַלְכָּ֖⁠א תִּתְיְהִֽב	1	let the cost be paid by the king’s house	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will pay the expenses from the royal revenue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	6	4	wjxj	figs-123person	וְ⁠נִ֨פְקְתָ֔⁠א מִן־בֵּ֥ית מַלְכָּ֖⁠א תִּתְיְהִֽב	1	let the cost be paid by the king’s house	Cyrus speaks of himself here in the third person. If this is not clear in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I will pay the expenses from the royal revenue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-EZR	6	5	ujut		מָאנֵ֣י בֵית־אֱלָהָ⁠א֮ דִּ֣י דַהֲבָ֣⁠ה וְ⁠כַסְפָּ⁠א֒ דִּ֣י נְבֽוּכַדְנֶצַּ֗ר הַנְפֵּ֛ק מִן־הֵיכְלָ֥⁠א דִי־בִ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֖ם וְ⁠הֵיבֵ֣ל לְ⁠בָבֶ֑ל יַהֲתִיב֗וּן	1	let the cost be paid by the king’s house	See how you translated the very similar sentence in [5:14](../05/14.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could put the verb first in this sentence. Alternate translation: “ I hereby return to the Jews the gold and silver objects which Nebuchadnezzar took out of the temple in Jerusalem and brought to Babylon”
+EZR	6	5	ujut		מָאנֵ֣י בֵית־אֱלָהָ⁠א֮ דִּ֣י דַהֲבָ֣⁠ה וְ⁠כַסְפָּ⁠א֒ דִּ֣י נְבֽוּכַדְנֶצַּ֗ר הַנְפֵּ֛ק מִן־הֵיכְלָ֥⁠א דִי־בִ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֖ם וְ⁠הֵיבֵ֣ל לְ⁠בָבֶ֑ל יַהֲתִיב֗וּן	1	let the cost be paid by the king’s house	See how you translated the very similar sentence in [5:14](../05/14.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could put the verb first in this sentence. Alternate translation: “I hereby return to the Jews the gold and silver objects which Nebuchadnezzar took out of the temple in Jerusalem and brought to Babylon”
 EZR	6	5	vlhj	figs-activepassive	מָאנֵ֣י…יַהֲתִיב֗וּן	1	let the cost be paid by the king’s house	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, as an imperative. Alternate translation: “return to the Jews the objects of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	6	5	bwim	translate-unknown	מָאנֵ֣י בֵית־אֱלָהָ⁠א֮ דִּ֣י דַהֲבָ֣⁠ה וְ⁠כַסְפָּ⁠א֒	1	let the cost be paid by the king’s house	**Vessels** specifically means the bowls, basins, and other objects listed in [1:9–10](../01/09.md). These were used during worship in the temple. Alternate translation: “the gold and silver objects that were used in worship in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EZR	6	5	wl8e	figs-parallelism	וִ֠⁠יהָךְ לְ⁠הֵיכְלָ֤⁠א דִי־בִ⁠ירֽוּשְׁלֶם֙ לְ⁠אַתְרֵ֔⁠הּ וְ⁠תַחֵ֖ת בְּ⁠בֵ֥ית אֱלָהָֽ⁠א	1	let the cost be paid by the king’s house	These two phrases mean similar things. Cyrus is saying basically the same thing twice to emphasize how important it is for his officials to carry out this command. If it is confusing for your readers to repeat both phrases, you can combine them and show the emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “Make sure that you put these objects back in the temple, right where they belong in the house of God in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ EZR	6	5	xrzz	figs-quotemarks	וְ⁠תַחֵ֖ת בְּ⁠בֵ֥ית אֱלָה
 EZR	6	6	f9x5	figs-ellipsis	כְּעַ֡ן תַּ֠תְּנַי	1	General Information:	Here the book leaves out some of the material that a story would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Rather than repeating the same information from the scroll, but now as a letter to the officials, it jumps right from its quotation from the scroll that was discovered at Ecbatana and into the letter that King Darius wrote to Tattenai and his associates in response to what the scroll said. You could say this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “When King Darius learned from the scroll that Cyrus had ordered the temple to be rebuilt, he sent Tattenai and his associates a letter in answer to their inquiry. He told them what he had learned from the scroll and then warned them, “Now Tattenai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EZR	6	6	ks97	figs-quotemarks	כְּעַ֡ן	1	General Information:	Since the book here begins to quote the letter that King Darius sent in reply to Tattenai and his associates, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EZR	6	6	wtim	grammar-connect-words-phrases	כְּעַ֡ן	1	General Information:	As in [4:13](../04/13.md), [4:14](../04/14.md), and [4:21](../04/21.md), **now** introduces an important point within a letter. (It is similar to the expression “and now” in [4:10](../04/10.md), [4:11](../04/11.md), [4:17](../04/17.md), and [5:17](../05/17.md).) If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-EZR	6	6	qpqv	figs-123person	תַּ֠תְּנַי פַּחַ֨ת עֲבַֽר־נַהֲרָ֜⁠ה שְׁתַ֤ר בּוֹזְנַי֙ וּ⁠כְנָוָ֣תְ⁠ה֔וֹן אֲפַרְסְכָיֵ֔⁠א דִּ֖י בַּ⁠עֲבַ֣ר נַהֲרָ֑⁠ה רַחִיקִ֥ין הֲו֖וֹ מִן־תַּמָּֽה	1	General Information:	Since Darius addresses these men directly at the end of the sentence, instead of <br>**their companions**, in the third person, we would expect him to say “your companions,” in the second person. So it seems that the book is compressing the letter as it quotes it. Based on the other letters that the book quotes in [4:11–16](../04/11.md), [4:17–22](../04/17.md), and [5:7–17](../05/07.md), the full letter probably said something like “To Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and their companions, the officials who are in Beyond-the-River. Peace. And now,” followed by an explanation that the court officials had discovered a scroll that recorded the decree of Cyrus. Then would follow instructions to these men, beginning “Be far away from there!” But since the quotation from this letter in the book jumps from the list of the recipients’ names right to these instructions, if it would be clearer in your language, you could use the second person throughout. Alternate translation: “Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and your associates, you officials who are in Beyond-the-River: Be far away from there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+EZR	6	6	qpqv	figs-123person	תַּ֠תְּנַי פַּחַ֨ת עֲבַֽר־נַהֲרָ֜⁠ה שְׁתַ֤ר בּוֹזְנַי֙ וּ⁠כְנָוָ֣תְ⁠ה֔וֹן אֲפַרְסְכָיֵ֔⁠א דִּ֖י בַּ⁠עֲבַ֣ר נַהֲרָ֑⁠ה רַחִיקִ֥ין הֲו֖וֹ מִן־תַּמָּֽה	1	General Information:	Since Darius addresses these men directly at the end of the sentence, instead of<br>**their companions**, in the third person, we would expect him to say “your companions,” in the second person. So it seems that the book is compressing the letter as it quotes it. Based on the other letters that the book quotes in [4:11–16](../04/11.md), [4:17–22](../04/17.md), and [5:7–17](../05/07.md), the full letter probably said something like “To Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and their companions, the officials who are in Beyond-the-River. Peace. And now,” followed by an explanation that the court officials had discovered a scroll that recorded the decree of Cyrus. Then would follow instructions to these men, beginning “Be far away from there!” But since the quotation from this letter in the book jumps from the list of the recipients’ names right to these instructions, if it would be clearer in your language, you could use the second person throughout. Alternate translation: “Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and your associates, you officials who are in Beyond-the-River: Be far away from there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EZR	6	6	xd9g	translate-names	תַּ֠תְּנַי…שְׁתַ֤ר בּוֹזְנַי֙	1	Tattenai … Shethar-Bozenai	These are the names of two men. See how you translated them in [5:3](../05/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	6	6	xk9x		וּ⁠כְנָוָ֣תְ⁠ה֔וֹן	1	the Province Beyond the River	Alternate translation: “and their associates” or “and your associates”
 EZR	6	6	akg1	figs-metaphor	רַחִיקִ֥ין הֲו֖וֹ מִן־תַּמָּֽה	1	the Province Beyond the River	King Darius uses a spatial metaphor to indicate figuratively that he wants Tattenai and his associates not to interfere with what the Jews are doing in Jerusalem. The meaning is not simply that they are to stay away physically from that area, since they could still plot against the Jews from a distance (for example, by bribing officials in the royal court, as [4:5](../04/05.md) describes). Alternate translation: “do not interfere with what is happening in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -640,9 +640,9 @@ EZR	6	11	w334	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠בַיְתֵ֛⁠הּ נְוָל֥וּ יִת
 EZR	6	11	i9yf	figs-activepassive	יִתְנְסַ֥ח אָע֙ מִן־בַּיְתֵ֔⁠הּ	1	impaled	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “you must pull a beam out of his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	6	11	ivvc	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠זְקִ֖יף יִתְמְחֵ֣א	1	impaled	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “then you must set the beam upright and impale him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	6	11	a7ih	figs-activepassive	וּ⁠בַיְתֵ֛⁠הּ נְוָל֥וּ יִתְעֲבֵ֖ד	1	impaled	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “And you must turn his house into a rubbish heap” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EZR	6	12	18u8		וֵֽ⁠אלָהָ֞⁠א דִּ֣י שַׁכִּ֧ן שְׁמֵ֣⁠הּ תַּמָּ֗ה יְמַגַּ֞ר	1	who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy	This is a curse formula. In addition to the threat of severe punishment in the previous verse, here Darius adds a curse from God to anyone who would disobey his order. Use a curse formula that is natural in your language.
+EZR	6	12	f8u8		וֵֽ⁠אלָהָ֞⁠א דִּ֣י שַׁכִּ֧ן שְׁמֵ֣⁠הּ תַּמָּ֗ה יְמַגַּ֞ר	1	who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy	This is a curse formula. In addition to the threat of severe punishment in the previous verse, here Darius adds a curse from God to anyone who would disobey his order. Use a curse formula that is natural in your language.
 EZR	6	12	eirc	figs-personification	וֵֽ⁠אלָהָ֞⁠א דִּ֣י שַׁכִּ֧ן שְׁמֵ֣⁠הּ תַּמָּ֗ה יְמַגַּ֞ר	1	who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy	Darius speaks of God’s **name** here as if it were capable of living in a place. The phrase echoes Jewish usage, which Darius may be following deliberately to show his respect for the God whose temple he wants to be rebuilt. The phrase indicates that Jerusalem is the place from which God chose to start making himself known throughout the world. Alternate translation: “And may the God who began to make himself known from Jerusalem destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-EZR	6	12	bajr	figs-metonymy	וֵֽ⁠אלָהָ֞⁠א דִּ֣י שַׁכִּ֧ן שְׁמֵ֣⁠הּ תַּמָּ֗ה יְמַגַּ֞ר	1	who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy	Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. In this figure, a person's fame is described by something associated with it, which is how well known their name is and how people react to hearing it. Alternate translation: “And may the God who began to make himself known from Jerusalem destroy” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EZR	6	12	bajr	figs-metonymy	וֵֽ⁠אלָהָ֞⁠א דִּ֣י שַׁכִּ֧ן שְׁמֵ֣⁠הּ תַּמָּ֗ה יְמַגַּ֞ר	1	who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy	Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. In this figure, a person's fame is described by something associated with it, which is how well known their name is and how people react to hearing it. Alternate translation: “And may the God who began to make himself known from Jerusalem destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EZR	6	12	jqt7	figs-idiom	יְמַגַּ֞ר	1	who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy	This is an idiom that means “destroy.” Alternate translation: “may … destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	6	12	e5ta	figs-idiom	כָּל־מֶ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם֙ דִּ֣י ׀ יִשְׁלַ֣ח יְדֵ֗⁠הּ	1	who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy	Here the expression “who stretches out his hand” means to seek to do harm. Alternate translation: “any king or people who, with harmful intent, attempts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	6	12	mn8y	figs-ellipsis	לְ⁠הַשְׁנָיָ֛ה לְ⁠חַבָּלָ֛ה בֵּית־אֱלָהָ֥⁠א דֵ֖ךְ	1	who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy	This could mean one of two things. (1) It could mean that no one is to try to **change** the decree of Darius, in the sense of disobeying or defying, as in the previous verse, so that they can **destroy** the temple rather than ensure that it is rebuilt. In that case, this letter would be leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “to disobey my decree and destroy that temple” or (2) It could mean that no one is to alter or destroy the temple. Alternate translation: “to alter the design of that temple or destroy it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -683,7 +683,7 @@ EZR	6	17	j5b6	figs-idiom	וּ⁠צְפִירֵ֨י עִזִּ֜ין	1	one hundre
 EZR	6	17	quwd	figs-explicit	וּ⁠צְפִירֵ֨י עִזִּ֜ין…תְּרֵֽי־עֲשַׂ֔ר לְ⁠מִנְיָ֖ן שִׁבְטֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	one hundred bulls … four hundred lambs	The book assumes that readers will know that there were twelve tribes in Israel, so the twelve goats could symbolically represent the entire nation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “12 male goats … one for each of the 12 tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	6	18	r0gx	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וַ⁠הֲקִ֨ימוּ	1	to their divisions	Here the word **And** indicates that the event the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a word such as “Then.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 EZR	6	18	zkjf	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠הֲקִ֨ימוּ כָהֲנַיָּ֜⁠א…וְ⁠לֵוָיֵ⁠א֙	1	to their divisions	Here, **stand** is a figurative way of saying that a person has assumed the duties of their office. So to cause someone to stand is to appoint them to those duties and install them in that office. Alternate translation: “And they appointed the priests … and the Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EZR	6	18	3zxp	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠הֲקִ֨ימוּ כָהֲנַיָּ֜⁠א	1	to their divisions	Here, **they** refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “And the leaders of the Jews appointed the priests” or “Then the Jewish elders established the priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+EZR	6	18	gzxp	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠הֲקִ֨ימוּ כָהֲנַיָּ֜⁠א	1	to their divisions	Here, **they** refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “And the leaders of the Jews appointed the priests” or “Then the Jewish elders established the priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EZR	6	18	iix1	figs-explicit	כָהֲנַיָּ֜⁠א בִּ⁠פְלֻגָּתְ⁠ה֗וֹן וְ⁠לֵוָיֵ⁠א֙ בְּ⁠מַחְלְקָ֣תְ⁠ה֔וֹן	1	to their divisions	The book assumes that readers will know that these **divisions** and **sections** were groups of priests and Levites, respectively, that served in the temple for a week at a time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They appointed the priests and the Levites to groups that would serve in the temple for a week at a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	6	18	ba06	figs-metaphor	עַל־עֲבִידַ֥ת אֱלָהָ֖⁠א דִּ֣י בִ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם	1	to their divisions	Here the book describes God in a spatial metaphor as if he lived in the city of Jerusalem. This is a figurative reference to the way God’s presence was in the temple in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to lead the worship of God in the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	6	18	vt19		כִּ⁠כְתָ֖ב סְפַ֥ר מֹשֶֽׁה	1	to their divisions	Alternate translation: “as it is written in the book of Moses” or “as God commanded in the law of Moses”
@@ -716,11 +716,11 @@ EZR	6	22	p2re	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂ֧וּ חַג
 EZR	6	22	k6q8	figs-metaphor	וְֽ⁠הֵסֵ֞ב לֵ֤ב מֶֽלֶךְ־אַשּׁוּר֙ עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֔ם	1	turned the heart of the king of Assyria	Here, **the heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and the will. Turning the king’s heart towards the Jews figuratively means that Yahweh made him think and feel differently about the Jews. Alternate translation: “and made King Darius of Persia favorable toward the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	6	22	x9ls		מֶֽלֶךְ־אַשּׁוּר֙	1	to strengthen their hands in the work of the house of God	This phrase actually refers to Darius, the king of Persia. But since the Persian Empire was the heir to the Assyrian Empire, Darius could be addressed by this title as well. (See the note to [4:15](../04/15.md) that explains that the Persian kings considered their “fathers” or predecessor kings to include the Assyrian and Babylonian kings whose empires they had absorbed.) Alternate translation: “King Darius of Persia”
 EZR	6	22	m7l7	figs-distinguish	אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	the work of the house of God	As in [4:1](../04/01.md), this phrase provides further background information about who Yahweh is. In context, it helps distinguish Yahweh from the gods of the nations of the land. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, the God whom the people of Israel worshiped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-EZR	7	intro	p3he			0		# Ezra 07 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Possible title: Ezra begins his religious reforms<br><br>### Ezra's geneology<br><br>Ezra’s genealogy in [7:1–5](../07/01.md) traces Ezra back to Aaron in a list of 16 ancestors. As is common in ancient genealogies, this list almost certainly does not include all of the generations between Aaron and Ezra. Aaron ([7:5](../07/05.md)) was the first high priest under the law of Moses and the first to serve in the tabernacle. Azariah ([7:3](../07/03.md)) was the first high priest to serve in the temple that Solomon built, which this book describes in [5:11](../05/11.md). Seraiah was the last high priest to serve in that temple. The Babylonians executed him when they conquered Jerusalem and destroyed the temple. The names in the list are arranged so that there will be seven generations between Aaron and Azariah, and seven generations between Azariah and Ezra, with Seraiah listed as the last generation before Ezra. If you have the freedom to use formatting creatively in your translation, you could make the implicit information about Aaron, Azariah, and Seraiah explicit and format this genealogy in a way that will highlight its purpose and design. Alternate translation and formatting for verse 1 through the first 2 words of verse 6:<br><br>Ezra—<br><br>the descendant of Seraiah, the last high priest in Solomon’s temple,<br>the son of Azariah,<br>the son of Hilkiah,<br>the son of Shallum,<br>the son of Zadok,<br>the descendant of Ahitub,<br>the descendant of Amariah,<br><br>the son of Azariah, the first high priest in Solomon’s temple,<br><br>the descendant of Meraioth,<br>the son of Zerahiah,<br>the son of Uzzi,<br>the son of Bukki,<br>the son of Abishua,<br>the son of Phinehas,<br>the son of Eleazar,<br><br>the son of Aaron, the first high priest in the tabernacle<br><br>—this Ezra<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### God’s Law<br><br>The people no longer know the law of Moses. Therefore, the king allows Ezra to return to Judea to teach the people about God’s law. Many people go with him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
+EZR	7	intro	p3he			0		# Ezra 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Possible title: Ezra begins his religious reforms<br><br>### Ezra's geneology<br><br>Ezra’s genealogy in [7:1–5](../07/01.md) traces Ezra back to Aaron in a list of 16 ancestors. As is common in ancient genealogies, this list almost certainly does not include all of the generations between Aaron and Ezra. Aaron ([7:5](../07/05.md)) was the first high priest under the law of Moses and the first to serve in the tabernacle. Azariah ([7:3](../07/03.md)) was the first high priest to serve in the temple that Solomon built, which this book describes in [5:11](../05/11.md). Seraiah was the last high priest to serve in that temple. The Babylonians executed him when they conquered Jerusalem and destroyed the temple. The names in the list are arranged so that there will be seven generations between Aaron and Azariah, and seven generations between Azariah and Ezra, with Seraiah listed as the last generation before Ezra. If you have the freedom to use formatting creatively in your translation, you could make the implicit information about Aaron, Azariah, and Seraiah explicit and format this genealogy in a way that will highlight its purpose and design. Alternate translation and formatting for verse 1 through the first 2 words of verse 6:<br><br>Ezra—<br><br>the descendant of Seraiah, the last high priest in Solomon’s temple,<br>the son of Azariah,<br>the son of Hilkiah,<br>the son of Shallum,<br>the son of Zadok,<br>the descendant of Ahitub,<br>the descendant of Amariah,<br><br>the son of Azariah, the first high priest in Solomon’s temple,<br><br>the descendant of Meraioth,<br>the son of Zerahiah,<br>the son of Uzzi,<br>the son of Bukki,<br>the son of Abishua,<br>the son of Phinehas,<br>the son of Eleazar,<br><br>the son of Aaron, the first high priest in the tabernacle<br><br>—this Ezra<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### God’s Law<br><br>The people no longer know the law of Moses. Therefore, the king allows Ezra to return to Judea to teach the people about God’s law. Many people go with him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
 EZR	7	1	h549	writing-newevent	וְ⁠אַחַר֙ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה	1	General Information:	This phrase, common in Hebrew storytelling, indicates that the book will now relate events that occurred some time after the events that it had been describing. The book had been describing the time when the Jews finished rebuilding the temple, [6:15](../06/15.md), which was the sixth year of the reign of Darius. Now it will describe events beginning during the seventh year of the reign of Artaxerxes, who was the grandson of Darius. So nearly sixty years went by between the end of chapter 6 and the beginning of chapter 7. If your language has a similar phrase that can indicate the passage of time like this, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EZR	7	1	qol2	translate-names	אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֣סְתְּא	1	General Information:	**Artaxerxes** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [4:7](../04/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	7	1	u6xs	translate-names	עֶזְרָא֙	1	General Information:	**Ezra** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-EZR	7	1	2ixh	writing-participants	עֶזְרָא֙	1	General Information:	Here the book introduces a new, important person. Use a natural way in your language to do this. Also, since the sentence that begins here extends through verse 6, it may be clearer to make this first part of verse 1 into a complete sentence and begin another sentence with the list of Ezra's ancestors, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+EZR	7	1	hixh	writing-participants	עֶזְרָא֙	1	General Information:	Here the book introduces a new, important person. Use a natural way in your language to do this. Also, since the sentence that begins here extends through verse 6, it may be clearer to make this first part of verse 1 into a complete sentence and begin another sentence with the list of Ezra's ancestors, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 EZR	7	1	n9di	figs-metaphor	בֶּן־שְׂרָיָ֔ה בֶּן־עֲזַרְיָ֖ה בֶּן־חִלְקִיָּֽה	1	Seraiah	In general, in the list in [7:1–5](../07/01.md), **son** figuratively means descendant. However, in many cases a man actually is the biological son of the next man on the list. So for your translation, you will need to decide whether to use the figurative expression **son**, which can also be literally true in many cases, or the non-figurative expression “descendant,” which is true in every case, or to say “son” for actual sons and “descendant” for descendants who are not actual sons. Choosing that last option would help to show that the men on the list have been selected to make a certain number and arrangement, as explained in the chapter introduction. Alternative translations will illustrate this last option for each verse. Here, Alternate translation: “the descendant of Seraiah, the son of Azariah, the son of Hilkiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	7	1	gcr6	translate-names	שְׂרָיָ֔ה…עֲזַרְיָ֖ה…חִלְקִיָּֽה	1	Azariah … Hilkiah	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	7	2	iy78		בֶּן־שַׁלּ֥וּם בֶּן־צָד֖וֹק בֶּן־אֲחִיטֽוּב	1	Shallum	Alternate translation: “the son of Shallum, the son of Zadok, the descendant of Ahitub”
@@ -747,7 +747,7 @@ EZR	7	7	szwv	figs-explicit	וְ⁠הַ⁠נְּתִינִ֖ים	1	in the seventh
 EZR	7	7	u61a	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יַּֽעֲל֣וּ…אֶל־יְרוּשָׁלִָ֑ם	1	in the seventh year of King Artaxerxes	The book says **went up** because these people had to travel from a river valley up into the mountains in order to return from their places of exile to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “traveled to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	7	7	wz8c	figs-go	וַ⁠יַּֽעֲל֣וּ…אֶל־יְרוּשָׁלִָ֑ם	1	in the seventh year of King Artaxerxes	If it is more natural in your language, you can say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “came to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 EZR	7	7	tt66	translate-ordinal	בִּ⁠שְׁנַת־שֶׁ֖בַע לְ⁠אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֥סְתְּא הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	in the seventh year of King Artaxerxes	The Hebrew uses a cardinal number here, **seven**, but there is not a significant difference in meaning between that and the way the Hebrew uses an ordinal number, **seventh**, in similar contexts elsewhere. If your language customarily uses ordinals for the numbers of years, you can do that here in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the seventh year of the reign of Artaxerxes as king of Persia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-EZR	7	8	8r10	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יָּבֹ֥א יְרוּשָׁלִַ֖ם	1	the fifth month	Here, **he** refers to Ezra, but the statement also applies to all the others described in [7:7](../07/07.md) who were traveling with him. Alternate translation: “And they all arrived in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+EZR	7	8	jr10	writing-pronouns	וַ⁠יָּבֹ֥א יְרוּשָׁלִַ֖ם	1	the fifth month	Here, **he** refers to Ezra, but the statement also applies to all the others described in [7:7](../07/07.md) who were traveling with him. Alternate translation: “And they all arrived in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 EZR	7	8	cr7y	translate-hebrewmonths	וַ⁠יָּבֹ֥א יְרוּשָׁלִַ֖ם בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠חֲמִישִׁ֑י	1	the fifth month	The **fifth month** means the fifth month in the Jewish calendar. You could convert the Hebrew month into an equivalent on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the equivalency will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to use the name or number of the Hebrew month. Alternate translation: “And they all arrived in Jerusalem during the fifth month of the year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 EZR	7	8	vee2	translate-ordinal	בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠חֲמִישִׁ֑י	1	the fifth month	Alternate translation: “in month five” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 EZR	7	8	co12	translate-ordinal	הִ֛יא שְׁנַ֥ת הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖ית לַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	the fifth month	Alternate translation: “in year seven of the reign of Artaxerxes,” or, since the year was mentioned at the end of the previous verse, “of that year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
@@ -762,8 +762,8 @@ EZR	7	9	k4wr	figs-metaphor	כְּ⁠יַד־אֱלֹהָ֖י⁠ו הַ⁠טּו
 EZR	7	10	lxrk	grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּ֤י	1	Ezra had established his heart to seek	The word **For** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the reasons for what the previous sentence described. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “The reason why God blessed them was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EZR	7	10	b5p7	figs-metaphor	עֶזְרָא֙ הֵכִ֣ין לְבָב֔⁠וֹ	1	Ezra had established his heart to seek	Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and the will of a person. Alternate translation: “Ezra had firmly determined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	7	10	y7yr	figs-metaphor	לִ⁠דְר֛וֹשׁ אֶת־תּוֹרַ֥ת יְהוָ֖ה וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲשֹׂ֑ת	1	to observe	Just as in [6:21](../06/21.md) to **seek** Yahweh figuratively means choosing to know, worship, and obey him, so here **to seek the law of Yahweh and to do it** means choosing to learn his law thoroughly in order to obey it, as a way of being loyal and obedient to Yahweh himself. Alternate translation: “to learn the law of Yahweh thoroughly and to obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EZR	7	10	w9d8	figs-doublet	וּ⁠לְ⁠לַמֵּ֥ד בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל חֹ֥ק וּ⁠מִשְׁפָּֽט	1	its statutes and ordinances	Here, the book expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The words **statute** and **ordinance** both refer to commandments in the law of Moses. The book uses the two words together to refer comprehensively to everything in the law. Alternate translation: “and to teach the people of Israel everything that the law commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-EZR	7	10	x92b	figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1	its statutes and ordinances	Here, the story refers to all of the Israelites figuratively by reference to their homeland, the country of Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EZR	7	10	w9d8	figs-doublet	וּ⁠לְ⁠לַמֵּ֥ד בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל חֹ֥ק וּ⁠מִשְׁפָּֽט	1	and to teach statute and ordinance in Israel	Here, the book expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The words **statute** and **ordinance** both refer to commandments in the law of Moses. The book uses the two words together to refer comprehensively to everything in the law. Alternate translation: “and to teach the people of Israel everything that the law commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+EZR	7	10	x92b	figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1	in Israel	Here, the story refers to all of the Israelites figuratively by reference to their homeland, the country of Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EZR	7	11	xf26	writing-newevent	וְ⁠זֶ֣ה	1	This is a copy of the letter	The word **Now** introduces a new event in the story. Use an expression in your language that would be natural for introducing a new event or a change to something different. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EZR	7	11	qjr1	translate-names	הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֔סְתְּא	1	This is a copy of the letter	Artaxerxes is the name of a man. It also occurs in [7:12](../07/12.md) and [7:21](../07/21.md) in this chapter. See how you translated it in [4:7](../04/07.md). Alternate translation: “King Artaxerxes of Persia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	7	11	xatp	figs-distinguish	לְ⁠עֶזְרָ֥א הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֖ן הַ⁠סֹּפֵ֑ר סֹפֵ֞ר דִּבְרֵ֧י מִצְוֺת־יְהוָ֛ה וְ⁠חֻקָּ֖י⁠ו עַל־יִשְׂרָאֵֽל	1	This is a copy of the letter	Here, the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “to Ezra, who was a priest and a scribe, and who had carefully studied everything that Yahweh, in the law, had commanded the people of Israel to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
@@ -777,12 +777,12 @@ EZR	7	12	al0q		גְּמִ֖יר	1	Artaxerxes, king of kings	As in [4:17](../04/1
 EZR	7	12	bf52	grammar-connect-words-phrases	וּ⁠כְעֶֽנֶת	1	Artaxerxes, king of kings	**And now** is an Aramaic expression that was used in the letters of this time to introduce the main business of the letter. If it would be helpful, review the note about this expression at [4:10](../04/10.md). If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])<br>
 EZR	7	13	d9b4	figs-activepassive	מִנִּ⁠י֮ שִׂ֣ים טְעֵם֒ דִּ֣י	1	I am issuing a decree that all those … who desire to go up to Jerusalem	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I am issuing a decree that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	7	13	wi2u	figs-you	עִמָּ֖⁠ךְ	1	may go with you	The king is addressing Ezra, so **you** is singular and refers to Ezra here, and **you** and **your** similarly refer to him in all of their other occurrences through [7:20](../07/20.md). If your language distinguishes between forms of you, the form for a superior addressing a respected individual would be appropriate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-EZR	7	13	g0ml		מִן־עַמָּ֨⁠ה יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל	1	may go with you	Here Artaxerxes specifies that **Israel** is the name of Ezra’s people group, perhaps because he does not expect everyone who sees this letter to be familiar with them already. Alternate translation: “from the people known as ‘Israel’” or <br>“from your people who are called ‘Israel’”
-EZR	7	14	ahgx	grammar-connect-logic-result	כָּ⁠ל־קֳבֵ֗ל דִּי֩ מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜⁠א וְ⁠שִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨⁠הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ לְ⁠בַקָּרָ֥א עַל־יְה֖וּד וְ⁠לִֽ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם בְּ⁠דָ֥ת אֱלָהָ֖⁠ךְ דִּ֥י בִ⁠ידָֽ⁠ךְ	1	Connecting Statement:	Verses [7:14–17](../07/14.md) are one long sentence in Aramaic. The first part ([7:14–16](../07/14.md)) provides the reasons for the second part (in [7:17](../07/17.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could break up that sentence into several smaller sentences. To begin with, you could make this verse a sentence of its own. To do that, you can leave off the word **Because** and express the meaning later in verse 17 with a word such as "so" or "therefore." Alternate translation: “The king and his seven counselors are sending you to inquire about Judah and about Jerusalem by the law of your God which is in your hand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+EZR	7	13	g0ml		מִן־עַמָּ֨⁠ה יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל	1	may go with you	Here Artaxerxes specifies that **Israel** is the name of Ezra’s people group, perhaps because he does not expect everyone who sees this letter to be familiar with them already. Alternate translation: “from the people known as ‘Israel’” or<br>“from your people who are called ‘Israel’”
+EZR	7	14	ahgx	grammar-connect-logic-result	כָּ⁠ל־קֳבֵ֗ל דִּי֩ מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜⁠א וְ⁠שִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨⁠הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ לְ⁠בַקָּרָ֥א עַל־יְה֖וּד וְ⁠לִֽ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם בְּ⁠דָ֥ת אֱלָהָ֖⁠ךְ דִּ֥י בִ⁠ידָֽ⁠ךְ	1	Connecting Statement:	Verses [7:14–17](../07/14.md) are one long sentence in Aramaic. The first part ([7:14–16](../07/14.md)) provides the reasons for the second part (in [7:17](../07/17.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could break up that sentence into several smaller sentences. To begin with, you could make this verse a sentence of its own. To do that, you can leave off the word **Because** and express the meaning later in verse 17 with a word such as “so” or “therefore.” Alternate translation: “The king and his seven counselors are sending you to inquire about Judah and about Jerusalem by the law of your God which is in your hand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EZR	7	14	cbf2	grammar-connect-logic-result	כָּ⁠ל־קֳבֵ֗ל דִּי֩	1	Connecting Statement:	The word **Because** indicates that in the long sentence that follows, the next several phrases ([7:14–16](../07/14.md)) will provide the reasons for what the final two phrases say (in [7:17](../07/17.md)). If you have decided to keep the long sentence, you can translate this first word with the word or phrase in your language that introduces a reason. However, also consider breaking up this long sentence if that would make things clearer for your readers. Alternate translation: “Since” or “In view of the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EZR	7	14	h7cx	figs-activepassive	מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜⁠א וְ⁠שִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨⁠הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ	1	the king, and his seven counselors	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “I and my seven counselors are sending you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	7	14	cx02	figs-123person	מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜⁠א וְ⁠שִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨⁠הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ	1	the king, and his seven counselors	Artaxerxes speaks of himself here in the third person. If it would be clearer in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I and my seven counselors are sending you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-EZR	7	14	tpvw	figs-metaphor	מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜⁠א וְ⁠שִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨⁠הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ	1	the king, and his seven counselors	This could mean literally that Ezra has been in the king’s presence, that is, in his court, and that the king is sending him out from there. This phrase would show anyone who read the letter that Ezra was an important figure in the royal court. The phrase could also be a spatial metaphor indicating that Ezra is going out on the king’s behalf and with his authority. Alternate translation: “I and my seven counselors are sending you from my court” or “I and my seven counselors are<br> sending you with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EZR	7	14	tpvw	figs-metaphor	מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜⁠א וְ⁠שִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨⁠הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ	1	the king, and his seven counselors	This could mean literally that Ezra has been in the king’s presence, that is, in his court, and that the king is sending him out from there. This phrase would show anyone who read the letter that Ezra was an important figure in the royal court. The phrase could also be a spatial metaphor indicating that Ezra is going out on the king’s behalf and with his authority. Alternate translation: “I and my seven counselors are sending you from my court” or “I and my seven counselors are<br>sending you with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	7	14	u9he	translate-unknown	וְ⁠שִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨⁠הִי֙	1	the king, and his seven counselors	As in [4:5](../04/05.md), **counselors** means royal advisors in the Persian court. The seven mentioned here appear to have been the king’s closest and most important advisors. Alternate translation: “and his seven chief royal advisors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EZR	7	14	dnqr	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠בַקָּרָ֥א עַל־יְה֖וּד וְ⁠לִֽ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם בְּ⁠דָ֥ת אֱלָהָ֖⁠ךְ	1	the king, and his seven counselors	Artaxerxes is describing the Jews who are in the province of Judah, and especially its capital city of Jerusalem, figuratively, by reference to things that are associated with them, the province and city where they live. Alternate translation: “to see how carefully the Jews living in the province of Judah and the city of Jerusalem are following the law of your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EZR	7	14	v44t	figs-explicit	לְ⁠בַקָּרָ֥א עַל־יְה֖וּד וְ⁠לִֽ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם בְּ⁠דָ֥ת אֱלָהָ֖⁠ךְ	1	to inquire concerning Judah and Jerusalem according to the law of your God	The implication, particularly in light of the powers that the king gives Ezra at the end of the letter ([7:25–26](../07/25.md)), is that **inquire** means more than just to find out about. It also implies to do something about. Alternate translation: “to make sure that the Jews living in the province of Judah and the city of Jerusalem follow the law of your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -801,7 +801,7 @@ EZR	7	17	ciw6	figs-explicit	בְּ⁠כַסְפָּ֣⁠א דְנָ֗ה	1	Connec
 EZR	7	17	b2sq	figs-explicit	אָסְפַּ֨רְנָא תִקְנֵ֜א…תּוֹרִ֤ין ׀ דִּכְרִין֙ אִמְּרִ֔ין וּ⁠מִנְחָתְ⁠ה֖וֹן וְ⁠נִסְכֵּי⁠ה֑וֹן	1	diligently buy bulls, rams, lambs, and grain offerings and drink offerings	The implication, as [6:9](../06/09.md) indicates explicitly, is that the bulls, rams, and lambs were to be used for whole burnt offerings. If it would be helpful, review the note to [3:2](../03/02.md) about what whole burnt offerings were and why they were offered. The book also expects readers to know that the law of Moses said that two further things should be offered together with the animals that were sacrificed in whole burnt offerings. One was a certain amount of flour mixed with oil, considered a **grain offering**. The other was a certain amount of wine, considered a **drink offering**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “be sure to buy bulls, rams, and lambs to sacrifice as whole burnt offerings, and grain, oil, and wine for the grain offerings and drink offerings that the law says must accompany them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	7	17	sjnr		אָסְפַּ֨רְנָא	1	diligently buy bulls, rams, lambs, and grain offerings and drink offerings	In their decrees, as several examples in this book show, the Persian kings used this term **diligently** to mean carefully, exactly, and efficiently. Review the note to [5:8](../05/08.md) about this term if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “be sure that”
 EZR	7	17	vb7p	figs-you	תִקְנֵ֜א בְּ⁠כַסְפָּ֣⁠א דְנָ֗ה	1	diligently buy bulls, rams, lambs, and grain offerings and drink offerings	The word **you** here is singular, referring to Ezra. However, Ezra may not have made these purchases himself. Alternate translation: “make sure that your people use this money to buy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-EZR	7	17	5f7h	figs-you	וּ⁠תְקָרֵ֣ב	1	diligently buy bulls, rams, lambs, and grain offerings and drink offerings	The word **you** here is singular, referring to Ezra. However, Ezra probably did not offer these sacrifices himself. Alternate translation: “and make sure that the priests offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+EZR	7	17	kf7h	figs-you	וּ⁠תְקָרֵ֣ב	1	diligently buy bulls, rams, lambs, and grain offerings and drink offerings	The word **you** here is singular, referring to Ezra. However, Ezra probably did not offer these sacrifices himself. Alternate translation: “and make sure that the priests offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EZR	7	17	gnt1	figs-you	אֱלָהֲ⁠כֹ֖ם	1	diligently buy bulls, rams, lambs, and grain offerings and drink offerings	The word **your** here is plural, referring to all of the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EZR	7	18	a2bh	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠מָ֣ה דִי֩ עלי⁠ך וְ⁠עַל־אחי⁠ך יֵיטַ֗ב בִּ⁠שְׁאָ֛ר כַּסְפָּ֥⁠א וְ⁠דַהֲבָ֖⁠ה לְ⁠מֶעְבַּ֑ד כִּ⁠רְע֥וּת אֱלָהֲ⁠כֹ֖ם תַּעַבְדֽוּן	1	you and your brothers	Here, **brother** is a figurative way of saying “fellow Israelites,” and in context it likely refers to the other Jewish leaders who would decide with Ezra what to do with the extra money. Alternate translation: “You and your fellow Jewish leaders can decide what you think your God would like you to do with any silver and gold that is left over.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	7	18	cq55	figs-you	תַּעַבְדֽוּן	1	you and your brothers	The word **you** here is plural, referring to Ezra and the other Jewish leaders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@@ -809,18 +809,18 @@ EZR	7	18	pcdz	figs-you	עלי⁠ך וְ⁠עַל־אחי⁠ך	1	you and your bro
 EZR	7	18	zufe	figs-you	אֱלָהֲ⁠כֹ֖ם	1	you and your brothers	The word **your** here is plural, referring to all of the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EZR	7	19	h5qf	grammar-connect-words-phrases	וּ⁠מָֽאנַיָּ⁠א֙	1	Connecting Statement:	This sentence may be introducing a contrast between what Ezra and the other Jewish leaders could do with gold and silver that people contributed in the form of money and what they had to do with gold and silver that people contributed in the form of bowls and other objects that could be used in the temple. You could begin the sentence with a word such as “however” to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 EZR	7	19	h6x1	figs-explicit	וּ⁠מָֽאנַיָּ⁠א֙ דִּֽי־מִתְיַהֲבִ֣ין לָ֔⁠ךְ לְ⁠פָלְחָ֖ן בֵּ֣ית אֱלָהָ֑⁠ךְ הַשְׁלֵ֕ם קֳדָ֖ם אֱלָ֥הּ יְרוּשְׁלֶֽם	1	the objects that were given to you	As in [1:7](../01/07.md), **vessels** refers to bowls, basins, and other objects that could be used in worship in the temple. The ones that people contributed on this occasion are described in more detail in [8:26–27](../08/26.md). The implication in what the king says here is that Ezra and the Jewish leaders are not to sell or melt down these objects and use the proceeds to pay for temple expenses. Rather, they must use these objects only for temple worship. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not use objects that people contribute for use in the temple of your God to pay for the temple expenses. Make sure that you deliver every one of them to Jerusalem, where they can be used in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EZR	7	19	4d7a	figs-you	לָ֔⁠ךְ…אֱלָהָ֑⁠ךְ	1	the objects that were given to you	Here, **you** and **your** are singular, referring to Ezra. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+EZR	7	19	md7a	figs-you	לָ֔⁠ךְ…אֱלָהָ֑⁠ךְ	1	the objects that were given to you	Here, **you** and **your** are singular, referring to Ezra. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EZR	7	19	yho1	figs-abstractnouns	לְ⁠פָלְחָ֖ן בֵּ֣ית אֱלָהָ֑⁠ךְ	1	the objects that were given to you	The idea behind the abstract noun **service** can be expressed with a verb such as “use.” Alternate translation: “to use in the temple of your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EZR	7	19	bkk8	figs-idiom	הַשְׁלֵ֕ם	1	deliver in full before the God of Jerusalem	The Aramaic expression translated here as **deliver in full** means to “make complete.” It is the same one that the Jewish leaders use in [5:16](../05/16.md) when they say that the temple is not “finished” yet. In context it means that Ezra must be sure to deliver every single one of the contributed objects to the temple, so that the complete set that was donated will be reassembled there. (We see him doing this carefully in [8:26–27](../08/26.md)). Alternate translation: “make sure that you deliver every one of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	7	19	a3tf	figs-metaphor	קֳדָ֖ם אֱלָ֥הּ יְרוּשְׁלֶֽם	1	for the service of the house of your God	Using a spatial metaphor, Artaxerxes says that Ezra must place the objects **before** God, figuratively meaning in God’s presence. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem, where they can be used in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	7	19	wsrv	figs-metaphor	קֳדָ֖ם אֱלָ֥הּ יְרוּשְׁלֶֽם	1	for the service of the house of your God	As in [6:18](../06/18.md), in another spatial metaphor, Artaxerxes describes God as if he lived in the city of Jerusalem. This is a figurative reference to the way God’s presence was in the temple in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem, where they can be used in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	7	20	tytf	figs-idiom	וּ⁠שְׁאָ֗ר חַשְׁחוּת֙ בֵּ֣ית אֱלָהָ֔⁠ךְ דִּ֥י יִפֶּל־לָ֖⁠ךְ לְ⁠מִנְתַּ֑ן	1	treasury	The phrase **that falls to you to give** is an idiom that means “that you have responsibility to give,” in other words, “that you have to provide.” Alternate translation: “And anything else that you need to provide for the temple of your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	7	20	ef6f	figs-activepassive	חַשְׁחוּת֙	1	treasury	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whatever you might need for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EZR	7	20	xcus	figs-you	אֱלָהָ֔⁠ךְ…לָ֖⁠ךְ…תִּנְתֵּ֕ן	1	treasury	All of the forms of **you** in this verse are singular, referring to Ezra. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+EZR	7	20	xcus	figs-you	אֱלָהָ֔⁠ךְ…לָ֖⁠ךְ…תִּנְתֵּ֕ן	1	treasury	All of the forms of **you** in this verse are singular, referring to Ezra.<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EZR	7	20	gshw	figs-synecdoche	תִּנְתֵּ֕ן מִן־בֵּ֖ית גִּנְזֵ֥י מַלְכָּֽ⁠א	1	treasury	This does not mean, as in [5:17](../05/17.md), the place where valuable royal documents were stored. Here, **house** likely represents all of the wealth of the king figuratively. It is a metaphor for “property,” meaning everything that a person keeps in his house, and by extension everything that he owns. So it is not necessarily a physical building, but it refers in general to all the financial resources that belong to the king, as with the shorter expression **the treasures of the king** in [6:8](../06/08.md). Alternate translation: “you may pay for from my royal treasury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 EZR	7	20	hgu9	figs-123person	בֵּ֖ית גִּנְזֵ֥י מַלְכָּֽ⁠א	1	treasury	Artaxerxes speaks of himself here in the third person. If it would be clearer in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “my royal treasury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EZR	7	21	wiy2	grammar-connect-logic-result	וּ֠⁠מִנִּ⁠י	1	Connecting Statement:	This phrase indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Specifically, Artaxerxes has just said that Ezra may pay for additional expenses out of the royal treasury. Consequently, regarding providing funds to Ezra, he will now give instructions to the officials responsible for administering the royal revenue in the province where Jerusalem is located. Alternate translation: “Consequently, from me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-EZR	7	21	rfxe	figs-123person	וּ֠⁠מִנִּ⁠י אֲנָ֞ה אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֤סְתְּא מַלְכָּ⁠א֙ שִׂ֣ים טְעֵ֔ם	1	Connecting Statement:	Up to this point in the letter, Artaxerxes has been addressing Ezra, and he has spoken of himself mostly in the third person. But now as he turns to address a new audience, the royal treasurers, he speaks of himself in the first person, and he uses the emphatic form **me myself** and repeats his name and title, as in [7:12](../07/12.md). If you have been translating the king’s use of the third person for himself in this letter with the first person in your language, it may be helpful to your readers if you use some emphatic form or extended phrase here to show this transition. Alternate translation: “ And I, King Artaxerxes, am personally commanding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+EZR	7	21	rfxe	figs-123person	וּ֠⁠מִנִּ⁠י אֲנָ֞ה אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֤סְתְּא מַלְכָּ⁠א֙ שִׂ֣ים טְעֵ֔ם	1	Connecting Statement:	Up to this point in the letter, Artaxerxes has been addressing Ezra, and he has spoken of himself mostly in the third person. But now as he turns to address a new audience, the royal treasurers, he speaks of himself in the first person, and he uses the emphatic form **me myself** and repeats his name and title, as in [7:12](../07/12.md). If you have been translating the king’s use of the third person for himself in this letter with the first person in your language, it may be helpful to your readers if you use some emphatic form or extended phrase here to show this transition. Alternate translation: “And I, King Artaxerxes, am personally commanding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EZR	7	21	h6c8	figs-activepassive	וּ֠⁠מִנִּ⁠י אֲנָ֞ה אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֤סְתְּא מַלְכָּ⁠א֙ שִׂ֣ים טְעֵ֔ם לְ⁠כֹל֙…דִּ֣י כָל־דִּ֣י יִ֠שְׁאֲלֶנְ⁠כוֹן עֶזְרָ֨א…אָסְפַּ֖רְנָא יִתְעֲבִֽד	1	that anything that Ezra … asks from you, let it be done diligently	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “And I, King Artaxerxes, am personally commanding all of you who are … to give Ezra … anything that he asks from you, and to do it exactly and promptly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	7	21	mlat	figs-you	יִ֠שְׁאֲלֶנְ⁠כוֹן	1	that anything that Ezra … asks from you, let it be done diligently	The king is now addressing the treasurers, so **you** is plural and refers to the treasurers here and in [7:24](../07/24.md). If your language distinguishes between forms of you, the form for a superior addressing a group of people would be appropriate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EZR	7	21	zz8u	translate-unknown	גִּזַּֽבְרַיָּ֔⁠א	1	that anything that Ezra … asks from you, let it be done diligently	These were royal officials responsible for administering the funds of the empire in their province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -849,7 +849,7 @@ EZR	7	24	gonv		תָרָֽעַיָּ⁠א֙	1	musicians	This is the same occupati
 EZR	7	24	nk0a	translate-names	נְתִ֣ינַיָּ֔⁠א	1	musicians	See how you translated this term in [2:43](../02/43.md). Review the explanation in the note there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	7	25	r244	figs-you	וְ⁠אַ֣נְתְּ עֶזְרָ֗א	1	Connecting Statement:	The king now returns to address Ezra personally, so **you** refers to him here, and is singular, The three instances of **your** in this verse are also singular, as is the verb **appoint**. Only the phrase **you shall teach** is plural, referring to Ezra and to those whom he will appoint. If your language distinguishes between levels of social status, the form for a superior addressing a respected individual would be appropriate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 EZR	7	25	p1rc	figs-abstractnouns	כְּ⁠חָכְמַ֨ת אֱלָהָ֤⁠ךְ דִּֽי־בִ⁠ידָ⁠ךְ֙	1	according to the wisdom of God that is in your hand, appoint judges and magistrates	If your language does not use abstract nouns such as **wisdom**, you can express that idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “because the law of your God has made you wise” or “guided by the wise teachings of your God that you know so well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-EZR	7	25	qzk1	figs-metaphor	דִּֽי־בִ⁠ידָ⁠ךְ֙	1	according to the wisdom of God that is in your hand, appoint judges and magistrates	Most likely, the phrase **that is in your hand** here means the same thing as in [7:14](../07/14.md), where the law of God is described as being in Ezra's hand. <br>Review the note there if that would be helpful. As there, the phrase **in your hand** here could mean: (1) that Ezra knows it and uses it with great ability. Alternate translation: “that you know and use well” or (2) that Ezra personally owns a scroll of God's wisdom. Alternate translation: “that you have with you” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EZR	7	25	qzk1	figs-metaphor	דִּֽי־בִ⁠ידָ⁠ךְ֙	1	according to the wisdom of God that is in your hand, appoint judges and magistrates	Most likely, the phrase **that is in your hand** here means the same thing as in [7:14](../07/14.md), where the law of God is described as being in Ezra's hand.<br>Review the note there if that would be helpful. As there, the phrase **in your hand** here could mean: (1) that Ezra knows it and uses it with great ability. Alternate translation: “that you know and use well” or (2) that Ezra personally owns a scroll of God's wisdom. Alternate translation: “that you have with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	7	25	y54v	figs-doublet	מֶ֣נִּי שָׁפְטִ֞ין וְ⁠דַיָּנִ֗ין דִּי־לֶהֱוֺ֤ן דאנין	1	according to the wisdom of God that is in your hand, appoint judges and magistrates	The terms **magistrates** and **judges** mean very similar things. There are two possibilities here. (1) Artaxerxes could be using these two terms to refer to people in slightly different roles. The first term may refer to officials who decide disputes between people, and the second term may refer to officials who interpret the law and apply it to specific situations. Alternate translation: “appoint officials who can decide disputes between people and officials who can interpret and apply the law” or (2) Artaxerxes may be using the two words together to emphasize the authority that Ezra has to ensure that the Jews in Judah and Jerusalem follow God’s commandments. If you have only one term for these functions, you can just use that one term here. Alternate translation: “appoint judges so that they can judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 EZR	7	25	waab	figs-explicit	לְ⁠כָל־עַמָּ⁠ה֙ דִּ֚י בַּ⁠עֲבַ֣ר נַהֲרָ֔⁠ה לְ⁠כָל־יָדְעֵ֖י דָּתֵ֣י אֱלָהָ֑⁠ךְ	1	according to the wisdom of God that is in your hand, appoint judges and magistrates	The second phrase clarifies the meaning of the first phrase, showing that Artaxerxes is referring specifically to the Jews who live in this province. He is allowing the Jews there to have their own legal system, based on the law of Moses. If it would be clearer in your language, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the Jews living in Beyond-the-River province, who know the laws of your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	7	25	nncp	figs-you	וְ⁠דִ֧י לָ֦א יָדַ֖ע תְּהוֹדְעֽוּן	1	according to the wisdom of God that is in your hand, appoint judges and magistrates	The word **you** here is plural. If your language distinguishes between forms of you, the form for a superior addressing a group of people would be appropriate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@@ -862,7 +862,7 @@ EZR	7	26	rz8o	figs-quotemarks	וְ⁠לֶ⁠אֱסוּרִֽין	1	whether death
 EZR	7	27	qh6m	writing-participants	בָּר֥וּךְ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבוֹתֵ֑י⁠נוּ	1	Connecting Statement:	Previously in the book, Ezra has been a character in a story that someone else has been telling. Here he becomes the person telling the story, and he continues to tell it through to the end of chapter 9. In effect, the letter of introduction that King Artaxerxes wrote for him has been his introduction to us as well. The book does not say specifically that Ezra will now be the narrator, although one indication is that when Ezra is telling the story, he refers to himself as “I” and to the Jewish community as “us,” and another indication is that the book is now written in Hebrew again. But if it would be helpful to your readers, you could add a phrase to indicate this. Alternate translation: “When I, Ezra, received this letter from the king, I prayed, ‘Thank you, Yahweh, the God of our ancestors’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 EZR	7	27	yfls	figs-aside	בָּר֥וּךְ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבוֹתֵ֑י⁠נוּ	1	Connecting Statement:	The first thing that Ezra does when he begins to tell his own story is pray to God, rather than address the audience that will hear his story. If you decided to add a phrase to introduce him as the new narrator, you could use that same phrase to introduce this prayer as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “When I, Ezra, received this letter from the king, I prayed, ‘Thank you, Yahweh, the God of our ancestors’” Otherwise, you could show that this prayer is distinct from the story by setting it off with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. The quotation should end in the middle of [7:28](../07/28.md), after “the mighty officials of the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
 EZR	7	27	qub7	figs-123person	בָּר֥וּךְ יְהוָ֖ה	1	Connecting Statement:	Although Ezra speaks of Yahweh in the third person here, he is actually praying a prayer of thanksgiving to Yahweh. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words in the second person. Alternate translation: “Thank you, Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-EZR	7	27	9uli		בָּר֥וּךְ יְהוָ֖ה	1	Connecting Statement:	If it is not natural or not possible in your language to speak of a human blessing God, then you can express the idea here in a different way. Alternate translation: “I praise Yahweh” or “I thank Yahweh”
+EZR	7	27	nuli		בָּר֥וּךְ יְהוָ֖ה	1	Connecting Statement:	If it is not natural or not possible in your language to speak of a human blessing God, then you can express the idea here in a different way. Alternate translation: “I praise Yahweh” or “I thank Yahweh”
 EZR	7	27	nlii	figs-metaphor	אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבוֹתֵ֑י⁠נוּ	1	Connecting Statement:	**Fathers** here figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	7	27	t4cz	figs-metaphor	נָתַ֤ן כָּ⁠זֹאת֙ בְּ⁠לֵ֣ב הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לְ⁠פָאֵ֕ר אֶת־בֵּ֥ית יְהוָ֖ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר בִּ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָֽם	1	placed such a thing into the heart of the king to beautify the house of Yahweh which is in Jerusalem	Giving something in the king’s heart, that is, putting something in it, means leading him to have certain thoughts and desires. Alternate translation: “led the king to want to glorify the temple of Yahweh in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	7	27	w14w	figs-metaphor	לְ⁠פָאֵ֕ר אֶת־בֵּ֥ית יְהוָ֖ה	1	the house of Yahweh	This expression means to make something bright, glorious, or beautiful. Artaxerxes was not doing this literally, the way that Cyrus and Darius did by supporting the physical rebuilding of the temple. Rather, Artaxerxes was making sure that the temple would always have everything it needed to keep operating. In that way he was making sure that the temple would not languish and be disrespected, but rather, always be a vibrant place that was held in honor. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to honor the temple of Yahweh” or “to make sure that the temple of Yahweh would always be a glorious place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -873,7 +873,7 @@ EZR	7	28	pb8i	figs-quotemarks	שָׂרֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ הַ⁠גּ
 EZR	7	28	q1iu	figs-metonymy	הִתְחַזַּ֗קְתִּי כְּ⁠יַד־יְהוָ֤ה אֱלֹהַ⁠י֙ עָלַ֔⁠י	1	So I was strengthened	As in [7:6](../07/06.md), **hand** figuratively represents power and control, and the expression **the hand of Yahweh my God upon me** indicates that Ezra enjoyed Yahweh’s care, protection, and favor. Alternate translation: “I was encouraged because I recognized that Yahweh my God was helping me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EZR	7	28	gxx2	figs-ellipsis	מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֛ל רָאשִׁ֖ים	1	as the hand of Yahweh my God was upon me	As [8:1](../08/01.md) shows, **heads** here is an abbreviated way of saying **heads of father’s houses**. Alternate translation: “some Israelite clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EZR	7	28	agha	figs-idiom	לַ⁠עֲל֥וֹת עִמִּֽ⁠י	1	as the hand of Yahweh my God was upon me	Ezra says **go up** because he and the group he was leading would have to travel from a river valley up into the mountains in order to return from their places of exile to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to return to Jerusalem with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EZR	8	intro	ye9m			0		# Ezra 08 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The people’s return to Judah<br><br>Many people went back to Judah with Ezra. They trusted God to protect them and the precious items that they carried with them, which had been given for the temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])
+EZR	8	intro	ye9m			0		# Ezra 8 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The people’s return to Judah<br><br>Many people went back to Judah with Ezra. They trusted God to protect them and the precious items that they carried with them, which had been given for the temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])
 EZR	8	1	wwtp	writing-newevent	וְ⁠אֵ֛לֶּה	1	General Information:	The word **Now** introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural method<br>in your language to introduce a new event here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EZR	8	1	ss8d	figs-ellipsis	וְ⁠אֵ֛לֶּה רָאשֵׁ֥י אֲבֹתֵי⁠הֶ֖ם וְ⁠הִתְיַחְשָׂ֑⁠ם הָ⁠עֹלִ֣ים עִמִּ֗⁠י	1	General Information:	As in [4:3](../04/03.md), **heads of their fathers** is an abbreviated way of saying “heads of their father’s houses.” Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “These are the names of the clan leaders, along with the names of their clans, of those who traveled with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EZR	8	1	u9yy	figs-idiom	הָ⁠עֹלִ֣ים עִמִּ֗⁠י…מִ⁠בָּבֶֽל	1	General Information:	As in [7:28](../07/28.md), Ezra says **go up** because the trip from Babylon to Jerusalem would involve a significant climb in elevation. Alternate translation: “who returned from Babylon with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -885,8 +885,8 @@ EZR	8	2	i7e9	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י אִיתָמָ֖ר דָּנִי
 EZR	8	2	uzuw	translate-names	אִיתָמָ֖ר דָּנִיֵּ֑אל	1	of the sons of Ithamar, Daniel	These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	8	2	kb7h	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י דָוִ֖יד חַטּֽוּשׁ	1	of the sons of David, Hattush	Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of David, Hattush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	8	2	xt4r	translate-names	דָוִ֖יד חַטּֽוּשׁ	1	Hattush	These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-EZR	8	3	m91f	figs-explicit	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י שְׁכַנְיָ֔ה ס מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֖שׁ זְכַרְיָ֑ה	1	Parosh	This could mean one of two things. (1) The phrase **from the sons of Shecaniah** probably applies to the end of the previous verse. 1 Chronicles 3:19–22 shows that Hattush was the grandson of Shecaniah, and that Shecaniah was either the grandson or a more distant descendant of Zerubbabel, who was a descendant of King David. (As several of the following verses show, further information like this may be provided about the clan leaders on this list.) So the end of [8:2](../08/02.md) and the beginning of [8:3](../08/03.md) could read: “From the descendants of King David, Hattush, one of the descendants of Shecaniah” or (2) It could mean that Zechariah was the clan leader of the descendants of Shecaniah, and that they were all descendants of a more remote ancestor named Parosh. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Shecaniah, who were descendants of Parosh, Zechariah” <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EZR	8	3	veab	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י שְׁכַנְיָ֔ה ס מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֖שׁ זְכַרְיָ֑ה	1	Parosh	Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: (1) “one of the descendants of Shecaniah. From the descendants of Parosh, Zechariah” or, if you have decided that **from the sons of Shecaniah** applies to **Zechariah**, (2) <br>“From the descendants of Shecaniah, who were descendants of Parosh, Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EZR	8	3	m91f	figs-explicit	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י שְׁכַנְיָ֔ה ס מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֖שׁ זְכַרְיָ֑ה	1	Parosh	This could mean one of two things. (1) The phrase **from the sons of Shecaniah** probably applies to the end of the previous verse. 1 Chronicles 3:19–22 shows that Hattush was the grandson of Shecaniah, and that Shecaniah was either the grandson or a more distant descendant of Zerubbabel, who was a descendant of King David. (As several of the following verses show, further information like this may be provided about the clan leaders on this list.) So the end of [8:2](../08/02.md) and the beginning of [8:3](../08/03.md) could read: “From the descendants of King David, Hattush, one of the descendants of Shecaniah” or (2) It could mean that Zechariah was the clan leader of the descendants of Shecaniah, and that they were all descendants of a more remote ancestor named Parosh. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Shecaniah, who were descendants of Parosh, Zechariah”<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+EZR	8	3	veab	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י שְׁכַנְיָ֔ה ס מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֖שׁ זְכַרְיָ֑ה	1	Parosh	Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: (1) “one of the descendants of Shecaniah. From the descendants of Parosh, Zechariah” or, if you have decided that **from the sons of Shecaniah** applies to **Zechariah**, (2)<br>“From the descendants of Shecaniah, who were descendants of Parosh, Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	8	3	f6xt	translate-names	שְׁכַנְיָ֔ה…פַרְעֹ֖שׁ זְכַרְיָ֑ה	1	Parosh	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	8	3	ds2y	figs-explicit	וְ⁠עִמּ֛⁠וֹ הִתְיַחֵ֥שׂ לִ⁠זְכָרִ֖ים מֵאָ֥ה וַ⁠חֲמִשִּֽׁים	1	with him were registered150 males	The implication is that these 150 males belonged to the same clan as Zechariah. Alternate translation: “along with 150 other men from his clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	8	4	f7d5	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנֵי֙ פַּחַ֣ת מוֹאָ֔ב אֶלְיְהֽוֹעֵינַ֖י בֶּן־זְרַֽחְיָ֑ה	1	of the sons of Pahath-Moab, Eliehoenai son of Zerahiah	Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants,” but **son** most likely means a biological son. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Pahath-Moab, Eliehoenai the son of Zerahiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ EZR	8	9	w699	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י יוֹאָ֔ב עֹבַדְיָ
 EZR	8	9	u1te	translate-names	יוֹאָ֔ב עֹבַדְיָ֖ה…יְחִיאֵ֑ל	1	218 males	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	8	9	ude8	figs-explicit	וְ⁠עִמּ֕⁠וֹ מָאתַ֛יִם וּ⁠שְׁמֹנָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר הַ⁠זְּכָרִֽים	1	218 males	See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Alternate translation: “along with 218 men from his clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	8	10	x1dx	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י שְׁלוֹמִ֖ית בֶּן־יוֹסִפְיָ֑ה	1	160 males	Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants”, but **son** most likely means a biological son. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Shelomith, the son of Josiphiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EZR	8	10	unnl	translate-textvariants	וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י שְׁלוֹמִ֖ית בֶּן־יוֹסִפְיָ֑ה	1	160 males	As in [8:5](../08/05.md), it appears that the name of the clan was accidentally left out at one point in the copying process for this verse. Since this list has been providing the name of each clan leader, it would be unusual for it to omit the leader’s name here and state only the name of his father. Other ancient versions of the Old Testament in Greek say here, “from the descendants of Bani, Shelomith the son of Josiphiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could follow those versions and include the following footnote: “The name Bani appears in ancient Greek versions.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bani, Shelomith the son of Josiphiah” If you want to translate only what is in the Hebrew, you could follow the ULT or translate, “And from the descendants of Shelomith, the son of Josiphiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) <br>
+EZR	8	10	unnl	translate-textvariants	וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י שְׁלוֹמִ֖ית בֶּן־יוֹסִפְיָ֑ה	1	160 males	As in [8:5](../08/05.md), it appears that the name of the clan was accidentally left out at one point in the copying process for this verse. Since this list has been providing the name of each clan leader, it would be unusual for it to omit the leader’s name here and state only the name of his father. Other ancient versions of the Old Testament in Greek say here, “from the descendants of Bani, Shelomith the son of Josiphiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could follow those versions and include the following footnote: “The name Bani appears in ancient Greek versions.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bani, Shelomith the son of Josiphiah” If you want to translate only what is in the Hebrew, you could follow the ULT or translate, “And from the descendants of Shelomith, the son of Josiphiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])<br>
 EZR	8	10	ex7w	translate-names	שְׁלוֹמִ֖ית…יוֹסִפְיָ֑ה	1	160 males	These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	8	10	y254	figs-explicit	וְ⁠עִמּ֕⁠וֹ מֵאָ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁשִּׁ֖ים הַ⁠זְּכָרִֽים	1	160 males	See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Alternate translation: “along with 160 men from his clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	8	11	s7ng	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י בֵבַ֔י זְכַרְיָ֖ה בֶּן־בֵּבָ֑י	1	Bebai	Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants,” but **son** most likely means a biological son. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bebai, Zechariah the son of Bebai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -939,7 +939,7 @@ EZR	8	17	akq5	translate-names	אִדּ֣וֹ	1	Next I sent them	**Iddo** is the
 EZR	8	17	ggi9	translate-names	בְּ⁠כָסִפְיָ֖א	1	Kasiphia	**Kasiphia** is the name of a place. Its exact location can no longer be identified. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	8	17	nq66	figs-metaphor	וָ⁠אָשִׂימָ⁠ה֩ בְּ⁠פִי⁠הֶ֨ם דְּבָרִ֜ים לְ֠⁠דַבֵּר אֶל־אִדּ֨וֹ	1	I put in their mouths the words to speak to Iddo … to send to us servants for the house of our God	Putting words in someone’s mouth figuratively means telling them what to say. Alternate translation: “And I told them what to say to Iddo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	8	17	y2wd	figs-metaphor	אִדּ֨וֹ אָחִ֤י⁠ו הַנְּתִינִים֙ בְּ⁠כָסִפְיָ֣א הַ⁠מָּק֔וֹם	1	I put in their mouths the words to speak to Iddo … to send to us servants for the house of our God	Here, **brothers** is a figurative way of referring to people who belonged to groups that could serve in the temple, as Iddo did. (It is possible that some of his biological brothers are also included in this term.) In context, Iddo is a Levite leader, while the **brothers** are said to include **temple servants**, so the term indicates both groups. Alternate translation: “Iddo and his fellow Levites and the temple servants who were also living in Kasiphia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EZR	8	17	p5pg	figs-quotations	לְ⁠הָֽבִיא־לָ֥⁠נוּ מְשָׁרְתִ֖ים לְ⁠בֵ֥ית אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ	1	I put in their mouths the words to speak to Iddo … to send to us servants for the house of our God	This is the purpose for which Ezra sent the messengers to Iddo. You could indicate that in your translation, or, if it would be clearer in your language and helpful to your readers, you could present this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “so that he would send us more people who could serve in the temple of our God” or, as a direct quotation, “to say, “Please send us some people who can serve in the temple of our God”” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+EZR	8	17	p5pg	figs-quotations	לְ⁠הָֽבִיא־לָ֥⁠נוּ מְשָׁרְתִ֖ים לְ⁠בֵ֥ית אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ	1	I put in their mouths the words to speak to Iddo … to send to us servants for the house of our God	This is the purpose for which Ezra sent the messengers to Iddo. You could indicate that in your translation, or, if it would be clearer in your language and helpful to your readers, you could present this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “so that he would send us more people who could serve in the temple of our God” or, as a direct quotation, “to say, “Please send us some people who can serve in the temple of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EZR	8	17	f8xf	figs-exclusive	לָ֥⁠נוּ	1	I put in their mouths the words to speak to Iddo … to send to us servants for the house of our God	As Ezra tells his story, he uses **us** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EZR	8	18	kbq4	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יָּבִ֨יאּוּ	1	Sherebiah … Mahli	This word indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result … they brought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EZR	8	18	a7cr	figs-metaphor	כְּ⁠יַד־אֱלֹהֵ֨י⁠נוּ הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֤ה עָלֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙	1	So they sent to us by the good hand of our God a man	As in the expression **according to the good hand of his God upon him** in [7:6](../07/06.md), **hand** figuratively represents action, and the expression indicates that God showed Ezra favor and helped him on this occasion. Alternate translation: “because our God was helping us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -959,7 +959,7 @@ EZR	8	21	zh8n	translate-names	הַ⁠נָּהָ֣ר אַהֲוָ֔א	1	the river
 EZR	8	21	ms3x	figs-exclusive	לְ⁠הִתְעַנּ֖וֹת	1	the river Ahava	Here Ezra is using **ourselves** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EZR	8	21	baiq	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ	1	the river Ahava	Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EZR	8	21	r9mg	figs-exclusive	אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ	1	the river Ahava	In this case, Ezra is using **our** in the inclusive sense, that is, it includes the reader, since he is reporting his trip to fellow believers in God. Alternate translation: “The God to whom we all belong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-EZR	8	21	0qpc	figs-exclusive	לָ֥⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠טַפֵּ֖⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠כָל־רְכוּשֵֽׁ⁠נוּ׃	1	the river Ahava	As Ezra tells his story, he uses **us** and **our** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+EZR	8	21	pqpc	figs-exclusive	לָ֥⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠טַפֵּ֖⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠כָל־רְכוּשֵֽׁ⁠נוּ׃	1	the river Ahava	As Ezra tells his story, he uses **us** and **our** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EZR	8	21	sq2q	figs-metaphor	לְ⁠בַקֵּ֤שׁ מִמֶּ֨⁠נּוּ֙ דֶּ֣רֶךְ יְשָׁרָ֔ה לָ֥⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠טַפֵּ֖⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠כָל־רְכוּשֵֽׁ⁠נוּ	1	to seek a straight way from him for us and our little ones, and all our possessions	The word **seek** represents asking God to do something for them. A **straight way** figuratively represents safety during travel. Alternate translation: “and to ask God to protect us while we traveled and also protect our children and all of our belongings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	8	22	kq0z	grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּ֣י	1	The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good	Here the word **For** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the reasons for what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “I did this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EZR	8	22	cb97		בֹ֗שְׁתִּי לִ⁠שְׁא֤וֹל מִן־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ חַ֣יִל וּ⁠פָרָשִׁ֔ים לְ⁠עָזְרֵ֥⁠נוּ מֵ⁠אוֹיֵ֖ב בַּ⁠דָּ֑רֶךְ	1	The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good	**An enemy** means “any enemy,” and **on the way** means “during our journey.” Alternate translation: “I would have been embarrassed to ask the king for soldiers and horsemen to protect us from anyone who might try to harm or rob us during our journey”
@@ -969,7 +969,7 @@ EZR	8	22	p625	grammar-connect-logic-result	אָמַ֨רְנוּ לַ⁠מֶּ֜
 EZR	8	22	hlkg	figs-quotemarks	יַד־אֱלֹהֵ֤י⁠נוּ עַל־כָּל־מְבַקְשָׁי⁠ו֙ לְ⁠טוֹבָ֔ה וְ⁠עֻזּ֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אַפּ֔⁠וֹ עַ֖ל כָּל־עֹזְבָֽי⁠ו	1	The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good	This is a direct quotation. Ezra is quoting what he and his fellow travelers had told King Artaxerxes. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off these words within quotation marks or by following whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EZR	8	22	hpp7	figs-quotations	יַד־אֱלֹהֵ֤י⁠נוּ עַל־כָּל־מְבַקְשָׁי⁠ו֙ לְ⁠טוֹבָ֔ה וְ⁠עֻזּ֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אַפּ֔⁠וֹ עַ֖ל כָּל־עֹזְבָֽי⁠ו	1	The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good	This is a direct quotation. If it would be more natural in your language, you could make this an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 EZR	8	22	n4fd	figs-metaphor	יַד־אֱלֹהֵ֤י⁠נוּ…לְ⁠טוֹבָ֔ה	1	The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good	This expression has the same meaning as **the good hand of God** in [7:6](../07/06.md). Here, the word **hand** figuratively represents action, and the phrase **the hand of our God is for good** means the care, protection, and favor of God. Alternate translation: “The favor of our God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EZR	8	22	84rd	figs-exclusive	אֱלֹהֵ֤י⁠נוּ	1	The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good	In this case, Ezra is using **our** in the inclusive sense, that is, it includes the reader, since he is reporting his trip to fellow believers in God. Alternate translation: “the God to whom we all belong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+EZR	8	22	q4rd	figs-exclusive	אֱלֹהֵ֤י⁠נוּ	1	The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good	In this case, Ezra is using **our** in the inclusive sense, that is, it includes the reader, since he is reporting his trip to fellow believers in God. Alternate translation: “the God to whom we all belong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EZR	8	22	ddh2	figs-metaphor	כָּל־מְבַקְשָׁי⁠ו֙	1	The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good	To **seek him** is a metaphor for worshiping, serving, and obeying him. Alternate translation: “everyone who loves and obeys him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	8	22	fb5x	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠עֻזּ֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אַפּ֔⁠וֹ עַ֖ל	1	but his strength and his wrath are against all those who forsake him	God’s power and anger being on people is a metonym for him punishing them. Alternate translation: “but he punishes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EZR	8	22	ep6t	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠עֻזּ֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אַפּ֔⁠וֹ	1	but his strength and his wrath are against all those who forsake him	Here, the **nose** figuratively represents anger. Alternate translation: “his power and his wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -977,14 +977,14 @@ EZR	8	22	xnzz	figs-hendiadys	וְ⁠עֻזּ֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אַפּ֔⁠וֹ	1
 EZR	8	22	s41q	figs-metaphor	כָּל־עֹזְבָֽי⁠ו	1	but his strength and his wrath are against all those who forsake him	Forsaking or abandoning God is a metaphor for refusing to serve him. Alternate translation: “all who refuse to serve him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	8	23	f2jm	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠נָּצ֛וּמָ⁠ה	1	So we fasted and sought God about this matter	The word **So** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Because Ezra was embarrassed to ask the king for protection, he and his fellow travelers earnestly prayed and fasted for God’s protection. Alternate translation: “For this reason, we fasted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EZR	8	23	nfn4	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠נָּצ֛וּמָ⁠ה וַ⁠נְּבַקְשָׁ֥⁠ה מֵ⁠אֱלֹהֵ֖י⁠נוּ עַל־זֹ֑את וַ⁠יֵּעָתֵ֖ר לָֽ⁠נוּ	1	So we fasted and sought God about this matter	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an active form for the last phrase. Alternate translation: “For this reason, we fasted and prayed to God about this, and he answered our prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EZR	8	23	5tm6	figs-exclusive	וַ⁠נָּצ֛וּמָ⁠ה…לָֽ⁠נוּ	1	So we fasted and sought God about this matter	As Ezra tells his story, he uses **we** and **us** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+EZR	8	23	rtm6	figs-exclusive	וַ⁠נָּצ֛וּמָ⁠ה…לָֽ⁠נוּ	1	So we fasted and sought God about this matter	As Ezra tells his story, he uses **we** and **us** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EZR	8	23	ppnz	figs-exclusive	מֵ⁠אֱלֹהֵ֖י⁠נוּ	1	So we fasted and sought God about this matter	In this case, Ezra is using **our** in the inclusive sense, that is, it includes the reader, since he is reporting his trip to fellow believers in God. Alternate translation: “from the God to whom we all belong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EZR	8	23	g9a0	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יֵּעָתֵ֖ר לָֽ⁠נוּ	1	So we fasted and sought God about this matter	As is clear from the way this expression is used elsewhere in the Bible, it means that God answered a prayer. For example, Genesis 25:21 says, “Isaac entreated Yahweh for his wife because she could not have children, and Yahweh was entreated by him, and Rebekah his wife conceived.” However, since Ezra does not describe until [8:32](../08/32.md) how the group arrived safely in Jerusalem, the prayer had not yet been answered at this point in the story. So an alternative meaning in context would be that the group received assurance that God would answer their prayer. Alternate translation: “and he answered our prayer” or “and we felt assured that he would answer our prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	8	24	u78j	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וָ⁠אַבְדִּ֛ילָ⁠ה	1	Sherebiah, Hashabiah	The word **Then** indicates that the event the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 EZR	8	24	hgbr	translate-textvariants	וָ⁠אַבְדִּ֛ילָ⁠ה מִ⁠שָּׂרֵ֥י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֖ים שְׁנֵ֣ים עָשָׂ֑ר לְ⁠שֵׁרֵֽבְיָ֣ה חֲשַׁבְיָ֔ה וְ⁠עִמָּ⁠הֶ֥ם מֵ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עֲשָׂרָֽה	1	Sherebiah, Hashabiah	The Hebrew text is difficult here. One way to read it is: “Then I separated 12 from the leaders of the priests: Sherebiah, Hashabiah, and with them ten from their brothers.” But since [8:18](../08/18.md) and [19](../08/19.md) specifically identify Sherebiah and Hashabiah as Levites, they could not have been leaders of the priests. An ancient Greek version of the book of Ezra says “and” before Sherebiah, so that this is a list of 24 men in total. Another way to read the Hebrew is as in the ULT, which also results in a list of 24 men. Both of these translations agree with [8:30](../08/30.md), which says that “the priests and the Levites” received the silver and gold and objects that Ezra weighed out to them. It will likely be clearest for your readers if you translate the verse in one of the latter two ways. Alternate translation: “Then I selected 12 leaders of the priests, along with Sherebiah, Hashabiah, and ten of their fellow Levites.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 EZR	8	24	rvwg	figs-idiom	וָ⁠אַבְדִּ֛ילָ⁠ה	1	Sherebiah, Hashabiah	This expression means to set someone or something apart for a special purpose or assignment. Alternate translation: “Then I selected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	8	24	v6yb	translate-names	לְ⁠שֵׁרֵֽבְיָ֣ה חֲשַׁבְיָ֔ה	1	Sherebiah, Hashabiah	These are the names of two men. See how you translated them in [8:18](../08/18.md) and [8:19](../08/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-EZR	8	24	jx71	figs-metaphor	מֵ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֖ם	1	Sherebiah, Hashabiah	Here, **brothers** is a figurative way of saying “fellow Levites,” although it is possible that some of the biological brothers of Sherebiah and Hashabiah were included in this group. Alternate translation: “ of their fellow Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EZR	8	24	jx71	figs-metaphor	מֵ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֖ם	1	Sherebiah, Hashabiah	Here, **brothers** is a figurative way of saying “fellow Levites,” although it is possible that some of the biological brothers of Sherebiah and Hashabiah were included in this group. Alternate translation: “of their fellow Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	8	25	lyek	translate-bmoney	ו⁠אשקול⁠ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם אֶת־הַ⁠כֶּ֥סֶף וְ⁠אֶת־הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב וְ⁠אֶת־הַ⁠כֵּלִ֑ים	1	Sherebiah, Hashabiah	Ezra says he **weighed out** the money to the priests and Levites because ancient units of money such as the kikkar and the daric were actually units of the weight of precious metals. The value of the gold and silver objects would similarly have depended on their weight. Alternate translation: “I divided up the silver and gold and objects into 24 portions of equal value and gave one to each of the priests and Levites whom I had selected to transport them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 EZR	8	25	p4y8	figs-explicit	ו⁠אשקול⁠ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם אֶת־הַ⁠כֶּ֥סֶף וְ⁠אֶת־הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב וְ⁠אֶת־הַ⁠כֵּלִ֑ים	1	Sherebiah, Hashabiah	The implication is that Ezra divided up the money and the objects into 24 portions of roughly equal value and assigned one portion to each priest and Levite to transport. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I divided up the silver and gold and objects into 24 portions of equal value and gave one to each of the priests and Levites I had selected to transport them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	8	25	vuis	figs-metaphor	תְּרוּמַ֣ת בֵּית־אֱלֹהֵ֗י⁠נוּ	1	Sherebiah, Hashabiah	Alternate translation: “the gifts for the temple of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -999,7 +999,7 @@ EZR	8	27	q2jm	translate-bmoney	וּ⁠כְפֹרֵ֤י זָהָב֙ עֶשְׂר
 EZR	8	28	zlh5	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וָ⁠אֹמְרָ֣⁠ה	1	vessels of bronze	This phrase indicates that the event the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. Ezra first weighed out the silver and gold and objects to the Levites, then he spoke the following words to them. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this time sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 EZR	8	28	rbg4	figs-quotemarks	וָ⁠אֹמְרָ֣⁠ה אֲלֵ⁠הֶ֗ם	1	Then I said to them	**Them** refers to the selected priests and Levites. In the rest of this verse and in [8:29](../08/29.md), Ezra is quoting what he told them on this occasion. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off the words that follow with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EZR	8	28	afyr	figs-idiom	אַתֶּ֥ם קֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ לַ⁠יהוָ֔ה וְ⁠הַ⁠כֵּלִ֖ים קֹ֑דֶשׁ	1	Then I said to them	Here, **holy** means “set apart for a special purpose.” Alternate translation: “I have selected you for a special mission. People also donated these objects for a special purpose. They are only to be used in the temple.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EZR	8	28	w1c9	figs-metaphor	אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	Then I said to them	Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EZR	8	28	w1c9	figs-metaphor	אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם	1	Then I said to them	Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	8	29	im6g	figs-ellipsis	שִׁקְד֣וּ וְ⁠שִׁמְר֗וּ	1	until you weigh them out before the heads of the priests and the Levites, and the heads of the fathers’ houses	Here Ezra leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. He is describing what the priests and Levites must do with the objects, the silver, and the gold that were devoted to Yahweh. You could indicate that explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Take good care of those things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EZR	8	29	z0lx	figs-hendiadys	שִׁקְד֣וּ וְ⁠שִׁמְר֗וּ	1	until you weigh them out before the heads of the priests and the Levites, and the heads of the fathers’ houses	These two words work together to give one idea. Ezra uses them together to emphasize how carefully the priests and Levites need to guard the silver and gold and objects. Alternate translation: “Guard diligently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 EZR	8	29	mtxm	figs-explicit	עַֽד־תִּשְׁקְל֡וּ	1	until you weigh them out before the heads of the priests and the Levites, and the heads of the fathers’ houses	The implication is that when the priests and Levites arrived in Jerusalem, they would weigh out the silver, gold, and bronze to show the authorities there that they had not lost or taken any of it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “until you can weigh them out to prove that all of it is there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1034,14 +1034,14 @@ EZR	8	34	sqb5	figs-explicit	בְּ⁠מִסְפָּ֥ר בְּ⁠מִשְׁקָ
 EZR	8	34	nh2n	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֥ב כָּֽל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁקָ֖ל	1	Jeshua	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “The priests and Levites in the temple wrote down the weight of all of the silver and gold and of the objects” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	8	35	gxu7	figs-parallelism	הַ֠⁠בָּאִים מֵֽ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֨י בְנֵֽי־הַ⁠גּוֹלָ֜ה	1	those who had come back from the captivity, the sons of the exiles	These two phrases mean the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The Jews who had returned from exile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EZR	8	35	qo2t	figs-idiom	הַ֠⁠בָּאִים מֵֽ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֨י בְנֵֽי־הַ⁠גּוֹלָ֜ה	1	those who had come back from the captivity, the sons of the exiles	As indicated in [2:1](../02/01.md) and [8:35](../08/35.md), the phrase **the sons of the exile** refers specifically to the group of Jewish people who returned to the land of Judah from Babylon after King Nebuchadnezzar had conquered Jerusalem and had taken many Jews as captives to Babylon. Alternate translation: “The Jews who had returned from exile” or “The Jews who had returned to their homeland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EZR	8	35	fbh8	figs-123person	הַ֠⁠בָּאִים מֵֽ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֨י בְנֵֽי־הַ⁠גּוֹלָ֜ה	1	those who had come back from the captivity, the sons of the exiles	Here the story shifts from Ezra's first-person account to a third-person account. If that is confusing in your language, you can continue the story in first person. <br>Alternate translation: “We who had gone into exile in Babylonia but had now returned from captivity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-EZR	8	35	lgl7	figs-explicit	הִקְרִ֥יבוּ עֹל֣וֹת ׀ לֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל פָּרִ֨ים שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֤ר עַל־כָּל־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ אֵילִ֣ים ׀ תִּשְׁעִ֣ים וְ⁠שִׁשָּׁ֗ה כְּבָשִׂים֙ שִׁבְעִ֣ים וְ⁠שִׁבְעָ֔ה צְפִירֵ֥י חַטָּ֖את שְׁנֵ֣ים עָשָׂ֑ר הַ⁠כֹּ֖ל עוֹלָ֥ה לַ⁠יהוָֽה	1	twelve … ninety-six … seventy-seven … twelve	The book assumes that readers will recognize that there are two types of offerings here. The bulls, rams, and lambs are offerings of the first type. They were offered in order to express a desire to be in good standing with God by creating an aroma, the smell of roasting meat, that was considered to be pleasing to God. These were completely burned up. The goats are the second type of offering. As in [6:17](../06/17.md), the goats were a **sin offering**. These were offered as a request for forgiveness from God. As explained in Leviticus 4:22-26 and 6:24-30, only the fat of these goats was burned up. The meat of these goats was for the priests to eat. The phrase **The whole was a burnt up offering** is a summary that includes the two types of offerings, one that was completely burned up and the other that was partially burned up. Therefore the final sentence means, "All of this was properly subjected to fire on the altar as sacrifices to Yahweh." The book assumes that readers know this. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “offered as burnt offerings to the God of Israel 12 bulls for all Israel, 96 rams, and 77 lambs, and as a sin offering 12 male goats. All of these sacrifices were offered to Yahweh through fire on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br>
+EZR	8	35	fbh8	figs-123person	הַ֠⁠בָּאִים מֵֽ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֨י בְנֵֽי־הַ⁠גּוֹלָ֜ה	1	those who had come back from the captivity, the sons of the exiles	Here the story shifts from Ezra's first-person account to a third-person account. If that is confusing in your language, you can continue the story in first person.<br>Alternate translation: “We who had gone into exile in Babylonia but had now returned from captivity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+EZR	8	35	lgl7	figs-explicit	הִקְרִ֥יבוּ עֹל֣וֹת ׀ לֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל פָּרִ֨ים שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֤ר עַל־כָּל־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ אֵילִ֣ים ׀ תִּשְׁעִ֣ים וְ⁠שִׁשָּׁ֗ה כְּבָשִׂים֙ שִׁבְעִ֣ים וְ⁠שִׁבְעָ֔ה צְפִירֵ֥י חַטָּ֖את שְׁנֵ֣ים עָשָׂ֑ר הַ⁠כֹּ֖ל עוֹלָ֥ה לַ⁠יהוָֽה	1	twelve … ninety-six … seventy-seven … twelve	The book assumes that readers will recognize that there are two types of offerings here. The bulls, rams, and lambs are offerings of the first type. They were offered in order to express a desire to be in good standing with God by creating an aroma, the smell of roasting meat, that was considered to be pleasing to God. These were completely burned up. The goats are the second type of offering. As in [6:17](../06/17.md), the goats were a **sin offering**. These were offered as a request for forgiveness from God. As explained in Leviticus 4:22-26 and 6:24-30, only the fat of these goats was burned up. The meat of these goats was for the priests to eat. The phrase **The whole was a burnt up offering** is a summary that includes the two types of offerings, one that was completely burned up and the other that was partially burned up. Therefore the final sentence means, “All of this was properly subjected to fire on the altar as sacrifices to Yahweh.” The book assumes that readers know this. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “offered as burnt offerings to the God of Israel 12 bulls for all Israel, 96 rams, and 77 lambs, and as a sin offering 12 male goats. All of these sacrifices were offered to Yahweh through fire on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br>
 EZR	8	35	rdop	translate-symaction	הִקְרִ֥יבוּ עֹל֣וֹת ׀ לֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל פָּרִ֨ים שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֤ר עַל־כָּל־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ אֵילִ֣ים ׀ תִּשְׁעִ֣ים וְ⁠שִׁשָּׁ֗ה כְּבָשִׂים֙ שִׁבְעִ֣ים וְ⁠שִׁבְעָ֔ה צְפִירֵ֥י חַטָּ֖את שְׁנֵ֣ים עָשָׂ֑ר	1	twelve … ninety-six … seventy-seven … twelve	The numbers of animals offered are symbolic, as the book explains in the case of the bulls. There were 12 bulls **for all Israel** because there were twelve tribes of Israel. There were 12 goats for the same reason. The same symbolism seems to lie behind the 96 rams, since that number is eight times 12, although the significance of the number eight is no longer apparent. The number 77 is an intensive form of the number seven, which symbolizes completeness. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “offered 12 bulls, one for each of the tribes of Israel, 96 rams, eight for each of the tribes of Israel, and 77 lambs, expressing completeness, as burnt offerings to the God of Israel, and 12 male goats as a sin offering, one for each of the tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 EZR	8	36	r5gu	figs-explicit	וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנ֣וּ ׀ אֶת־דָּתֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ לַ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ וּ⁠פַחֲו֖וֹת עֵ֣בֶר הַ⁠נָּהָ֑ר	1	the governors in the Province Beyond the River	Here, **the laws of the king** seem to mean the decrees that Artaxerxes issued in the letter he gave to Ezra, and specifically the provisions that allowed Ezra to ask for support for the temple, exempted temple personnel from taxation, and allowed Ezra to appoint judges. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Ezra and the Jewish leaders informed the royal officials and governors in Beyond-the-River province of the decrees that Artaxerxes had issued in his letter to Ezra” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EZR	8	36	6zj3	figs-123person	וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנ֣וּ	1	the governors in the Province Beyond the River	Here the story uses a third-person account rather than Ezra's first-person account. If that is confusing in your language, you can continue the story in first person. <br>Alternate translation: “We also gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-EZR	8	36	7ep8	translate-unknown	לַ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ וּ⁠פַחֲו֖וֹת	1	the governors in the Province Beyond the River	The word **satraps** refers to rulers appointed by the king to rule over his provinces, such as the province of Beyond-the-River in which Judah was located. The **governors** were lower officials who worked in the province under the direction of the satrap. Use the words that communicate this best in your language. Alternate translation: “to those who rule over the king's provinces and to the authorities in the province of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EZR	8	36	szj3	figs-123person	וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנ֣וּ	1	the governors in the Province Beyond the River	Here the story uses a third-person account rather than Ezra's first-person account. If that is confusing in your language, you can continue the story in first person.<br>Alternate translation: “We also gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+EZR	8	36	tep8	translate-unknown	לַ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ וּ⁠פַחֲו֖וֹת	1	the governors in the Province Beyond the River	The word **satraps** refers to rulers appointed by the king to rule over his provinces, such as the province of Beyond-the-River in which Judah was located. The **governors** were lower officials who worked in the province under the direction of the satrap. Use the words that communicate this best in your language. Alternate translation: “to those who rule over the king's provinces and to the authorities in the province of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EZR	8	36	d38g	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠נִשְּׂא֥וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם וְ⁠אֶת־בֵּֽית־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים	1	the Province Beyond the River	Here, **lifted** is a metaphor that means supported and sustained. Alternate translation: “The group that had returned with Ezra supported the people of Judah and Jerusalem and the temple of God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-EZR	9	intro	k1yz			0		# Ezra 09 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Intermarriage<br><br>When Ezra found out that many Jews who had returned from exile had married Gentile wives, he prayed to God and confessed this sin of his people. He acknowledged that God had been good to them much more than they deserved by letting these few people return from captivity and then they sinned by marrying Gentile wives. The Jewish people had done this before and God had punished them for it. God forbade this type of marriage because it caused the people to worship other gods. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])<br><br>### Exclusive forms<br><br>Ezra uses many first person plural pronouns as he prays to God. Since Ezra is speaking to God, these forms of "we," "us," and "our" would all be the exclusive forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+EZR	9	intro	k1yz			0		# Ezra 9 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Intermarriage<br><br>When Ezra found out that many Jews who had returned from exile had married Gentile wives, he prayed to God and confessed this sin of his people. He acknowledged that God had been good to them much more than they deserved by letting these few people return from captivity and then they sinned by marrying Gentile wives. The Jewish people had done this before and God had punished them for it. God forbade this type of marriage because it caused the people to worship other gods. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])<br><br>### Exclusive forms<br><br>Ezra uses many first person plural pronouns as he prays to God. Since Ezra is speaking to God, these forms of “we,” “us,” and “our” would all be the exclusive forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 EZR	9	1	ella	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וּ⁠כְ⁠כַלּ֣וֹת אֵ֗לֶּה	1	have not separated themselves	This phrase indicates that the events the story will now relate came right after the events it has just described. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 EZR	9	1	nhkw	writing-newevent	וּ⁠כְ⁠כַלּ֣וֹת	1	have not separated themselves	The word **now** introduces a new event in the story. If your language has a word or expression for introducing a new event, use that here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 EZR	9	1	on7w	figs-explicit	הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙	1	have not separated themselves	These appear to be the same **leaders** as in [8:29](../08/29.md), that is, clan leaders. But this is not a reference to all of them, since the ones who come to Ezra say that some of their fellow leaders have married foreign women. Alternate translation: “some of the clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1062,7 +1062,7 @@ EZR	9	2	dwaf	figs-metaphor	בַּ⁠מַּ֥עַל הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה	1	have not
 EZR	9	2	vdhr	figs-doublet	הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֣ים וְ⁠הַ⁠סְּגָנִ֗ים	1	have not separated themselves	These terms mean similar things, but it seems that **leaders** may refer to the heads of the clans and that **rulers** may refer to official leaders of government. If your language uses one word for both of those, you can combine them and use that word here. Alternate translation: “our chiefs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 EZR	9	2	yn4s	figs-quotemarks	בַּ⁠מַּ֥עַל הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה	1	have not separated themselves	This is the end of Ezra’s quotation of what the clan leaders told him. If you decided in [9:1](../09/01.md) to mark their words as a direct quotation, you should indicate that here with a closing primary quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EZR	9	3	ck87	translate-symaction	קָרַ֥עְתִּי אֶת־בִּגְדִ֖⁠י וּ⁠מְעִילִ֑⁠י וָ⁠אֶמְרְטָ֞⁠ה מִ⁠שְּׂעַ֤ר רֹאשִׁ⁠י֙ וּ⁠זְקָנִ֔⁠י וָ⁠אֵשְׁבָ֖⁠ה מְשׁוֹמֵֽם	1	I tore my clothing and my robe and pulled out hair from my head and beard	By performing these actions, Ezra was demonstrating symbolically how serious a wrong the Israelites had committed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to show how wrong it was for the Israelites to have married foreign women, I tore my tunic and my cloak, I pulled out some hair from my head and my beard, and I sat down stunned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-EZR	9	3	qhy7		מְשׁוֹמֵֽם	1	When I heard this matter	The sense of this word is that Ezra was so overwhelmed with shock and horror that he did not move or speak. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this. Alternate translation: “stunned” or "devastated"
+EZR	9	3	qhy7		מְשׁוֹמֵֽם	1	When I heard this matter	The sense of this word is that Ezra was so overwhelmed with shock and horror that he did not move or speak. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this. Alternate translation: “stunned” or “devastated”
 EZR	9	4	k68j	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠אֵלַ֣⁠י יֵאָסְפ֗וּ כֹּ֤ל חָרֵד֙ בְּ⁠דִבְרֵ֣י אֱלֹהֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל עַ֖ל מַ֣עַל הַ⁠גּוֹלָ֑ה	1	the evening sacrifice	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Everyone came and joined me who was just as distressed as I was about the way the Jews who had returned from exile had disobeyed the commandments of the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	9	4	xsvq	figs-metaphor	כֹּ֤ל חָרֵד֙	1	the evening sacrifice	Often in the Old Testament, **trembled** is a metaphor meaning to regard someone or something with respect and reverential fear. That is likely included in the meaning here, but in this context, the expression also seems to indicate an actual physical response to the situation, just as Ezra did not move or speak. Alternate translation: “everyone who was distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	9	4	adr0	figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠דִבְרֵ֣י אֱלֹהֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל	1	the evening sacrifice	This phrase does not refer to something that God said on this occasion. Rather, it refers figuratively to the commandment that God had given to the Israelites earlier not to intermarry with foreign groups, which Ezra cites in his prayer in [9:10](../09/10.md) and [9:11](../09/11.md). Alternate translation: “at the commandments of the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1073,8 +1073,8 @@ EZR	9	5	v2nb	figs-idiom	קַ֚מְתִּי מִ⁠תַּֽעֲנִיתִ֔⁠י
 EZR	9	5	zygv	translate-symaction	וּ⁠בְ⁠קָרְעִ֥⁠י בִגְדִ֖⁠י וּ⁠מְעִילִ֑⁠י	1	my fasting	As the note to [9:3](../09/03.md) explains, Ezra had torn his clothes to show how wrong it was for the Israelites to have married foreign women. By not changing out of his torn clothes, Ezra was continuing to show that symbolically. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but I kept wearing my torn clothes to show how wrong it was for the Israelites to have married foreign women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 EZR	9	5	qye1	translate-symaction	וָֽ⁠אֶכְרְעָ⁠ה֙ עַל־בִּרְכַּ֔⁠י וָ⁠אֶפְרְשָׂ֥⁠ה כַפַּ֖⁠י אֶל־יְהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהָֽ⁠י	1	knelt down on my knees, and spread out my hands	These two physical gestures showed publicly that Ezra was going to pray. Alternate translation: “I knelt down and spread out my hands in a gesture of prayer to Yahweh my God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 EZR	9	6	y5xu	figs-quotemarks	וָ⁠אֹמְרָ֗⁠ה	1	our iniquities have risen higher than our head, and our guilt has grown up to the heavens	After this phrase Ezra begins to quote what he said out loud in prayer on this occasion. The quotation continues through [9:15](../09/15.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
-EZR	9	6	n5z1	figs-possession	אֱלֹהַ⁠י֙…אֱלֹהַ֛⁠י	1	our iniquities have risen higher than our head, and our guilt has grown up to the heavens	Here, **My God** means that Ezra belongs to God, not that God belongs to Ezra. <br>If that is not clear in your language, then use a different phrase. Alternate translation: “O God, to whom I belong” or “God, whom I worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-EZR	9	6	yz8d	figs-doublet	בֹּ֣שְׁתִּי וְ⁠נִכְלַ֔מְתִּי	1	our iniquities have risen higher than our head, and our guilt has grown up to the heavens	**Ashamed** and **humiliated** mean very similar things. Ezra uses them together to emphasize how disgraced he feels by what the Israelites have done. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these terms into a single expression. Alternate translation: “I am deeply disgraced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+EZR	9	6	n5z1	figs-possession	אֱלֹהַ⁠י֙…אֱלֹהַ֛⁠י	1	our iniquities have risen higher than our head, and our guilt has grown up to the heavens	Here, **My God** means that Ezra belongs to God, not that God belongs to Ezra.<br>If that is not clear in your language, then use a different phrase. Alternate translation: “O God, to whom I belong” or “God, whom I worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+EZR	9	6	yz8d	figs-doublet	בֹּ֣שְׁתִּי וְ⁠נִכְלַ֔מְתִּי	1	I am ashamed and humiliated	**Ashamed** and **humiliated** mean very similar things. Ezra uses them together to emphasize how disgraced he feels by what the Israelites have done. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these terms into a single expression. Alternate translation: “I am deeply disgraced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 EZR	9	6	xiue	figs-metaphor	לְ⁠הָרִ֧ים…פָּנַ֖⁠י אֵלֶ֑י⁠ךָ	1	our iniquities have risen higher than our head, and our guilt has grown up to the heavens	This means “to look at you directly” or “to look at you face to face,” and since Ezra could not do that literally with God, it is a figurative way of saying “*to address you.” Alternate translation: “even to speak to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	9	6	aca6	figs-parallelism	כִּ֣י עֲוֺנֹתֵ֤י⁠נוּ רָבוּ֙ לְ⁠מַ֣עְלָ⁠ה רֹּ֔אשׁ וְ⁠אַשְׁמָתֵ֥⁠נוּ גָדְלָ֖ה עַ֥ד לַ⁠שָּׁמָֽיִם	1	our iniquities have risen higher than our head, and our guilt has grown up to the heavens	These two phrases mean similar things. Ezra uses the repetition to emphasize how guilty the people of Israel are. If repeating the same thing twice would be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one and show the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We have committed such great sins that our guilt because of them is completely overwhelming us” However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The first phrase speaks of the effects of these sins on the Israelites, while the second phrase speaks of their effects on their standing with God. Alternate translation: “We have committed such great sins that they are overwhelming us, and we know that they are making us guilty before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 EZR	9	6	axnk	grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּ֣י עֲוֺנֹתֵ֤י⁠נוּ רָבוּ֙ לְ⁠מַ֣עְלָ⁠ה רֹּ֔אשׁ וְ⁠אַשְׁמָתֵ֥⁠נוּ גָדְלָ֖ה עַ֥ד לַ⁠שָּׁמָֽיִם	1	our iniquities have risen higher than our head, and our guilt has grown up to the heavens	If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this sentence first in the prayer (after **My God**), since it gives the reason for the result of Ezra feeling ashamed. You could show the connection by using a word like “so” after this phrase. Alternate translation: “we have committed such great sins that we are completely guilty, and we know that we are very guilty before you. And so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -1087,7 +1087,7 @@ EZR	9	7	sv5f	figs-idiom	מִ⁠ימֵ֣י אֲבֹתֵ֗י⁠נוּ	1	the days o
 EZR	9	7	aqdp	figs-metaphor	אֲבֹתֵ֗י⁠נוּ	1	the days of our fathers	**Fathers** here, figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	9	7	jw4h	figs-idiom	עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	the days of our fathers	In this context, **day** does not refer to one specific day, but rather, to a more general time. Alternate translation: “until this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	9	7	ur0z	figs-metonymy	אֲנַ֨חְנוּ֙ בְּ⁠אַשְׁמָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֔ה	1	the days of our fathers	Here, Ezra speaks figuratively of the disobedience of the Israelites by reference to something associated with it, the guilt that it has caused. Alternate translation: “we have consistently disobeyed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EZR	9	7	rgen	figs-metonymy	אֲנַ֨חְנוּ֙	1	the days of our fathers	By **we** here, Ezra is referring to all of the Jewish people. See the UST. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+EZR	9	7	rgen	figs-metonymy	אֲנַ֨חְנוּ֙	1	the days of our fathers	By **we** here, Ezra is referring to all of the Jewish people. See the UST.<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EZR	9	7	wet1	figs-abstractnouns	בְּ⁠אַשְׁמָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֔ה	1	very guilty … our iniquities	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **guilt** with a verb such as “disobey.” Alternate translation: “consistently disobeyed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EZR	9	7	h1bs	figs-activepassive	נִתַּ֡נּוּ אֲנַחְנוּ֩ מְלָכֵ֨י⁠נוּ כֹהֲנֵ֜י⁠נוּ בְּ⁠יַ֣ד ׀ מַלְכֵ֣י הָ⁠אֲרָצ֗וֹת	1	we … have been delivered into the hand of kings	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “you put us, our kings, and our priests into the hands of foreign rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	9	7	dr9f	figs-metaphor	נִתַּ֡נּוּ אֲנַחְנוּ֩ מְלָכֵ֨י⁠נוּ כֹהֲנֵ֜י⁠נוּ בְּ⁠יַ֣ד ׀ מַלְכֵ֣י הָ⁠אֲרָצ֗וֹת	1	we … have been delivered into the hand of kings	Here, **hand** figuratively represents power and control. Alternate translation: “you allowed foreign rulers to conquer us, our kings, and our priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1095,11 +1095,11 @@ EZR	9	7	v9sd	figs-idiom	מַלְכֵ֣י הָ⁠אֲרָצ֗וֹת	1	into the ha
 EZR	9	7	f2hv	figs-idiom	בַּ⁠חֶ֜רֶב בַּ⁠שְּׁבִ֧י וּ⁠בַ⁠בִּזָּ֛ה וּ⁠בְ⁠בֹ֥שֶׁת פָּנִ֖ים	1	to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces	Other than **by sword**, these are not the means by which the foreign rulers conquered the Israelites. Rather, they are primarily things that happened to the Israelites after they were conquered. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “They killed some of us, they took others of us away from our homeland, they stole the things that belonged to us, and all of this has made us greatly ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	9	7	kz7f	figs-metonymy	בַּ⁠חֶ֜רֶב	1	to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces	The sword figuratively represents killing, by reference to one kind of weapon that can kill a person. Alternate translation: “who killed some of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 EZR	9	7	lc37	figs-abstractnouns	בַּ⁠שְּׁבִ֧י	1	to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **captivity** with a verb such as “take away.” Alternate translation: “who took others away from our homeland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-EZR	9	7	5iq9	figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠בַ⁠בִּזָּ֛ה	1	to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **plunder** with a verb such as “steal.” Alternate translation: “who stole the things that belonged to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+EZR	9	7	uiq9	figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠בַ⁠בִּזָּ֛ה	1	to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **plunder** with a verb such as “steal.” Alternate translation: “who stole the things that belonged to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EZR	9	7	x0gf	figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠בְ⁠בֹ֥שֶׁת פָּנִ֖ים	1	to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **shame** with a word such as “ashamed.” Alternate translation: “and all of this has made us greatly ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EZR	9	7	uvig	figs-synecdoche	וּ⁠בְ⁠בֹ֥שֶׁת פָּנִ֖ים	1	to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces	Here, Ezra uses the **face** to describe the whole person figuratively, by reference to one part of a person, their face, which would show their shame by its expression. Alternate translation: “and made us greatly ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 EZR	9	7	nj7e	figs-idiom	כְּ⁠הַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces	In this context, **day** does not refer to one specific day, but rather to a more general time that includes the day that Ezra is praying to God. Alternate translation: “and that is still our situation now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EZR	9	8	5lor	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וְ⁠עַתָּ֡ה	1	grace has been shown from Yahweh our God	The phrase **But now** indicates that the sentence that it introduces draws a contrast between what the Israelites had been experiencing in the past and what God was now doing. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+EZR	9	8	vlor	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וְ⁠עַתָּ֡ה	1	grace has been shown from Yahweh our God	The phrase **But now** indicates that the sentence that it introduces draws a contrast between what the Israelites had been experiencing in the past and what God was now doing. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EZR	9	8	q4h6	figs-idiom	כִּ⁠מְעַט־רֶגַע֩	1	grace has been shown from Yahweh our God	Alternate translation: “for just a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	9	8	jqq9	figs-abstractnouns	הָיְתָ֨ה תְחִנָּ֜ה מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת ׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֵ֗י⁠נוּ	1	grace has been shown from Yahweh our God	The abstract noun **favor** refers to one person helping another person even if that person does not deserve it. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a phrase such as “be merciful.” Alternate translation: “Yahweh our God has been merciful to us” or “Yahweh our God has been gracious to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EZR	9	8	ym5g	figs-personification	הָיְתָ֨ה תְחִנָּ֜ה מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת ׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֵ֗י⁠נוּ	1	grace has been shown from Yahweh our God	Ezra speaks here of **favor** or mercy as if it could travel from Yahweh to the Jews. Alternate translation: “Yahweh our God has been merciful to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -1112,9 +1112,9 @@ EZR	9	8	lst9	figs-metonymy	בִּ⁠מְק֣וֹם קָדְשׁ֑⁠וֹ	1	grace
 EZR	9	8	h7p2	grammar-connect-logic-result	לְ⁠הַשְׁאִ֥יר לָ֨⁠נוּ֙ פְּלֵיטָ֔ה	1	grace has been shown from Yahweh our God	This phrase starts with **to**, which indicates here that the phrase that follows is a result of the phrase that came before. In fact, there are four results in this verse of receiving favor from God. Each result begins with the word **to**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate that these are results of receiving favor from God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EZR	9	8	e1ad	figs-123person	לְ⁠הָאִ֤יר…אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1	grace has been shown from Yahweh our God	Here again Ezra speaks of God in the third person. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words in the second person. Alternate translation: “for you, our God, to bring light to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EZR	9	8	gg6p	figs-parallelism	לְ⁠הָאִ֤יר עֵינֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙ אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠תִתֵּ֛⁠נוּ מִֽחְיָ֥ה מְעַ֖ט בְּ⁠עַבְדֻתֵֽ⁠נוּ	1	grace has been shown from Yahweh our God	These two phrases mean similar things. Ezra uses the repetition to emphasize how merciful God has been to the community of returned exiles. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “and for our God to enable our community to thrive a little even under foreign domination” However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The second phrase says more specifically how God has accomplished what the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “for our God to give us new vitality by giving us greater freedom even though we are under foreign domination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-EZR	9	8	fzoq	figs-metaphor	לְ⁠הָאִ֤יר עֵינֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙ אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1	grace has been shown from Yahweh our God	To **brighten** the **eyes** of a person means figuratively to give them new life and vitality in the sense of restoring someone's happiness or well-being. Alternate translation: “for our God to give us new vitality” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EZR	9	8	fzoq	figs-metaphor	לְ⁠הָאִ֤יר עֵינֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙ אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1	grace has been shown from Yahweh our God	To **brighten** the **eyes** of a person means figuratively to give them new life and vitality in the sense of restoring someone's happiness or well-being. Alternate translation: “for our God to give us new vitality” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	9	8	f4s0	figs-explicit	וּ⁠לְ⁠תִתֵּ֛⁠נוּ מִֽחְיָ֥ה מְעַ֖ט בְּ⁠עַבְדֻתֵֽ⁠נוּ	1	grace has been shown from Yahweh our God	Since Ezra says that God has made the community figuratively more alive **in our slavery**, he seems to be referring implicitly to the greater measure of freedom that King Artaxerxes has allowed them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by giving us greater freedom even though we are under foreign domination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EZR	9	9	10m3	figs-hyperbole	כִּֽי־עֲבָדִ֣ים אֲנַ֔חְנוּ	1	but he extended covenant faithfulness to us	Ezra describes the Jewish people as **slaves**, which is an exaggeration that he uses to express humility before God. It is true that their ancestors were taken as captives to Babylon where they were forced to serve the king, and that even now they must do as the king commands, but those who have returned to Judah are allowed to manage their own daily affairs. Alternate translation: “The Babylonians made our people to be slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+EZR	9	9	w0m3	figs-hyperbole	כִּֽי־עֲבָדִ֣ים אֲנַ֔חְנוּ	1	but he extended covenant faithfulness to us	Ezra describes the Jewish people as **slaves**, which is an exaggeration that he uses to express humility before God. It is true that their ancestors were taken as captives to Babylon where they were forced to serve the king, and that even now they must do as the king commands, but those who have returned to Judah are allowed to manage their own daily affairs. Alternate translation: “The Babylonians made our people to be slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 EZR	9	9	n7de	figs-123person	לֹ֥א עֲזָבָ֖⁠נוּ אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ	1	but he extended covenant faithfulness to us	Ezra continues to speak of God in the third person. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words in the second person. Alternate translation: “you, our God, have not forsaken us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EZR	9	9	gk7w	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וַֽ⁠יַּט	1	but he extended covenant faithfulness to us	This word **But** indicates that the sentence it introduces draws a contrast between what the Israelites might have expected God to do, since they were being punished for their disobedience, and what God actually did. You could begin the sentence with a phrase such as “on the contrary” or other method in your language to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 EZR	9	9	h0hr	figs-metaphor	וַֽ⁠יַּט־עָלֵ֣י⁠נוּ חֶ֡סֶד	1	but he extended covenant faithfulness to us	As in [7:28](../07/28.md), Ezra uses a spatial metaphor to depict help figuratively stretching out to him from Yahweh. Alternate translation: “On the contrary, he has helped us, as he promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1188,7 +1188,7 @@ EZR	10	3	zmyn	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠הַ⁠נּוֹלָ֤ד מֵ⁠הֶם֙
 EZR	10	3	iljp	figs-123person	בַּ⁠עֲצַ֣ת אֲדֹנָ֔⁠י	1	We have been unfaithful to our God	Shekaniah addresses Ezra in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be clearer in your language, you can translate this with the second person. Alternate translation: “doing it in the way that you, my lord, advise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 EZR	10	3	zzvz	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠הַ⁠חֲרֵדִ֖ים בְּ⁠מִצְוַ֣ת אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ	1	We have been unfaithful to our God	As in [9:4](../09/04.md), **tremble** here is a metaphor meaning to regard someone or something with respect and reverential fear. Alternate translation: “and in the way that seems right to everyone who respects the commandment of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	10	3	hla5	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠כַ⁠תּוֹרָ֖ה יֵעָשֶֽׂה	1	We have been unfaithful to our God	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “And let us make sure that we are following what the law commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EZR	10	3	p5it	figs-infostructure	וְ⁠כַ⁠תּוֹרָ֖ה יֵעָשֶֽׂה	1	We have been unfaithful to our God	If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this more general statement before the specific one about cutting a covenant, as in the UST. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+EZR	10	3	p5it	figs-infostructure	וְ⁠כַ⁠תּוֹרָ֖ה יֵעָשֶֽׂה	1	We have been unfaithful to our God	If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this more general statement before the specific one about cutting a covenant, as in the UST.<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 EZR	10	4	tx9m	figs-idiom	ק֛וּם	1	we are with you	Here, as in several other places in the book, **arise** means to take action to get an enterprise under way. It could also mean to physically arise, since Ezra was lying prostrate on the ground. Alternate translation: “Get up and do something about this situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	10	4	ao5k	figs-idiom	כִּֽי־עָלֶ֥י⁠ךָ הַ⁠דָּבָ֖ר	1	we are with you	This is a Hebrew idiom. Alternate translation: “because this is your responsibility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	10	4	d8d8	figs-idiom	כִּֽי־עָלֶ֥י⁠ךָ הַ⁠דָּבָ֖ר	1	we are with you	The implication is that this was Ezra’s responsibility because King Artaxerxes had given him the mandate to teach the Jews to follow the commandments of Yahweh and he also gave him the authority to ensure that they did follow those commandments. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because this is your responsibility, since the king told you to teach us Yahweh’s commandments and to make sure that we follow them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1196,9 +1196,9 @@ EZR	10	4	m4vg		וַ⁠אֲנַ֣חְנוּ עִמָּ֑⁠ךְ	1	we are with you
 EZR	10	4	hrga	figs-ellipsis	חֲזַ֖ק וַ⁠עֲשֵֽׂה	1	we are with you	Here, Shekaniah leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “Be strong and take action to address this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 EZR	10	4	bhrm	figs-quotemarks	חֲזַ֖ק וַ⁠עֲשֵֽׂה	1	we are with you	After this phrase, the book ends its quotation of what Shekaniah said to Ezra on this occasion. If you decided in [10:2](../10/02.md) to mark his words as a quotation, you should indicate their ending here with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 EZR	10	5	v0zf	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יָּ֣קָם	1	we are with you	Here the word **And** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentences described. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-EZR	10	5	p6uh	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יָּ֣קָם עֶזְרָ֡א	1	we are with you	Here also, **arose** means “took action to get an enterprise under way.” It could also mean to physically arise, since Ezra had been lying prostrate on the ground. <br>Alternate translation: “So Ezra got up, took initiative,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EZR	10	5	p6uh	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יָּ֣קָם עֶזְרָ֡א	1	we are with you	Here also, **arose** means “took action to get an enterprise under way.” It could also mean to physically arise, since Ezra had been lying prostrate on the ground.<br>Alternate translation: “So Ezra got up, took initiative,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	10	5	zxso	figs-metonymy	וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל	1	we are with you	Here the book refers to the Israelites by the name of their nation. Alternate translation: “all of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-EZR	10	5	9ok9	figs-hyperbole	וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל	1	we are with you	Here, **all Israel** is an exaggeration that is meant to express the idea that Ezra made every Israelite who was there swear an oath. If this is not clear in your language, you can state it without the exaggeration. Alternate translation: “and every Israelite who was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+EZR	10	5	xok9	figs-hyperbole	וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל	1	we are with you	Here, **all Israel** is an exaggeration that is meant to express the idea that Ezra made every Israelite who was there swear an oath. If this is not clear in your language, you can state it without the exaggeration. Alternate translation: “and every Israelite who was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 EZR	10	5	medp	figs-explicit	לַ⁠עֲשׂ֛וֹת כַּ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה	1	we are with you	The implication in context is that **this word** refers to Shekaniah’s recommendation that the Jews send away all the foreign wives and their children. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to do what Shekaniah had recommended and make the Israelites send away all the foreign wives and their children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EZR	10	6	k8jp	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵי֙ בֵּ֣ית הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֔ים	1	Jehohanan … Eliashib	As in [10:1](../10/01.md), **face** here figuratively means the front of a place. Alternate translation: “from in front of the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	10	6	j78q	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֵּ֕לֶךְ אֶל־לִשְׁכַּ֖ת יְהוֹחָנָ֣ן בֶּן־אֶלְיָשִׁ֑יב	1	Jehohanan … Eliashib	As in [8:29](../08/29.md), **chamber** means a room, and in context here it seems to refer similarly to one of the rooms in the temple. Eliashib was the high priest, and so it is probable that one of his family members would have had a room there. The book does not say why Ezra went to one of the rooms in the temple, but the implication is that he did so in order to meet further with the community leaders and make plans for the assembly that the following verses describe. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and he went to one of the rooms in the temple, the one that belonged to Jehohanan the grandson of Eliashib, to meet further with the leaders to make plans to call an assembly of all the returned exiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1249,7 +1249,7 @@ EZR	10	13	poap	grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֗ה
 EZR	10	13	wqu4	figs-idiom	לֹֽא־לְ⁠י֤וֹם אֶחָד֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א לִ⁠שְׁנַ֔יִם	1	this is not the work of one or two days	The phrase **neither for one day nor for two** is a figurative way of saying “not a matter of a short time.” Alternate translation: “something that will take a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	10	14	fcw7	figs-idiom	יַֽעֲמְדוּ־נָ֣א שָׂ֠רֵי⁠נוּ לְֽ⁠כָל־הַ⁠קָּהָ֞ל	1	at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities	Here, **stand for** is an idiom that means “represent.” (In [10:16](../10/16.md) it explains specifically how the community arranged for its leaders to be its representatives.) Alternate translation: “Let our leaders represent all of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	10	14	wybo	figs-idiom	הַ⁠הֹשִׁ֞יב נָשִׁ֤ים נָכְרִיּוֹת֙	1	at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities	See how you translated this expression in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “those who have married foreign women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EZR	10	14	8ewp	figs-activepassive	לְ⁠עִתִּ֣ים מְזֻמָּנִ֔ים	1	at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “at times that you set for each one” or “when you have arranged for them to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+EZR	10	14	yewp	figs-activepassive	לְ⁠עִתִּ֣ים מְזֻמָּנִ֔ים	1	at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “at times that you set for each one” or “when you have arranged for them to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EZR	10	14	wvv6	figs-idiom	וְ⁠עִמָּ⁠הֶ֛ם זִקְנֵי־עִ֥יר וָ⁠עִ֖יר וְ⁠שֹׁפְטֶ֑י⁠הָ	1	at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities	The phrase **city by city** is an idiom that means “each city.” Alternate translation: “with the elders and magistrates of each city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])<br>
 EZR	10	14	n0xr	figs-idiom	חֲר֤וֹן אַף־אֱלֹהֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙	1	at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities	The idiom **burning of the nose** refers to being angry. Alternate translation: “our God's anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	10	14	qdri	figs-metaphor	עַ֠ד לְ⁠הָשִׁ֞יב חֲר֤וֹן אַף־אֱלֹהֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙ מִמֶּ֔⁠נּוּ עַ֖ד לַ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities	When someone’s anger is **turned back**, that means figuratively that the person is no longer angry. Alternate translation: “until our God is no longer angry with us for disobeying in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1273,11 +1273,11 @@ EZR	10	17	i02i	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יְכַלּ֣וּ בַ⁠כֹּ֔ל אֲנָש
 EZR	10	17	gtyy	figs-idiom	הַ⁠הֹשִׁ֖יבוּ נָשִׁ֣ים נָכְרִיּ֑וֹת	1	first day of the first month	See how you translated this expression in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “who had married foreign women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	10	17	kgk5	translate-hebrewmonths	עַ֛ד י֥וֹם אֶחָ֖ד לַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשֽׁוֹן	1	first day of the first month	You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to use the numbers of the Hebrew day and month. Alternate translation: “by the first day of the first month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 EZR	10	17	u24d	translate-ordinal	עַ֛ד י֥וֹם אֶחָ֖ד לַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשֽׁוֹן	1	first day of the first month	The Hebrew uses a cardinal number here, **one**, but there is not a significant difference in meaning between that and the way the Hebrew uses an ordinal number, “first,” in similar contexts elsewhere. If your language customarily uses ordinals for the numbers of days, you can do that here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the tenth month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-EZR	10	17	0ib9	figs-infostructure	עַ֛ד י֥וֹם אֶחָ֖ד לַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשֽׁוֹן	1	first day of the first month	If it is more natural in your language, you can put this time phrase first in the verse, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+EZR	10	17	zib9	figs-infostructure	עַ֛ד י֥וֹם אֶחָ֖ד לַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשֽׁוֹן	1	first day of the first month	If it is more natural in your language, you can put this time phrase first in the verse, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 EZR	10	18	rqg8	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵא֙ מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י	1	Jeshua	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. “The clan leaders identified some men from among” Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EZR	10	18	vpyw	figs-idiom	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֔ים	1	Jeshua	Here, **sons of** is a figurative expression that means “descendants of.” These men are all descendants of men who had been priests in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “among the descendants of the priests” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+EZR	10	18	vpyw	figs-idiom	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֔ים	1	Jeshua	Here, **sons of** is a figurative expression that means “descendants of.” These men are all descendants of men who had been priests in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “among the descendants of the priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EZR	10	18	w0rr	figs-idiom	אֲשֶׁ֥ר הֹשִׁ֖יבוּ נָשִׁ֣ים נָכְרִיּ֑וֹת	1	Jeshua	See how you translated this expression in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “who had married foreign women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EZR	10	18	sf5b	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֨י יֵשׁ֤וּעַ בֶּן־יֽוֹצָדָק֙ וְ⁠אֶחָ֔י⁠ו	1	Maaseiah … Gedaliah	Here, **the sons of Jeshua** figuratively means “the descendants of Jeshua,” since Jeshua lived many years before this time, but **son of Jozadak** is literal because Jeshua was the biological son of Jozadak. **Brothers** could mean biological brothers, but it is more likely that it refers figuratively to relatives. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Jeshua the son of Jozadak and his relatives” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EZR	10	18	sf5b	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֨י יֵשׁ֤וּעַ בֶּן־יֽוֹצָדָק֙ וְ⁠אֶחָ֔י⁠ו	1	Maaseiah … Gedaliah	Here, **the sons of Jeshua** figuratively means “the descendants of Jeshua,” since Jeshua lived many years before this time, but **son of Jozadak** is literal because Jeshua was the biological son of Jozadak. **Brothers** could mean biological brothers, but it is more likely that it refers figuratively to relatives. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Jeshua the son of Jozadak and his relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EZR	10	18	pp5e	translate-names	מַֽעֲשֵׂיָה֙ וֶֽ⁠אֱלִיעֶ֔זֶר וְ⁠יָרִ֖יב וּ⁠גְדַלְיָֽה	1	Eliezer … Jarib	These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	10	19	xu0s	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יִּתְּנ֥וּ	1	Eliezer … Jarib	Here the word **So** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result, they gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 EZR	10	19	w25u	translate-symaction	וַ⁠יִּתְּנ֥וּ יָדָ֖⁠ם	1	Eliezer … Jarib	This means that the men shook hands with the clan leaders to signify that they were making a promise. Alternate translation: “So they shook hands in pledge” or “So they grasped hands with their leaders as a sign of promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@@ -1320,7 +1320,7 @@ EZR	10	35	pcb9	translate-names	בְּנָיָ֥ה בֵדְיָ֖ה כלהי	1	Be
 EZR	10	36	h5e9	translate-names	וַנְיָ֥ה מְרֵמ֖וֹת אֶלְיָשִֽׁיב	1	Meremoth	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	10	37	j4vh	translate-names	מַתַּנְיָ֥ה מַתְּנַ֖י ו⁠יעשו	1	General Information:	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	10	38	z3zn	translate-names	וּ⁠בָנִ֥י וּ⁠בִנּ֖וּי שִׁמְעִֽי	1	Binnui	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-EZR	10	38	p5vk	translate-textvariants	וּ⁠בָנִ֥י וּ⁠בִנּ֖וּי שִׁמְעִֽי	1	Binnui	The ULT represents the reading of the Hebrew text, but many scholars believe that the correct reading of this verse is found in ancient Greek translations. This is represented in the UST. You may choose to follow the reading of the preferred Bible translation used in your area, and include the other reading in a footnote. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+EZR	10	38	p5vk	translate-textvariants	וּ⁠בָנִ֥י וּ⁠בִנּ֖וּי שִׁמְעִֽי	1	Binnui	The ULT represents the reading of the Hebrew text, but many scholars believe that the correct reading of this verse is found in ancient Greek translations. This is represented in the UST. You may choose to follow the reading of the preferred Bible translation used in your area, and include the other reading in a footnote.<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 EZR	10	39	maz3	translate-names	וְ⁠שֶֽׁלֶמְיָ֥ה וְ⁠נָתָ֖ן וַ⁠עֲדָיָֽה	1	Adaiah	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	10	40	jlxi	translate-names	מַכְנַדְבַ֥י שָׁשַׁ֖י שָׁרָֽי	1	Adaiah	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 EZR	10	41	mf9g	translate-names	עֲזַרְאֵ֥ל וְ⁠שֶׁלֶמְיָ֖הוּ שְׁמַרְיָֽה	1	General Information:	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

en_tn_16-NEH.tsv

@@ -125,13 +125,12 @@ NEH	2	4	a57b		אֱלֹהֵ֖י הַ⁠שָּׁמָֽיִם	1	the God of heaven	A
 NEH	2	5	uv1p		וָ⁠אֹמַ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	And I said to the king	Alternate translation: “Then I replied to the king”
 NEH	2	5	a59b	figs-idiom	אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב	1	If it is good to the king	This is an idiom that means, “If it seems good in your judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NEH	2	5	a61b	figs-123person	אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב	1	If it is good to the king	Nehemiah speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “If it seems good in your judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-NEH	2	5	ae4b	figs-synecdoche	וְ⁠אִם־יִיטַ֥ב עַבְדְּ⁠ךָ֖ לְ⁠פָנֶ֑י⁠ךָ	1	and if your servant is good before your face	Here,**face** could be referring figuratively to the king himself by naming one part of him. What he thought and felt about Nehemiah’s request would become evident in his face first, so that would be an appropriate part of him to use to represent all of him. Another possibility is that **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” or “as I stand here before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+NEH	2	5	ae4b	figs-synecdoche	וְ⁠אִם־יִיטַ֥ב עַבְדְּ⁠ךָ֖ לְ⁠פָנֶ֑י⁠ךָ	1	and if your servant is good before your face	Here, **face** could be referring figuratively to the king himself by naming one part of him. What he thought and felt about Nehemiah’s request would become evident in his face first, so that would be an appropriate part of him to use to represent all of him. Another possibility is that **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” or “as I stand here before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 NEH	2	5	u2zy	figs-123person	וְ⁠אִם־יִיטַ֥ב עַבְדְּ⁠ךָ֖ לְ⁠פָנֶ֑י⁠ךָ	1	your servant	Nehemiah refers to himself as **your servant** to show his submission to the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 NEH	2	5	a63b	figs-idiom	אֲשֶׁ֧ר תִּשְׁלָחֵ֣⁠נִי אֶל־יְהוּדָ֗ה	1	that you would send me to Judah	Nehemiah is really asking for permission to go, rather than asking the king to send him. But as a sign of respect, he speaks as if the king would be taking the initiative. Alternate translation: “please allow me to go to Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NEH	2	5	df8l		עִ֛יר קִבְר֥וֹת אֲבֹתַ֖⁠י	1	the city of the graves of my fathers	This is similar to [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “the city where my ancestors are buried”
 NEH	2	5	l6nj	figs-synecdoche	וְ⁠אֶבְנֶֽ⁠נָּה	1	and I will build it	Nehemiah does not plan to do all of the building himself, but he will be the leader of the work. Alternate translation: “that I and my people may rebuild it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-NEH	2	6	a65b	figs-explicit	וְ⁠הַ⁠שֵּׁגַ֣ל ׀ יוֹשֶׁ֣בֶת אֶצְל֗⁠וֹ	1	with the queen sitting beside him	This detail indicates that this was a private meal, since the queen probably did not attend public banquets with the king. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This was a private meal, with the queen sitting next to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-NEH	2	6	a67b	figs-explicit	וְ⁠הַ⁠שֵּׁגַ֣ל ׀ יוֹשֶׁ֣בֶת אֶצְל֗⁠וֹ	1	with the queen sitting beside him	The implication is that the private meal gave Nehemiah the opportunity to speak freely. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I was able to speak freely because this was a private meal, with the queen sitting next to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NEH	2	6	a67b	figs-explicit	וְ⁠הַ⁠שֵּׁגַ֣ל ׀ יוֹשֶׁ֣בֶת אֶצְל֗⁠וֹ	1	with the queen sitting beside him	This detail indicates that this was a private meal, since the queen probably did not attend public banquets with the king. The implication is that the private meal gave Nehemiah the opportunity to speak freely. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. See UST. Alternate translation: “This was a private meal, with the queen sitting next to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	2	6	a69b	figs-parallelism	עַד־מָתַ֛י יִהְיֶ֥ה מַֽהֲלָכֲ⁠ךָ֖ וּ⁠מָתַ֣י תָּשׁ֑וּב	1	Until when will be your journey? And when will you return?	These two phrases mean the same thing. The king says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is genuinely interested in Nehemiah’s situation. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “How long would you be away?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 NEH	2	6	a71b	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּיטַ֤ב לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וַ⁠יִּשְׁלָחֵ֔⁠נִי	1	And it was good before the face of the king, and he sent me	The implication is that Nehemiah told the king how long he would need to be away. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I told him how long I would be gone. That was acceptable to him, and he gave me permission to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	2	6	a73b	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּיטַ֤ב	1	And it was good	As in verse 5, this is an idiom that means, “If it seems like a good idea to you.” Alternate translation: “That was acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -704,7 +703,7 @@ NEH	6	16	c1k3	writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֗י	1		Nehemiah uses this phrase
 NEH	6	16	c1k5	figs-synecdoche	כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר שָֽׁמְעוּ֙ כָּל־א֣וֹיְבֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1		This means that these enemies learned by some means that work had been completed. Nehemiah figuratively uses hearing, one means of discovering things, to describe the enemies learning this. Alternate translation: “when all of our enemies learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 NEH	6	16	c1k7	figs-explicit	כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר שָֽׁמְעוּ֙ כָּל־א֣וֹיְבֵ֔י⁠נוּ	1		This means specifically, “When all our enemies learned that we had completed the rebuilding in such a short time.” If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	6	16	c1k9	figs-parallelism	וַ⁠יִּֽרְא֗וּ כָּל־הַ⁠גּוֹיִם֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר סְבִֽיבֹתֵ֔י⁠נוּ וַ⁠יִּפְּל֥וּ מְאֹ֖ד בְּ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֑ם	1		These two phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah uses the repetition to emphasize how intimidated the people in the surrounding countries felt. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “they thought much less of themselves” or “they lost confidence in themselves,” otherwise “they became afraid and felt humiliated” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-NEH	6	16	t54c	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּפְּל֥וּ מְאֹ֖ד בְּ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֑ם	1		Here, **fall** is a figurative way of saying “become less.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NEH	6	16	t54c	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּפְּל֥וּ מְאֹ֖ד בְּ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֑ם	1		Here, **fell** is a figurative way of saying “become less.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	6	16	c1l1	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠יִּפְּל֥וּ מְאֹ֖ד בְּ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֑ם	1		Here, **eyes** stand for “seeing,” and “seeing” figuratively means judgment. This means that these people were no longer so great or powerful in their own estimation. Alternate translation: “they lost confidence in themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	6	16	py4c	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יֵּ֣דְע֔וּ כִּ֚י מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ נֶעֶשְׂתָ֖ה הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּֽאת	1		You can put this right before the statement that the enemies were afraid and thought less of themselves, because it it is the reason that explains that result. Alternate translation: “They realized that our God had helped us complete this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 NEH	6	16	c1l3	figs-activepassive	מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ נֶעֶשְׂתָ֖ה הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּֽאת	1		You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “our God had helped us complete this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -918,7 +917,7 @@ NEH	8	1	e1a5	translate-unknown	אֶל־הָ֣⁠רְח֔וֹב	1		This means a
 NEH	8	1	f6t8	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מָּ֑יִם	1		Here, **face** figuratively means the front of an object. Alternate translation: “in front of the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NEH	8	1	e1a7	translate-names	שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מָּ֑יִם	1		This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [3:26](../03/26.md). Alternate translation: “the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	8	1	e1a9	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּֽאמְרוּ֙ לְ⁠עֶזְרָ֣א הַ⁠סֹּפֵ֔ר לְ⁠הָבִ֗יא אֶת־סֵ֨פֶר֙ תּוֹרַ֣ת מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1		**They** means the crowd, though they likely made this request to Ezra through their leaders. The implication is that they wanted him not just to bring the book forward, but to read to them from it out loud (as [8:3](../08/03.md) indicates he did). This was because they wanted to learn what was in it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The crowd had asked Ezra the scribe to read to them from a scroll that contained the Law of Moses because they wanted to know what it commanded.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-NEH	8	1	e1b1	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּֽאמְרוּ֙ לְ⁠עֶזְרָ֣א הַ⁠סֹּפֵ֔ר לְ⁠הָבִ֗יא אֶת־סֵ֨פֶר֙ תּוֹרַ֣ת מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1		Since the rest of the chapter describes arrangements that the leaders must have made in advance, the crowd, once it gathered, did not start shouting spontaneously for Ezra to come forward and read. Rather, they had made this request in advance. Alternate translation: “the crowd had asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+NEH	8	1	e1b1	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֹּֽאמְרוּ֙ לְ⁠עֶזְרָ֣א   	1		Since the rest of the chapter describes arrangements that the leaders must have made in advance, the crowd, once it gathered, did not start shouting spontaneously for Ezra to come forward and read. Rather, they had made this request in advance. Alternate translation: “And the crowd had asked Ezra” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	8	1	e1b3	writing-participants	לְ⁠עֶזְרָ֣א הַ⁠סֹּפֵ֔ר	1		This introduces Ezra as a new character in the story. The expression “the scribe” identifies him as a teacher who had carefully studied the Law of Moses. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could call him something like “a man named Ezra, who was a teacher of the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
 NEH	8	1	e1b5	figs-explicit	לְ⁠עֶזְרָ֣א הַ⁠סֹּפֵ֔ר	1		The biblical book of Ezra indicates that this man returned to Jerusalem from exile in Babylon 13 years before Nehemiah did. He led many reforms in the community. But in this book, Nehemiah does not say whether Ezra had remained in the city all that time, or whether he had gone back to Babylon and had recently returned to Jerusalem again. Even if your language, in telling a story, ordinarily accounts for how a person came to be on the scene, it might be best not to try to address that question here in your translation. Even though Nehemiah seems to expect that his readers will know where Ezra had been, Nehemiah does not say specifically where he was, and so the answer is unknown. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	8	1	fdh4	translate-unknown	אֶת־סֵ֨פֶר֙ תּוֹרַ֣ת מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1		This **book** was most likely a scroll, and it most likely contained what is now known as the Torah or the “five books of Moses.” Alternate translation: “a scroll that contained the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -988,7 +987,6 @@ NEH	8	11	fjz6	figs-activepassive	וְ⁠אַל־תֵּעָצֵֽבוּ	1	Do not
 NEH	8	12	e1k5	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יֵּלְכ֨וּ כָל־הָ⁠עָ֜ם לֶ⁠אֱכֹ֤ל וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁתּוֹת֙ וּ⁠לְ⁠שַׁלַּ֣ח מָנ֔וֹת וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת שִׂמְחָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֑ה	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could put the last phrase at the beginning of the sentence since it gives the reason for the rest of the actions. Alternate translation: “So the people celebrated by eating and drinking and sharing with the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 NEH	8	12	e1k7	figs-explicit	לֶ⁠אֱכֹ֤ל וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁתּוֹת֙	1		The implication is that they enjoyed the special food and drink described in [8:10](.//08/10.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “eating rich foods and drinking sweet drinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	8	12	e1k9	figs-doublet	לֶ⁠אֱכֹ֤ל וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁתּוֹת֙	1		Eating and drinking are used together here to convey a single idea, celebrating. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “celebrating with festive meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-NEH	8	12	e1l1	figs-explicit	לֶ⁠אֱכֹ֤ל וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁתּוֹת֙	1		The implication is that they enjoyed the special food and drink described in [8:10](../08/10.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “enjoying special meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	8	12	e1l3	figs-explicit	וּ⁠לְ⁠שַׁלַּ֣ח מָנ֔וֹת	1		The implication is that they sent these portions to the poor, who would not have been able to afford rich food and drink, as described in [8:10](../08/10.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “sharing with the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	8	12	z1gc	figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת שִׂמְחָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֑ה	1		The abstract noun **rejoicing** can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: “and to rejoice greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NEH	8	12	e1l5	figs-explicit	כִּ֤י הֵבִ֨ינוּ֙ בַּ⁠דְּבָרִ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוֹדִ֖יעוּ לָ⁠הֶֽם	1		The implication is that the leaders helped the people recognize that being able to understand Yahweh’s law should be a source of joy and encouragement to them. They should not be sad or discouraged because they had disobeyed in the past, because now they would know how to obey. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because now that they were able to understand God’s law, they would be able to obey it in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1019,9 +1017,9 @@ NEH	8	16	dl2y	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יַּעֲשׂוּ֩ לָ⁠הֶ֨ם סֻכּ֜
 NEH	8	16	e1o9	figs-explicit	עַל־גַּגּ⁠וֹ֙	1		In this culture, roofs were flat and were reached by stairs that led up to them from outside the house. So a shelter could stand on the flat roof and the family could use it as a temporary home. Alternate translation: “on their flat roofs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	8	16	e1p1	figs-explicit	וּ⁠בְ⁠חַצְרֹ֣תֵי⁠הֶ֔ם	1		In this culture, houses were built around an open courtyard. So a shelter could be set up there, within the walls of the house. Alternate translation: “and in the courtyards within the walls of their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	8	16	krx4	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠בְ⁠חַצְר֖וֹת בֵּ֣ית הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים	1		As in [6:10](../06/10.md), here the book speaks of the temple figuratively as the “house of God,” as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “and in the temple courtyards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-NEH	8	16	b74m	figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠בִ⁠רְח֖וֹב שַׁ֥עַר אֶפְרָֽיִם	1		Here the story is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning is clear from the context, since this same location is described in [8:1](../08/01.md) and [8:3](../08/03.md). Alternate translation: “the square in front of the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+NEH	8	16	b74m	figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠בִ⁠רְחוֹב֙ שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מַּ֔יִם	1	and in the open area of the gate of water	Here the story is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning is clear from the context, since this same location is described in [8:1](../08/01.md) and [8:3](../08/03.md). Alternate translation: “and in the square in front of the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NEH	8	16	e1p3	translate-names	שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מַּ֔יִם	1		This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [3:26](../03/26.md), [8:1](../08/01.md), and [8:3](../08/03.md). Alternate translation: “the Water Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-NEH	8	16	e1p5	figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠בִ⁠רְח֖וֹב שַׁ֥עַר אֶפְרָֽיִם	1		Here the story is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning is clear from the context. Alternate translation: “the square in front of the Ephraim Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+NEH	8	16	e1p5	figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠בִ⁠רְח֖וֹב שַׁ֥עַר אֶפְרָֽיִם	1		Here the story is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning is clear from the context. Alternate translation: “and in the square in front of the Ephraim Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NEH	8	16	e1p7	translate-names	שַׁ֥עַר אֶפְרָֽיִם	1		This is the name of another one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Ephraim Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	8	17	e1p9	figs-parallelism	כָֽל־הַ֠⁠קָּהָל הַ⁠שָּׁבִ֨ים מִן־הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֥י	1		These two phrases mean similar things. They refer to the people of Judah who had returned to their homeland from the exile. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “all the people of Judah who had returned home from exile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 NEH	8	17	n31n	figs-metaphor	הַ֠⁠קָּהָל	1		The Old Testament often uses this expression to refer figuratively to the main body of the people of Israel. The expression envisions the way God called them out of Egypt and brought them together as a nation. At this point in their history, this main body was the people who had returned to Judah from exile. Alternate translation: “all the people of Judah who had returned home from exile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1081,8 +1079,8 @@ NEH	9	7	f1e3	translate-names	בְּ⁠אַבְרָ֔ם	1		This is the name of a
 NEH	9	7	us45	figs-explicit	וְ⁠הוֹצֵאת֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠א֣וּר כַּשְׂדִּ֑ים	1		Throughout their prayer, the Levites assume that the people listening will understand the significance of the details they mention for the Israelites’ history as God’s chosen people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why God brought Abram out of this city. Alternate translation: “He was living among the Chaldean people in the city of Ur, but you told him to leave there and go to a land that you would give to his descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	9	7	f1e5	translate-names	מֵ⁠א֣וּר כַּשְׂדִּ֑ים	1		This is the name of a city and a people group. Alternate translation: “the city of Ur, where the Chaldean people lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	9	7	f1e7	figs-explicit	וְ⁠שַׂ֥מְתָּ שְּׁמ֖⁠וֹ אַבְרָהָֽם	1		Once again the Levites assume that their listeners will understand the significance of this detail. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why God changed Abram’s name to Abraham. Alternate translation: “You changed his name to Abraham, ‘father of a multitude,’ because he would be like a father to many nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-NEH	9	8	f1e9	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠מָצָ֣אתָ אֶת־לְבָב⁠וֹ֮ נֶאֱמָ֣ן לְ⁠פָנֶי⁠ךָ֒	1		Here, **found** is an idiom for someone discovering something to be true. It does not mean that God was looking for something he had lost. Alternate translation: “You recognized that he was completely loyal to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-NEH	9	8	f1f1	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠מָצָ֣אתָ אֶת־לְבָב⁠וֹ֮ נֶאֱמָ֣ן לְ⁠פָנֶי⁠ךָ֒	1		Here Abraham’s **heart** figuratively represents his thoughts and will, that is, his inner being. Alternate translation: “You recognized that he was completely loyal to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NEH	9	8	f1e9	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠מָצָ֣אתָ אֶת־לְבָב⁠וֹ֮ נֶאֱמָ֣ן לְ⁠פָנֶי⁠ךָ֒	1	Also, you found his heart faithful before your face	Here, **found** is an idiom for someone discovering something to be true. It does not mean that God was looking for something he had lost. Alternate translation: “You recognized that he was completely loyal to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NEH	9	8	f1f1	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠מָצָ֣אתָ אֶת־לְבָב⁠וֹ֮ נֶאֱמָ֣ן לְ⁠פָנֶי⁠ךָ֒	1		Here, Abraham’s **heart** figuratively represents his thoughts and will, that is, his inner being. Alternate translation: “You recognized that he was completely loyal to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	9	8	ej7e	figs-metaphor	וּ⁠מָצָ֣אתָ אֶת־לְבָב⁠וֹ֮ נֶאֱמָ֣ן לְ⁠פָנֶי⁠ךָ֒	1		Here, **face** is a metaphor for a person’s perception, referring figuratively to God’s perception of Abraham. Alternate translation: “You recognized that he was completely loyal to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	9	8	f1f3	figs-idiom	וְ⁠כָר֨וֹת עִמּ֜⁠וֹ הַ⁠בְּרִ֗ית	1		To **cut** a covenant is a Hebrew idiom for making a solemn agreement with a person. The expression comes from the way animals were cut into pieces during covenant ceremonies to show what the parties wanted God to do to anyone who broke the agreement. But the meaning here is idiomatic. It is not a direct reference to such a ceremony, but only to the making of the covenant. Alternate translation: “you made an agreement with him” or “you made a promise to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NEH	9	8	f1f5	figs-metaphor	לָ⁠תֵ֡ת אֶת־אֶרֶץ֩…לָ⁠תֵ֣ת לְ⁠זַרְע֑⁠וֹ	1		**Seed** is a metaphor meaning **offspring.** Alternate translation: “to give his descendants the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1436,7 +1434,7 @@ NEH	11	13	gd6g	translate-numbers	מָאתַ֖יִם אַרְבָּעִ֣ים ו
 NEH	11	13	h1f5	figs-explicit	וַ⁠עֲמַשְׁסַ֧י	1		The implication is that Amashsai was another leader of the priests who settled in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Another leader of the priests who settled in Jerusalem was Amashsai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	11	13	l51b	translate-names	וַ⁠עֲמַשְׁסַ֧י בֶּן־עֲזַרְאֵ֛ל בֶּן־אַחְזַ֥י בֶּן־מְשִׁלֵּמ֖וֹת בֶּן־אִמֵּֽר	1		These are the names of five men. In this context, “son” means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	11	14	jrq7	figs-explicit	וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶם֙ גִּבּ֣וֹרֵי חַ֔יִל מֵאָ֖ה עֶשְׂרִ֣ים וּ⁠שְׁמֹנָ֑ה	1		The implication is that this is the total number of priests that Amashsai was responsible for. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Amashsai was responsible for 128 priests who were capable of working in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-NEH	11	14	h1f7	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶם֙	1		Here, in context, **brother** is a figurative way of saying **fellow priest,** as in [11:12](../11/12.md), although it is possible that some of the biological brothers of Amashsai were included in this group. “Their” is plural because it is describing this group in reference to all of the other priests, not just to Amashsai. Alternate translation: “their fellow priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NEH	11	14	h1f7	figs-metaphor	וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶם֙	1		Here, in context, **brothers** is a figurative way of saying “fellow priests” as in [11:12](../11/12.md), althoughit is possible that some of the biological brothers of Amashsai were included in this group. **Their** is plural because it is describing this group in reference to all of the other priests, not just to Amashsai. Alternate translation: “their fellow priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	11	14	h1f9	figs-abstractnouns	גִּבּ֣וֹרֵי חַ֔יִל	1		In this context, the abstract noun **strength** likely refers to the way these men were physically capable of doing the required work in the temple. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with an adjective such as “capable.” Alternate translation: “men who were capable of working in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NEH	11	14	p9qw	translate-numbers	מֵאָ֖ה עֶשְׂרִ֣ים וּ⁠שְׁמֹנָ֑ה	1		Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-eight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 NEH	11	14	h1g1	figs-explicit	וּ⁠פָקִ֣יד עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֔ם	1		This appears to mean that while Amashsai was responsible overall for this group of priests, Zabdiel supervised their day-to-day work. Alternate translation: “Zabdiel was their supervisor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1485,10 +1483,9 @@ NEH	11	23	h1k9	figs-idiom	דְּבַר־י֥וֹם בְּ⁠יוֹמֽ⁠וֹ	1
 NEH	11	24	aee9	translate-names	וּ⁠פְתַֽחְיָ֨ה בֶּן־מְשֵֽׁיזַבְאֵ֜ל	1		Pethahiah is the name of a man, and Meshezabel is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	11	24	h1l1	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנֵי־זֶ֤רַח	1		**Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “one of the descendants of Zerah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	11	24	h1l3	translate-names	זֶ֤רַח בֶּן־יְהוּדָה֙	1		Zerah is the name of a man, and Judah is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-NEH	11	24	h1l5	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠יַ֣ד הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1		Here, **hand** figuratively means side.** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-NEH	11	24	h1l7	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠יַ֣ד הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1		The list is figuratively describing Zerah as the king’s advisor by reference to something associated with that role, the place that he would usually occupy next to the king. Alternate translation: “was an advisor to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+NEH	11	24	h1l5	figs-metonymy	לְ⁠יַ֣ד הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1		Here, **hand** figuratively means **side** and figuratively describing Zerah as the king’s advisor by reference to something associated with that role, the place that he would usually occupy next to the king. Alternate translation: “was an advisor to the king”  (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 NEH	11	24	dqa4	figs-explicit	לְ⁠כָל־דָּבָ֖ר לָ⁠עָֽם	1		**People** here means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “for all matters concerning the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-NEH	11	25	h1l9		וְ⁠אֶל	1		After describing the various groups that settled in Jerusalem and their leaders, the list said in [11:20](../11/20.md) that all the other the Israelites continued to live in the other cities of Judah. In [111:21–24](../11/24.md) the list gave additional details about some other things, but it is now returning to speak about those cities and towns outside of Jerusalem. If it would be clearer in your language, you could indicate this with a phrase such as “and as for”
+NEH	11	25	h1l9		וְ⁠אֶל	1		After describing the various groups that settled in Jerusalem and their leaders, the list said in [11:20](../11/20.md) that all the other the Israelites continued to live in the other cities of Judah. In [11:21–24](../11/21-24.md) the list gave additional details about some other things, but it is now returning to speak about those cities and towns outside of Jerusalem. If it would be clearer in your language, you could indicate this with a phrase such as “and as for”
 NEH	11	25	h1m1	figs-metaphor	הַ⁠חֲצֵרִ֖ים בִּ⁠שְׂדֹתָ֑⁠ם	1		This refers to settlements and the adjacent agricultural land. It is as if the villages are **in** the fields because the fields surround the villages. Alternate translation: “the towns where there was farmland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	11	25	h1m3	figs-explicit	הַ⁠חֲצֵרִ֖ים בִּ⁠שְׂדֹתָ֑⁠ם	1		The implication is that these are the places where people lived who did not settle in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the towns outside Jerusalem where there was farmland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	11	25	h1m5	figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י יְהוּדָ֗ה	1		**Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “some of the descendants of Judah” or “some of the people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1530,8 +1527,8 @@ NEH	12	5	x3ri	translate-names	מִיָּמִ֥ין מַֽעַדְיָ֖ה בִּ
 NEH	12	6	udm2	translate-names	שְׁמַֽעְיָ֥ה וְ⁠יוֹיָרִ֖יב יְדַֽעְיָֽה	1	Shemaiah … Joiarib … Jedaiah	These are names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	12	7	g43p	translate-names	סַלּ֣וּ עָמ֔וֹק חִלְקִיָּ֖ה יְדַֽעְיָ֑ה	1		These are names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	12	7	i1a5	figs-distinguish	אֵ֣לֶּה רָאשֵׁ֧י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֛ים וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֖ם בִּ⁠ימֵ֥י יֵשֽׁוּעַ	1		This is a summary statement about the 22 men who have just been named. Alternate translation: “These men were the leaders of the priests in their own divisions while Joshua was the high priest.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-NEH	12	7	i1a7	figs-metaphor	רָאשֵׁ֧י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֛ים וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֖ם	1		**Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “the leaders of the priests in their own divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-NEH	12	7	i1a9	figs-metaphor	רָאשֵׁ֧י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֛ים וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֖ם	1		In this context, **and** means “that is,” so the full expression means, “the leaders of the priests, that is, the ones who were their ‘brothers.’” **Brother** itself is a figurative way of saying “fellow priests,” and in this context specifically means “the priests in their own divisions.” (King David had divided the priests into divisions so that they could rotate their responsibilities, and the Israelites reconstituted these divisions after the exile.) It is possible that some of the people in each division were the biological brothers of the leaders named, since the divisions were created based on close kinship ties, but the word “brother” is essentially figurative. Alternate translation: “their fellow priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NEH	12	7	i1a7	figs-metaphor	רָאשֵׁ֧י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֛ים וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֖ם	1		Here, **heads** is a figurative way of saying “leaders.” Alternate translation: “the leaders of the priests in their own divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+NEH	12	7	i1a9	figs-metaphor	רָאשֵׁ֧י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֛ים וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֖ם	1		In this context, **and** means “that is,” so the full expression means, “the leaders of the priests, that is, the ones who were their ‘brothers.’” **Brothers** itself is a figurative way of saying “fellow priests,” and in this context specifically means “the priests in their own divisions.” (King David had divided the priests into divisions so that they could rotate their responsibilities, and the Israelites reconstituted these divisions after the exile.) It is possible that some of the people in each division were the biological brothers of the leaders named, since the divisions were created based on close kinship ties, but the word “brother” is essentially figurative. Alternate translation: “their fellow priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	12	7	i1b1	figs-idiom	בִּ⁠ימֵ֥י יֵשֽׁוּעַ	1		The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “in the time of Joshua” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NEH	12	8	i1b3	figs-ellipsis	וְ⁠הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֗ם	1		Here the list is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “And these were the leaders of the Levites who first returned to Judah with Zerubbabel the governor and with Joshua the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 NEH	12	8	xy1h	translate-names	יֵשׁ֧וּעַ בִּנּ֛וּי קַדְמִיאֵ֥ל שֵׁרֵבְיָ֖ה יְהוּדָ֣ה מַתַּנְיָ֑ה	1		These are the names of six men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1632,7 +1629,7 @@ NEH	12	31	j1f7	figs-idiom	לַ⁠יָּמִין֙	1		Based on the information th
 NEH	12	31	j1f9	translate-names	לְ⁠שַׁ֖עַר הָ⁠אַשְׁפֹּֽת	1		This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [2:13](../02/13.md) and [3:13–14](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “the Rubbish Gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	12	32	zsj6		וַ⁠יֵּ֤לֶךְ אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶם֙ הוֹשַׁ֣עְיָ֔ה וַ⁠חֲצִ֖י שָׂרֵ֥י יְהוּדָֽה	1		Alternate translation: “Hoshaiah and half of the leaders of Judah marched behind this group”
 NEH	12	32	ni9q	translate-names	הוֹשַׁ֣עְיָ֔ה	1		This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-NEH	12	33	j1g1		וַ⁠עֲזַרְיָ֥ה עֶזְרָ֖א וּ⁠מְשֻׁלָּֽם	1		Based on what [12:33–36](../12/33.md) says about the composition of this group, it appears that Ezra walked in front of it ([12:36](../12/36.md)), Hoshaiah and half of the leaders of Judah walked behind it ([12:32](../12/32.md)), and the group itself was made up of a large number of people from the tribes of Judah and Benjamin, along with the other leaders who are named, and priests playing musical instruments. In that case, the word **and** would be indicating this sentence, which continues through to most of verse [12:36](../12/36.md), will provide further information about the situation the book has been describing. You could indicate that with a phrase such as “within the group itself were...”
+NEH	12	33	j1g1		וַ⁠עֲזַרְיָ֥ה עֶזְרָ֖א וּ⁠מְשֻׁלָּֽם	1		Based on what [12:33–36](../12/33.md) says about the composition of this group, it appears that Ezra walked in front of it ([12:36](../12/36.md)), Hoshaiah and half of the leaders of Judah walked behind it ([12:32](../12/32.md)), and the group itself was made up of a large number of people from the tribes of Judah and Benjamin, along with the other leaders who are named, and priests playing musical instruments. In that case, the word **and** would be indicating this sentence, which continues through to most of verse [12:36](../12/36.md), will provide further information about the situation the book has been describing. You could indicate that with a phrase such as “within the group itself were…”
 NEH	12	33	x16d	translate-names	וַ⁠עֲזַרְיָ֥ה עֶזְרָ֖א וּ⁠מְשֻׁלָּֽם	1		These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	12	34	q33v	figs-explicit	יְהוּדָה֙ וּ⁠בִנְיָמִ֔ן	1		One possibility is that these were individual leaders named Judah and Benjamin. However, in the context of the book, this most likely means “people from the tribes of Judah and Benjamin.” Their counterparts in the other group would be the other “half of the people” mentioned in [12:38](../12/38.md). And since [12:31](../12/31.md) says that these were “great” or large processional groups, you could translate this as “large numbers of people from the tribes of Judah and Benjamin.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	12	34	t5un	translate-names	וּֽ⁠שְׁמַֽעְיָ֖ה וְ⁠יִרְמְיָֽה	1		These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1715,7 +1712,7 @@ NEH	13	2	k1b7	figs-metonymy	קִדְּמ֛וּ…בַּ⁠לֶּ֣חֶם וּ⁠
 NEH	13	2	k1b9	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּשְׂכֹּ֨ר עָלָ֤י⁠ו אֶת־בִּלְעָם֙ לְ⁠קַֽלְל֔⁠וֹ וַ⁠יַּהֲפֹ֧ךְ אֱלֹהֵ֛י⁠נוּ הַ⁠קְּלָלָ֖ה לִ⁠בְרָכָֽה	1		The assumption once again is that readers will know what historical incident this is referring to. This is a reference to the way the king of Moab hired a prophet named Balaam to curse the Israelites, but instead God made Balaam speak words of blessing about them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Moabites also hired a prophet named Balaam to curse the Israelites, but God made him speak words of blessing instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	13	2	k1c1	translate-names	בִּלְעָם֙	1		This is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 NEH	13	3	j1c3	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וַ⁠יְהִ֖י	1		This phrase indicates that the events the story will now describe came after the things it has just described. You can use an expression in your own language that will indicate this clearly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
-NEH	13	3	k1c5	figs-idiom	כְּ⁠שָׁמְעָ֣⁠ם אֶת־הַ⁠תּוֹרָ֑ה	1		As in [9:29](../09/29.md), **hear** in this context is an [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] that means not just to hear something audibly, but to understand a command and recognize the need to obey it. Alternate translation: “when they realized that this was what the law commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+NEH	13	3	k1c5	figs-idiom	כְּ⁠שָׁמְעָ֣⁠ם אֶת־הַ⁠תּוֹרָ֑ה	1		As in [9:29](../09/29.md), **hear** in this context is an idiom that means not just to hear something audibly, but to understand a command and recognize the need to obey it. Alternate translation: “when they realized that this was what the law commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NEH	13	3	k1c7	figs-idiom	וַ⁠יַּבְדִּ֥ילוּ כָל־עֵ֖רֶב מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵֽל	1		**Mixed company** is an expression that describes people who were not Israelites. It indicates that if they were present, then the group would be mixed, part Israelite and part non-Israelite. Alternate translation: “They no longer allowed foreigners to worship with the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NEH	13	4	k1c9	writing-background	וְ⁠לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י מִ⁠זֶּ֔ה	1		This phrase indicates that the events the story will now relate came before the events it has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a phrase such as “but before all this happened.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 NEH	13	4	k1d1	figs-metaphor	וְ⁠לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י מִ⁠זֶּ֔ה	1		In this book, the expression **face** often refers figuratively to the front of a person, place, or object. Here the expression has the further figurative significance of “in front of” or “before” a certain time. Alternate translation: “before this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1756,7 +1753,7 @@ NEH	13	9	k1i7		כְּלֵי֙ בֵּ֣ית הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֔ים אֶת־ה
 NEH	13	9	k1i9	figs-metaphor	בֵּ֣ית הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֔ים	1		Nehemiah speaks figuratively of the temple as the **house of God** as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 NEH	13	10	k1j1	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וָ⁠אֵ֣דְעָ֔⁠ה	1		In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that this event took place after the event the story has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a word such as **then.** As with “understood” in [13:7](../13/07.md), **knew** here means **came to know** or **discovered** or **realized.** Alternate translation: “Then I discovered that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 NEH	13	10	k9k6	figs-activepassive	מְנָי֥וֹת הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֖ם לֹ֣א נִתָּ֑נָה	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one had been giving the Levites the support that the law commanded the Israelites to provide for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-NEH	13	10	k1j3	figs-activepassive	מְנָי֥וֹת הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֖ם לֹ֣א נִתָּ֑נָה	1		The implication is that no one was giving the Levites their support because there was no longer any place to store the grain, oil, and other supplies in the temple, from where they could be distributed to them. This was because Tobiah had taken over the large storeroom. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “no one had been giving the Levites the support that the law commanded the Israelites to provide for them because there was no place to store the contributions now that Tobiah had taken over the storeroom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+NEH	13	10	k1j3	figs-explicit	מְנָי֥וֹת הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֖ם לֹ֣א נִתָּ֑נָה	1		The implication is that no one was giving the Levites their support because there was no longer any place to store the grain, oil, and other supplies in the temple, from where they could be distributed to them. This was because Tobiah had taken over the large storeroom. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “no one had been giving the Levites the support that the law commanded the Israelites to provide for them because there was no place to store the contributions now that Tobiah had taken over the storeroom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	13	10	k1j5	figs-abstractnouns	מְנָי֥וֹת הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֖ם	1		As in [12:44](../12/44.md) and [12:47](../12/47.md), the abstract noun **portion** refers to the part of each crop that the law commanded the Israelites to give towards the work of the temple to support the Levites.<br>If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a different phrase. Alternate translation: “the support that the law commanded the Israelites to provide for the Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 NEH	13	10	k1j7	figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּבְרְח֧וּ אִישׁ־לְ⁠שָׂדֵ֛⁠הוּ	1		The implication is that the Levites had had to return to farming their own land because they no longer received from the people the support they needed to be able to serve in the temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all of the Levites had left the temple and returned to farming their own land because they had all stopped receiving the support that enabled them to serve in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 NEH	13	10	f2ng	grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יִּבְרְח֧וּ	1		In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -1886,4 +1883,4 @@ NEH	13	30	k1pp	figs-personification	וָ⁠אַעֲמִ֧ידָ⁠ה	1		Nehemiah
 NEH	13	30	k1qq	figs-idiom	אִ֥ישׁ בִּ⁠מְלַאכְתּֽ⁠וֹ	1		In this context, **a man** means **each one of them** Alternate translation: “and that each one fulfilled his assigned responsibilities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 NEH	13	31	vl4a		וּ⁠לְ⁠קֻרְבַּ֧ן הָ⁠עֵצִ֛ים בְּ⁠עִתִּ֥ים מְזֻמָּנ֖וֹת וְ⁠לַ⁠בִּכּוּרִ֑ים	1		This verse continues the sentence that begins in the previous verse, so here Nehemiah is describing two further things that he **caused to stand** or made sure happened. He is referring to the promises that the people made in their covenant to bring these contributions to the temple to support the priests and Levites. See how you translated these terms in [10:34](../10/34.md) and [10:35](../10/35.md). Alternate translation: “I also made sure that the people brought their offerings of wood and of the first crops that grow in their fields at the times when they had promised to bring them”
 NEH	13	31	sh91	figs-aside	זָכְרָ⁠ה־לִּ֥⁠י אֱלֹהַ֖⁠י לְ⁠טוֹבָֽה	1		As in [4:4](../04/04.md), here Nehemiah stops addressing the readers of his story and speaks directly to God. You could indicate this by putting this verse in quotation marks. Review the note at [4:4](../04/04.md) about asides like this if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
-NEH	13	31	ae94	figs-idiom	זָכְרָ⁠ה־לִּ֥⁠י אֱלֹהַ֖⁠י לְ⁠טוֹבָֽה	1		To remember someone **for good** is an idiom that means to reward someone with good things for the good that they have done. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+NEH	13	31	ae94	figs-idiom	זָכְרָ⁠ה־לִּ֥⁠י אֱלֹהַ֖⁠י לְ⁠טוֹבָֽה	1		To remember someone **for good** is an idiom that means to reward someone with good things for the good that they have done. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])

en_tn_17-EST.tsv

@@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ EST	2	22	dgp3	figs-idiom	בְּ⁠שֵׁ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי	1	in the nam
 EST	2	23	abh3	grammar-connect-time-sequential	וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ	1	Then the matter was sought out and was found out, and the two of them were hanged on a tree.	This verse tells what happened next after Esther gave the information to the king. You can use a word such as “then” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 EST	2	23	ld4y	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א	1	Then the matter was sought out and was found out	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “Then the king’s servants investigated Mordecai’s report and found out that it was true.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EST	2	23	abh4	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ	1	the two of them were hanged on a tree	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king ordered his servants to impale those two men on wooden poles” or “the king ordered his servants to hang those two men on a gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-EST	2	23	y28j	translate-unknown	עֵ֑ץ	1	on a tree	This seems to refer specifically to a pole or wooden structure that would be used to suspend a person above the ground and that could be used as a means of killing him or to display his body after he was dead. This might mean: (1) by hanging him from it with a rope tied around his neck, or (2) by impaling him on it, that is, by sticking a sharp point on one end of a pole through his body. Alternate translation: “wooden structure” or <br>“wooden pole” or “gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EST	2	23	y28j	translate-unknown	עֵ֑ץ	1	on a tree	This seems to refer specifically to a pole or wooden structure that would be used to suspend a person above the ground and that could be used as a means of killing him or to display his body after he was dead. This might mean: (1) by hanging him from it with a rope tied around his neck, or (2) by impaling him on it, that is, by sticking a sharp point on one end of a pole through his body. Alternate translation: “wooden structure” or<br>“wooden pole” or “gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EST	2	23	g9nh	figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֗ב	1	And it was written	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “The king’s scribes recorded an account of this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 EST	2	23	abh5	figs-idiom	בְּ⁠סֵ֛פֶר דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠יָּמִ֖ים	1	the book of the events of days	This is an idiom that describes a regular record of the events in a king’s reign. You could call this “the royal chronicles.” Alternate translation: “the daily record book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 EST	2	23	abh6	figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	before the face of the king	Here, **face** refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that the scribes wrote this account while King Ahasuerus was personally present. You could say that they did this in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “the king watched a scribe write this down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ EST	5	13	abw3		בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	the gate of the
 EST	5	14	abw4	figs-explicit	וַ⁠תֹּ֣אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֩ זֶ֨רֶשׁ אִשְׁתּ֜⁠וֹ וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו	1	Then … said to him	The verb is feminine, so it is Zeresh who is speaking here. By mentioning the friends, it is implied that they are in agreement with what she says. If it would be clearer, you could say, “Then Haman’s wife Zeresh suggested, and his friends agreed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EST	5	14	j81r		וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו	1	with all his friends	This means the friends whom Haman had invited to his home that day. Alternate translation: “his friends who were there”
 EST	5	14	abw5	figs-explicit	יַֽעֲשׂוּ	1	Let them make	You can say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “have your servants set up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-EST	5	14	i2f3	translate-unknown	עֵץ֮	1	a tree	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+EST	5	14	i2f3	translate-unknown	עֵץ֮	1	a tree	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow.<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 EST	5	14	k8zd	translate-bdistance	גָּבֹ֣הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּה֒	1	50 cubits high	You can convert this to a modern measure if that is the style of translation that you are using. Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
 EST	5	14	hiui	figs-explicit	אֱמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו	1		If it is clearer in your language, you can make explicit what Haman would say to the king. Alternate translation: “speak to the king and tell him that you would like to hang Mordecai on it” or “tell the king that you intend to hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 EST	5	14	abw7	figs-explicit	וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו	1	say to the king, and let them hang Mordecai on it	If it is clearer in your language, you can make explicit who does the action. Probably, Haman’s servants would carry out the action. But since it would happen under Haman’s orders and perhaps under his supervision, you could also describe him as the one who does the action if that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have your servants hang Mordecai on it” or “and hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1074,4 +1074,4 @@ EST	10	3	act2	figs-parallelism	דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠
 EST	10	3	act3	figs-abstractnouns	דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ	1	seeking good for his people and speaking peace to all its seed	The abstract nouns **good** and **peace** refer in this context to prosperity and security. You could translate these ideas with verbs, for example, you could say, “He worked hard to make sure that his people would prosper and their descendants would be secure.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 EST	10	3	wte9	figs-metaphor	דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ	1	seeking good for his people	**Seeking** is a figurative way to describe actively trying to do something or work hard for something. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 EST	10	3	s8f8	figs-idiom	וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ	1	and speaking peace to all its seed	**Speaking peace** is a figurative way of describing actions that benefit the general welfare of others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-EST	10	3	j161	figs-metaphor	לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ	1	to all its seed	Here, **seed** figuratively means “descendants.” Even if you combine the two parallel phrases, you can still convey the idea of “down through the generations” with a word such as “always.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EST	10	3	j161	figs-metaphor	לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ	1	to all its seed	Here, **seed** figuratively means “descendants.” Even if you combine the two parallel phrases, you can still convey the idea of “down through the generations” with a word such as “always.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

en_tn_45-ACT.tsv

@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ ACT	1	26	fk4x	figs-activepassive	συνκατεψηφίσθη	1	he was chosen	Th
 ACT	2	intro	x8fr			0		# Acts 02 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35.<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Pentecost<br><br>The events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years.<br><br>### Tongues<br><br>The word “tongues” has two meanings in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them.<br><br>### Last days<br><br>In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])<br><br>### The prophecy of Joel<br><br>In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])<br><br>### Baptize<br><br>In this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1-11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])<br><br>### Wonders and signs<br><br>These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43.<br><br>## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “You killed” (2:23)<br><br>The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this.<br><br>### Long sentences<br><br>There is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be clearer in your translation to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.<br><br>There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be clearer in your translation to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.<br><br>### Poetry<br><br>The quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
 ACT	2	1	i4sa	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	And when the day of Pentecost was completely filled	Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 ACT	2	1	a076	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	when the day of Pentecost was completely filled	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “when the day of Pentecost had come” or, if your language does not speak of days “coming,” “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT	2	1	a425	figs-activepassive	ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	when the day of Pentecost was completely filled	Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages <br>to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT	2	1	a425	figs-activepassive	ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	when the day of Pentecost was completely filled	Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages<br>to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	2	1	x075	translate-names	τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	the day of Pentecost	**Pentecost** is the name of a festival. It occurs 50 days after Passover. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	2	1	i4sb	writing-pronouns	ἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ	1	they were all together	Here the word **they** refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers whom Luke mentions in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “the apostles and all the other believers were together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 ACT	2	1	a077		ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό	1	to the same	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship”
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ ACT	2	26	a152	figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει
 ACT	2	27	m3ij	figs-quotations	ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	For you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 ACT	2	27	a153	figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay	These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **nor** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 ACT	2	27	whi3	figs-youformal	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις…οὐδὲ δώσεις…σου	1	you will not abandon … nor will you allow your	The words **you** and **your** are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in [1:24](../01/24.md) in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
-ACT	2	27	a154	figs-synecdoche	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην	1	you will not abandon my soul to Hades	The Messiah says **my soul** figuratively to mean himself, using one part of <br>his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT	2	27	a154	figs-synecdoche	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην	1	you will not abandon my soul to Hades	The Messiah says **my soul** figuratively to mean himself, using one part of<br>his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	2	27	a155	translate-names	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην	1	you will not abandon my soul to Hades	**Hades** is the name for the realm of the dead. If your readers would not be familiar with that name, you could express its meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	2	27	a156	figs-explicit	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	your Holy One	The expression **Holy One** is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 ACT	2	27	rld3	figs-123person	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	your Holy One	The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -1573,7 +1573,7 @@ ACT	13	5	ct8b	figs-synecdoche	κατήγγελλον τὸν λόγον τοῦ
 ACT	13	5	p5t3		συναγωγαῖς τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	synagogues of the Jews	Possible meanings are that (1) “there were multiple Jewish synagogues in the city of Salamis where Barnabas and Saul preached” or (2) “Barnabas and Saul started at the synagogue at Salamis and continued to preach in all the synagogues they found while they traveled around the Island of Cyprus.”
 ACT	13	5	sxw6		εἶχον δὲ καὶ Ἰωάννην, ὑπηρέτην	1	And they also had John as an assistant	“And John Mark went with them and was helping them”
 ACT	13	5	ukx2		ὑπηρέτην	1	as an assistant	“as a helper”
-ACT	13	6	h9he			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to Paul, Silas, and John Mark.The words “This man” refer to “Sergius Paulus.” The first word “he” refers to Sergius Paulus, the proconsul; the second word “he” refers to Elymas (also called Bar-Jesus), the magician.
+ACT	13	6	h9he			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to Paul, Silas, and John Mark. The words “This man” refer to “Sergius Paulus.” The first word “he” refers to Sergius Paulus, the proconsul; the second word “he” refers to Elymas (also called Bar-Jesus), the magician.
 ACT	13	6	ja1i		ὅλην τὴν νῆσον	1	the whole island	They crossed from one side of the island to the other and shared the gospel message in each town they passed through.
 ACT	13	6	cl2z		Πάφου	1	Paphos	a major city on Cyprus island where the proconsul lived
 ACT	13	6	zf3b		εὗρον	1	they found	Here **found** means they came upon him without looking for him. Alternate translation: “they met” or “they came upon”
@@ -1680,7 +1680,7 @@ ACT	13	32	ipb9			0	General Information:	The second quotation here is from the pr
 ACT	13	32	y273		καὶ	1	And	This word marks an event that happened because of previous event. In this case, the previous event is God’s raising Jesus from the dead.
 ACT	13	32	hr2g		τοὺς πατέρας	1	our fathers	“our ancestors.” Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. These were the physical ancestors of the Jews, and the spiritual ancestors of the converts.
 ACT	13	33	b1uh	translate-versebridge	ταύτην ὁ Θεὸς ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	God has fulfilled this for our children	You may need to rearrange the parts of this sentence, which begins in verse 32. “God has fulfilled for us, their children, these promises that he made to our ancestors, by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
-ACT	13	33	dy6w		τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	for our children	Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” but the best copies read, “for our children.” 
+ACT	13	33	dy6w		τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	for our children	Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” but the best copies read, “for our children.”
 ACT	13	33	d95n	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν	1	by raising up Jesus	Here **raising up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “by making Jesus alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 ACT	13	33	y3tz		ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	As it is also written in the second Psalm	“This is what was also written in the second Psalm”
 ACT	13	33	h9ir		τῷ ψαλμῷ…τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	the second Psalm	“Psalm 2”
@@ -2076,7 +2076,7 @@ ACT	17	2	wp3k	figs-explicit	διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν
 ACT	17	2	qf4t		διελέξατο αὐτοῖς	1	reasoned with them	“debated with them” or “discussed with them”
 ACT	17	3	e85n			0	General Information:	Here the word “He” refers to Paul ([Acts 17:2](../17/02.md)).
 ACT	17	3	ir9q	figs-metaphor	διανοίγων	1	He is fully opening	Possible meanings are (1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it, or (2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	17	3	he78		ἔδει	1	it was necessary for	“it was part of God’s plan for ”
+ACT	17	3	he78		ἔδει	1	it was necessary for	“it was part of God’s plan for”
 ACT	17	3	ipb2		ἀναστῆναι	1	to rise	“to come back to life”
 ACT	17	3	b9qi		ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
 ACT	17	4	es2u	figs-activepassive	τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν	1	some from them were persuaded	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2321,7 +2321,7 @@ ACT	19	18	tj8t	writing-endofstory		0		This ends the story about the Jewish exorc
 ACT	19	19	z9rj		συνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους	1	having brought their books together	“having collected their books.” The word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written.
 ACT	19	19	m6nf		ἐνώπιον πάντων	1	before everyone	“in front of everyone”
 ACT	19	19	upz3		τὰς τιμὰς αὐτῶν	1	the value of them	“the value of the books” or “the value of the scrolls”
-ACT	19	19	u9pi	translate-numbers	μυριάδας πέντε	1	50000	“ fifty thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+ACT	19	19	u9pi	translate-numbers	μυριάδας πέντε	1	50000	“fifty thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 ACT	19	19	bcv2	translate-bmoney	ἀργυρίου	1	pieces of silver	Each of the **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
 ACT	19	20	es71	figs-synecdoche	οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν	1	So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power	“So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 ACT	19	21	k1j1			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet.
@@ -2467,7 +2467,7 @@ ACT	20	29	ka6u	figs-metaphor	εἰσελεύσονται…λύκοι βαρε
 ACT	20	30	ftf4	figs-metaphor	τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν	1	to draw away the disciples after them	A false teacher convincing believers to start believing his false teaching is spoken of as if he were leading sheep away from the flock to follow him. Alternate translation: “in order to convince people who are disciples of Christ to become his disciples instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 ACT	20	31	q2nl		γρηγορεῖτε, μνημονεύοντες	1	be alert, remembering	“be on guard and remember” or “be on guard as you remember”
 ACT	20	31	ll64	figs-metaphor	γρηγορεῖτε	1	be alert	“be awake” or “watch out.” Christian leaders being **alert** about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT	20	31	pvt6		μνημονεύοντες ὅτι	1	Remembering that	“continuing to remember that” or “ not forgetting that”
+ACT	20	31	pvt6		μνημονεύοντες ὅτι	1	Remembering that	“continuing to remember that” or “not forgetting that”
 ACT	20	31	rt1h	figs-hyperbole	τριετίαν νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν	1	for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day	Paul did not teach them continuously for three years, but over the space of three years. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 ACT	20	31	hs1m		οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν	1	I did not stop admonishing	“I did not stop warning”
 ACT	20	31	rvh6	figs-metonymy	μετὰ δακρύων	1	with tears	Here **tears** refers to Paul’s crying because of the strong emotion of concern he felt while he was warning the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2538,7 +2538,7 @@ ACT	21	14	as1i	figs-activepassive	τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γιν
 ACT	21	15	p5fm	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, and not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	21	15	p5fl	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	The word “we” refers to some of the disciples from Caesarea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 ACT	21	15	kd5l			0	Connecting Statement:	This ends Paul’s time in Caesarea.
-ACT	21	16	k9kr		παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνί, τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ	1	to Mnason, a certain early disciple from Cyprus, with whom we would stay	The disciples from Caesarea knew **Mnason** and led Paul and Silas to his house where they would spend the night. 
+ACT	21	16	k9kr		παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνί, τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ	1	to Mnason, a certain early disciple from Cyprus, with whom we would stay	The disciples from Caesarea knew **Mnason** and led Paul and Silas to his house where they would spend the night.
 ACT	21	16	zd9i	translate-names	Μνάσωνί…Κυπρίῳ	1	Mnason … from Cyprus	Mnason is a man from the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 ACT	21	16	c7r2		ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ	1	an early disciple	This means Mnason was one of the first to believe in Jesus.
 ACT	21	17	zpa7			0	General Information:	Here the words “he” and “his” refers to Paul. The word “them” refers to the elders.
@@ -2620,7 +2620,7 @@ ACT	22	intro	gq5g			0		# Acts 22 General Notes<br>## Structure and formatting<br
 ACT	22	1	kq95	writing-background		0	General Information:	Verse 2 gives background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 ACT	22	1	a8ir			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul speaks to the Jewish crowd in Jerusalem.
 ACT	22	1	xe46		ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1	brothers, and fathers	This is a polite way of addressing men who are Paul’s age as well as the older men in the audience.
-ACT	22	1	pe8t		ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ	1	listen to my defense to you now	“I will now explain to you what I have done” or “please listen as I tell you my story ”
+ACT	22	1	pe8t		ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ	1	listen to my defense to you now	“I will now explain to you what I have done” or “please listen as I tell you my story”
 ACT	22	2	b4sk		τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ	1	in the Hebrew language	The Hebrew language was the language of the Jews.
 ACT	22	3	g311	figs-activepassive	ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ	1	but educated in this city at the feet of Gamaliel	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “but I was a student of rabbi Gamaliel here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	22	3	d4dx	figs-metonymy	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ	1	at the feet of Gamaliel	Here **feet** stands for the place where a student would sit while learning from a teacher. Alternate translation: “by Gamaliel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -3193,4 +3193,4 @@ ACT	28	28	c575			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul finishes speaking to the Jewish le
 ACT	28	28	b2za	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles	God’s message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is sent. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 ACT	28	28	d18n		αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται	1	they also will listen	“some of them also will listen.” This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time refused to listen to God.
 ACT	28	30	c56e	writing-endofstory		0	Connecting Statement:	Luke ends the story of Paul in the book of Acts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
-ACT	28	31	wv1l	figs-metonymy	κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	proclaiming the kingdom of God	Here **kingdom of God** refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about God’s rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT	28	31	wv1l	figs-metonymy	κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	proclaiming the kingdom of God	Here **kingdom of God** refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about God’s rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

en_tn_53-1TH.tsv

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
 1TH	front	intro	jp2y			0		# Introduction to 1 Thessalonians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of 1 Thessalonians<br><br>1. Greeting (1:1)<br>1. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2-10)<br>1. Paul’s ministry in Thessalonica (2:1-16)<br>1. Paul’s concerns for their spiritual growth<br>    - Like a mother (2:7)<br>    - Like a father (2:11)<br>1. Paul sends Timothy to the Thessalonians and Timothy reports back to Paul (3:1-13)<br>1. Practical instructions<br>    - Live to please God (4:1-12)<br>    - Comfort regarding those who have died (4:12-18)<br>    - Christ’s return is a motive for godly living (5:1-11)<br>1. Closing blessings, thanks, and prayers (5:12-28)<br><br>### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?<br><br>Paul wrote 1 Thessalonians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible, many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote.<br><br>### What is the Book of 1 Thessalonians about?<br><br>Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He wrote it after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. In this letter he said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave.<br><br>Paul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?<br><br>Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.<br><br>### What happens to those who die before the return of Christ?<br><br>Paul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians. For some of them worried that those who died would miss the great day when Jesus returns.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord.”?<br><br>Paul meant to express the idea of a very a close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Thessalonians?<br><br>For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.<br>* “May grace and peace be to you” (1:1). Some older versions read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”<br>* “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.” (2:7) Other modern versions and older versions read, “Instead, we were like babies among you, as when a mother comforts her own children.”<br>* “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God” (3:2). Some other versions read: “Timothy, our brother and servant of God.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1TH	1	intro	y8c5			0		# 1 Thessalonians 01 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Verse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Hardship<br><br>Other people persecuted the Christians in Thessalonica. But the Christians there handled it well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1TH	1	intro	y8c5			0		# 1 Thessalonians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Verse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Hardship<br><br>Other people persecuted the Christians in Thessalonica. But the Christians there handled it well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TH	1	1	dp37			0	General Information:	Paul identifies himself as the writer of the letter and greets the church at Thessalonica.
 1TH	1	1	ms5e	figs-explicit	Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church	The UST makes clear that it was Paul who wrote this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TH	1	1	luw5	figs-metonymy	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη	1	Grace and peace to you	The terms **Grace** and **peace** are metonyms for the person who acts toward people in a kindly and peaceful manner. Alternate translation: “May God be kind to you and give you peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -30,15 +30,15 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	1	10	pmi8		ὃν ἤγειρεν	1	whom he raised	“whom God caused to live again”
 1TH	1	10	wba8		ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	“so that he was no longer dead.” This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
 1TH	1	10	pt1s	figs-exclusive	τὸν ῥυόμενον ἡμᾶς	1	the one rescuing us	Here, **us** includes Paul and the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-1TH	2	intro	kt5l			0		# 1 Thessalonians 02 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Christian witness<br><br>Paul values his “Christian witness” as evidence that the gospel is true. Paul says that being godly or holy bears witness to the non-Christian. Paul defends his character, so that his witness is not affected. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
+1TH	2	intro	kt5l			0		# 1 Thessalonians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Christian witness<br><br>Paul values his “Christian witness” as evidence that the gospel is true. Paul says that being godly or holy bears witness to the non-Christian. Paul defends his character, so that his witness is not affected. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
 1TH	2	1	pt75			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul defines the believers’ service and reward.
 1TH	2	1	gpr4	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ…οἴδατε	1	you yourselves know	The words **you** and **yourselves** refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 1TH	2	1	tdl3		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
 1TH	2	1	g6qq	figs-exclusive	τὴν εἴσοδον ἡμῶν	1	our coming	The word **our** refers to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy but not the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1TH	2	1	w584	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ κενὴ γέγονεν	1	has not been in vain	This can be expressed in a positive manner. Alternate translation: “was very worthwhile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-1TH	2	2	x6ez		προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες	1	having previously suffered and been shamefully treated	“having been mistreated and insulted”
+1TH	2	2	x6ez		προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες	1	having previously suffered and having been shamefully treated	“having been mistreated and insulted”
 1TH	2	2	v4dg		ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι	1	in much struggle	“while struggling under great opposition”
-1TH	2	3	t7ty		οὐκ ἐκ πλάνης, οὐδὲ ἐξ ἀκαθαρσίας, οὐδὲ ἐν δόλῳ	1	was not from error, nor from impurity, nor from deceit	“was truthful, pure, and honest”
+1TH	2	3	t7ty		οὐκ ἐκ πλάνης, οὐδὲ ἐξ ἀκαθαρσίας, οὐδὲ ἐν δόλῳ	1	was not from error, nor from impurity, nor in deceit	“was truthful, pure, and honest”
 1TH	2	4	is1a		δεδοκιμάσμεθα ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, πιστευθῆναι	1	we have been approved by God to be entrusted	Paul was tested and proven trustworthy by God.
 1TH	2	4	qqj2	figs-explicit	λαλοῦμεν	1	we speak	Paul is referring to preaching the gospel message. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TH	2	4	k1m9	figs-metonymy	τῷ δοκιμάζοντι τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν	1	the one who examines our hearts	The word **hearts** is a metonym for a person’s desires and thoughts. Alternate translation: “who knows our desires and thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -46,15 +46,15 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	2	5	i8cr		οὔτε…ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας ἐγενήθημεν	1	we did not come … in words of flattery	“we never spoke to you … with false praise”
 1TH	2	7	ag1l	figs-simile	ὡς ἐὰν τροφὸς θάλπῃ τὰ ἑαυτῆς τέκνα	1	as if a mother might comfort her own children	Just as a **mother** would gently **comfort** her **children**, so Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy spoke gently to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1TH	2	8	r8b4		οὕτως ὁμειρόμενοι ὑμῶν	1	Having affection for you in this manner	“Because of our great affection for you”
-1TH	2	8	g73f		ὁμειρόμενοι ὑμῶν	1	having affection for you	“loving you”
+1TH	2	8	g73f		ὁμειρόμενοι ὑμῶν	1	Having affection for you	“Loving you”
 1TH	2	8	q86v	figs-metaphor	εὐδοκοῦμεν μεταδοῦναι ὑμῖν, οὐ μόνον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ψυχάς	1	we were pleased to impart to you not only the gospel of God but also our own souls	Paul speaks of the gospel message and his soul and the souls of those with him as if they were physical objects that one could share with others. Alternate translation: “We were pleased not only to tell you the gospel of God but also to spend time with you and to help you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	2	8	p4e4		ἀγαπητοὶ ἡμῖν ἐγενήθητε	1	you had become beloved to us	“we cared for you deeply”
 1TH	2	9	j9lu		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
 1TH	2	9	tc98	figs-doublet	τὸν κόπον ἡμῶν καὶ τὸν μόχθον	1	our labor and toil	The words **labor** and **toil** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how hard they worked. Alternate translation: “how hard we worked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-1TH	2	9	b16f		νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι, πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἐπιβαρῆσαί τινα ὑμῶν	1	night and day working, in order not to be a burden to any of you	“working hard to make our own living so you would not need to support us”
+1TH	2	9	b16f		νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι, πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἐπιβαρῆσαί τινα ὑμῶν	1	night and day working, in order not to burden any of you	“working hard to make our own living so you would not need to support us”
 1TH	2	10	il3e		ὁσίως, καὶ δικαίως, καὶ ἀμέμπτως	1	holy, and righteous, and blameless	Paul uses three words that describe their good behavior toward the Thessalonian believers.
 1TH	2	11	i58m	figs-metaphor	ὡς πατὴρ τέκνα ἑαυτοῦ	1	as a father his own children	Paul compares how he encouraged the Thessalonians to a **father** gently teaching his **children** how to behave. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1TH	2	12	m91e	figs-doublet	παρακαλοῦντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ παραμυθούμενοι, καὶ μαρτυρόμενοι…ὑμᾶς	1	exhorting you and encouraging and testifying to you	The words **exhorting,** **encouraging**, and ** testifying** are used together to express how passionately Paul’s group encouraged the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “We were strongly encouraging you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1TH	2	12	m91e	figs-doublet	παρακαλοῦντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ παραμυθούμενοι, καὶ μαρτυρόμενοι…ὑμᾶς	1	exhorting you and encouraging and testifying for you	The words **exhorting,** **encouraging**, and ** testifying** are used together to express how passionately Paul’s group encouraged the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “We were strongly encouraging you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1TH	2	12	n8dr	figs-hendiadys	εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείαν καὶ δόξαν	1	into his own kingdom and glory	The word **glory** describes the word **kingdom**. Alternate translation: “into his own glorious kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 1TH	2	12	qmc3	figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ περιπατεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀξίως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	for you to walk worthily of God	Here, **walk** is a metaphor for “live.” Alternate translation: “for you to live in such a way that people will think well of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	2	13	au3b			0	General Information:	Paul continues to use “we” to refer to himself and his traveling companions and “you” to the Thessalonian believers.
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	2	19	mj9n	figs-metonymy	ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς…ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς	1	our hope … Is it not even you	By **hope** Paul means the assurance he has that God will reward him for his work. The Thessalonian Christians are the reason for his hope. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1TH	2	19	ty78	figs-metonymy	ἢ χαρὰ	1	or joy	The Thessalonians are the reason for his joy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1TH	2	19	e7tl	figs-metonymy	στέφανος καυχήσεως	1	crown of boasting	Here, **crown** refers to a laurel wreath awarded to victorious athletes. The expression **crown of boasting** means a reward for victory, or having done well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1TH	3	intro	j379			0		# 1 Thessalonians 03 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Standing<br><br>In this chapter, Paul uses “stand firm” to illustrate being steadfast. This is a common way to describe being steadfast or faithful. Paul uses “be shaken” as the opposite of being steadfast. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])
+1TH	3	intro	j379			0		# 1 Thessalonians 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Standing<br><br>In this chapter, Paul uses “stand firm” to illustrate being steadfast. This is a common way to describe being steadfast or faithful. Paul uses “be shaken” as the opposite of being steadfast. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])
 1TH	3	1	nal1			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul tells the believers he has sent Timothy to strengthen their faith.
 1TH	3	1	fqe3		μηκέτι στέγοντες	1	enduring it no longer	“when we could no longer endure worrying about you”
 1TH	3	1	t3vt		ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι	1	we thought it good to be left behind at Athens alone	“we thought only Silvanus and me should stay behind in Athens”
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	3	7	csz7	figs-doublet	ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ καὶ θλίψει ἡμῶν	1	in all our distress and affliction	The word **affliction** explains why they are in **distress**. Alternate translation: “in all our distress caused by our afflictions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1TH	3	8	x5xt	figs-idiom	ζῶμεν	1	we live	This is an idiom that expresses living a satisfied life. Alternate translation: “we are very encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TH	3	8	x4zn	figs-idiom	ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	if you stand firm in the Lord	To **stand firm** is an idiom meaning to continue being faithful. Alternate translation: “if you continue to trust in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1TH	3	9	pzq7	figs-rquestion	τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν	1	For what thanks are we able to give to God concerning you, for all the joy in which we rejoice before our God because of you,	This is the beginning of a rhetorical question that continues to the end of the next verse. It can be expressed as a statement, but it will be necessary to change the question mark to a period at the end of verse 10. Alternate translation: “We cannot thank God enough for what he has done for you! We greatly rejoice over you when we pray to our God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1TH	3	9	pzq7	figs-rquestion	τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν	1	For what thanks are we able to give back to God concerning you, for all the joy in which we rejoice before our God because of you,	This is the beginning of a rhetorical question that continues to the end of the next verse. It can be expressed as a statement, but it will be necessary to change the question mark to a period at the end of verse 10. Alternate translation: “We cannot thank God enough for what he has done for you! We greatly rejoice over you when we pray to our God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 1TH	3	9	p5ka	figs-metaphor	ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν	1	before our God	Paul speaks as if he and his companions were physically in God’s presence. He is probably referring to the activity of praying. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	3	10	k71n		ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ	1	earnestly	“fervently”
 1TH	3	10	eb26	figs-synecdoche	εἰς τὸ ἰδεῖν ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον	1	to see your face	The word **face** refers to their whole person. Alternate translation: “to visit you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -113,19 +113,19 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	3	13	ly21	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, ἀμέμπτους	1	to strengthen your hearts, blameless	Here, **heart** is a metonym for one’s beliefs and convictions. Alternate translation: “to strengthen you, so that you will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1TH	3	13	xsd3		ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ	1	at the coming of our Lord Jesus	“when Jesus comes back to earth”
 1TH	3	13	jlc5		μετὰ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων αὐτοῦ	1	with all his saints	“with all those who belong to him”
-1TH	4	intro	b1z5			0		# 1 Thessalonians 04 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Sexual immorality<br><br>Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators must also be aware of cultural taboos. These are topics considered improper to discuss.<br><br>### Dying before the return of Christ<br><br>In the early church, people apparently wondered what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They may have worried whether those dying before Christ returned would be part of the kingdom of God. Paul answers that concern.<br><br>### “Caught up in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air”<br><br>This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ’s final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
+1TH	4	intro	b1z5			0		# 1 Thessalonians 4 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Sexual immorality<br><br>Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators must also be aware of cultural taboos. These are topics considered improper to discuss.<br><br>### Dying before the return of Christ<br><br>In the early church, people apparently wondered what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They may have worried whether those dying before Christ returned would be part of the kingdom of God. Paul answers that concern.<br><br>### “Caught up in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air”<br><br>This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ’s final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
 1TH	4	1	wk39		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians.
 1TH	4	1	u2lw	figs-doublet	ἐρωτῶμεν ὑμᾶς καὶ παρακαλοῦμεν	1	we beg and exhort you	Paul uses **beg** and **exhort** to emphasize how strongly they encourage the believers. Alternate translation: “we strongly encourage you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1TH	4	1	iij6	figs-activepassive	παρελάβετε παρ’ ἡμῶν	1	you received from us	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TH	4	1	p4db	figs-metaphor	δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν	1	it is necessary for you to walk	Here, **walk** is an expression for the way one is to live. Alternate translation: “you ought to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	4	2	vg16	figs-metaphor	διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	through the Lord Jesus	Paul speaks of his instructions as if they were given by **Jesus** himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	4	3	mw4j		ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς πορνείας	1	for you to keep from sexual immorality	“for you to stay away from sexually immoral acts”
-1TH	4	4	f4ux		εἰδέναι…τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι	1	to know how to possess his own vessel	This could mean: (1) This refers to knowing how to live with his own wife. (2) This refers to knowing how to control his own body.
+1TH	4	4	f4ux		εἰδέναι…τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι	1	to know to possess his own vessel	This could mean: (1) This refers to knowing how to live with his own wife. (2) This refers to knowing how to control his own body.
 1TH	4	5	x2t7		ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας	1	in the passion of lust	“with wrongful sexual desire”
 1TH	4	6	a9st	figs-doublet	ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν	1	transgress and wrong	This is a doublet stating the same idea in two ways to reinforce the concept. Alternate translation: “do wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1TH	4	6	q7bf	figs-explicit	ἔκδικος Κύριος	1	the Lord is an avenger	This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish the one who transgressed and will defend the one who was wronged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TH	4	6	d1ip		καὶ προείπαμεν ὑμῖν καὶ διεμαρτυράμεθα	1	we also forewarned you and testified	“we also told you beforehand and strongly warned against”
-1TH	4	7	v3np	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ…ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς ἐπὶ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ	1	God did not call us to uncleanness, but to holiness	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “God called us to cleanness and holiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+1TH	4	7	v3np	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ…ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς ἐπὶ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ	1	God did not call us to uncleanness, but in holiness	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “God called us to cleanness and holiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1TH	4	7	q4tj	figs-exclusive	οὐ…ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς	1	God did not call us	The word **us** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1TH	4	8	mn5y		ὁ ἀθετῶν	1	the one rejecting this	“whoever disregards this teaching” or “whoever ignores this teaching”
 1TH	4	8	su51		ἀθετῶν, οὐκ ἄνθρωπον ἀθετεῖ, ἀλλὰ τὸν Θεὸν	1	rejecting this rejects not man, but God	Paul stresses that this teaching is not from **man**, but from **God**.
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	4	17	l5l1	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες	1	we who are alive	Here, **we** refers to all believers who have not died. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1TH	4	17	wvi8		σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	with them	The word **them** refers to the dead believers who were made alive again.
 1TH	4	17	se1y		ἁρπαγησόμεθα ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα	1	will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air	“will be pulled up … to meet the Lord Jesus in the sky”
-1TH	5	intro	ay3d			0		# 1 Thessalonians 05 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Day of the Lord<br><br>The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will be a surprise to the world. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to live prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])<br><br>### Quench the Spirit<br><br>This means to ignore or work against the Holy Spirit’s guidance and work.
+1TH	5	intro	ay3d			0		# 1 Thessalonians 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Day of the Lord<br><br>The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will be a surprise to the world. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to live prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])<br><br>### Quench the Spirit<br><br>This means to ignore or work against the Holy Spirit’s guidance and work.
 1TH	5	1	i2vm	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	In this chapter the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1TH	5	1	caue	figs-you		0	General Information:	The word **you** is plural and refers to the believers at the church of Thessalonica. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 1TH	5	1	z1s6			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues talking about the day Jesus will come back.
@@ -167,13 +167,13 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TH	5	2	tmj3	figs-simile	ὡς κλέπτης ἐν νυκτὶ οὕτως	1	in this manner—like a thief in the night	Just as one does not know which night a **thief** may come, we do not know when the day of the Lord will come. Alternate translation: “unexpectedly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1TH	5	3	p1wi		ὅταν λέγωσιν	1	When they may say	“When the people may say”
 1TH	5	3	ne9n		τότε αἰφνίδιος…ὄλεθρος	1	then sudden destruction	“then unexpected destruction”
-1TH	5	3	f1xr	figs-simile	ὥσπερ ἡ ὠδὶν τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ	1	like having birth pains in the womb	Just as a pregnant woman’s **birth pains** come suddenly and do not stop until the birth is complete, the destruction will come, and people will not escape. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+1TH	5	3	f1xr	figs-simile	ὥσπερ ἡ ὠδὶν τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ	1	like birth pains to the one having in the womb	Just as a pregnant woman’s **birth pains** come suddenly and do not stop until the birth is complete, the destruction will come, and people will not escape. Alternate translation: “like the birth pains of a pregnant woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1TH	5	4	rr9j		ὑμεῖς…ἀδελφοί	1	you, brothers	Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians.
 1TH	5	4	b6lv	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἐστὲ ἐν σκότει	1	are not in darkness	Paul speaks of evil and ignorance about God as if they were **darkness**. Alternate translation: “you are not unknowing, like people who live in the dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	4	elp9	figs-simile	ἵνα ἡ ἡμέρα ὑμᾶς ὡς κλέπτας καταλάβῃ	1	so that the day might overtake you like a thief	The **day** when the Lord comes should not be a surprise to believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1TH	5	5	zp3z	figs-metaphor	πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας	1	For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day	Paul speaks of the truth as if it were **light** and **day**. Alternate translation: “For you know the truth, like people who live in the light, like people during the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1TH	5	5	d6fm	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους	1	We are not sons of the night nor the darkness	Paul speaks of evil and ignorance about God as if they were **darkness**. Alternate translation: “We are not unknowing, like people who live in the darkness, like people at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1TH	5	6	us6s	figs-metaphor	μὴ καθεύδωμεν ὡς οἱ λοιποί	1	we might not sleep as the rest do	Paul speaks of spiritual unawareness as if it were sleep. Alternate translation: “let us not be like others who are not aware that Jesus is coming back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TH	5	5	d6fm	figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους	1	We are not of the night nor of the darkness	Paul speaks of evil and ignorance about God as if they were **darkness**. Alternate translation: “We are not unknowing, like people who live in the darkness, like people at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1TH	5	6	us6s	figs-metaphor	μὴ καθεύδωμεν ὡς οἱ λοιποί	1	we might not sleep as the rest	Paul speaks of spiritual unawareness as if it were sleep. Alternate translation: “let us not be like others who are not aware that Jesus is coming back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	6	gu51	figs-exclusive	μὴ καθεύδωμεν	1	we might not sleep	The word **we** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1TH	5	6	d2aj	figs-metaphor	γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν	1	we might keep watch and be sober	Paul describes spiritual awareness as the opposite of sleep and drunkenness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TH	5	7	s253	figs-metaphor	οἱ γὰρ καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν	1	For those who are sleeping, sleep at night	Just as when people **sleep** and do not know what is happening, so the people of this world do not know that Christ will return. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

en_tn_54-2TH.tsv

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
 2TH	front	intro	krd6			0		# Introduction to 2 Thessalonians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of 2 Thessalonians<br><br>1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-3)<br>1. Christians suffering from persecution<br>    - They are worthy of the kingdom of God and of his promise of relief from trials (1:4-7)<br>    - God will judge those who persecute Christians (1:8-12)<br>1. Some believers’ misunderstanding about the second coming of Christ<br>    - Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1-2)<br>    - Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)<br>1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian Christians<br>    - His call to “stand firm” (2:13-15)<br>    - His prayer that God will comfort them (2:16-17)<br>1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)<br>1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)<br>1. Closing (3:16-17)<br><br>### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?<br><br>Paul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth.<br><br>### What is the Book of 2 Thessalonians about?<br><br>Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. And he wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?<br><br>Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Thessalonians?<br><br>For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.<br>* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Older versions have, “and the man of sin is revealed.”<br>* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. Other versions have, “For God chose you from the first for salvation.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-2TH	1	intro	m987			0		# 2 Thessalonians 01 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Verses 1-2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in verses 4-5: “We talk about your patience and faith in all your persecutions. We talk about the afflictions that you endure. This is a sign of God’s righteous judgment.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But in verses 5-10, Paul explains how God will reward those who believe in him and how he will judge those who afflict them. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4-5](./04.md))
+2TH	1	intro	m987			0		# 2 Thessalonians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Verses 1-2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in verses 4-5: “We talk about your patience and faith in all your persecutions. We talk about the afflictions that you endure. This is a sign of God’s righteous judgment.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But in verses 5-10, Paul explains how God will reward those who believe in him and how he will judge those who afflict them. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4-5](./04.md))
 2TH	1	1	b6vf			0	General Information:	Paul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. He begins by greeting the church at Thessalonica.
 2TH	1	1	nrxt	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	The words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2TH	1	1	x4lj	figs-you		0	General Information:	The word “you” is plural and refers to the believers at the church of Thessalonica. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	1	3	m6z5			0	General Information:	Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica.
 2TH	1	3	ea59	figs-hyperbole	εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε	1	We ought always to give thanks to God	Paul uses **always** as a generalization meaning “often” or “regularly.” The sentence emphasizes the greatness of what God is doing in the lives of the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “We should often give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 2TH	1	3	h6t9	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-2TH	1	3	u3m8		καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν	1	as is worthy	“for it is the right thing to do”
+2TH	1	3	u3m8		καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν	1	just as it is fitting	“for it is the right thing to do”
 2TH	1	3	xy7k		πλεονάζει ἡ ἀγάπη ἑνὸς ἑκάστου, πάντων ὑμῶν, εἰς ἀλλήλους	1	the love of each one of you all for one another is increasing	“you sincerely love one another more and more”
 2TH	1	3	bmn6		ἀλλήλους	1	one another	Here, **one another** means fellow Christians.
 2TH	1	4	kx1n	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς	1	we ourselves	Here, **ourselves** is used to emphasize Paul’s boasting. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
@@ -27,10 +27,10 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	1	11	ik19	figs-hyperbole	καὶ προσευχόμεθα πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν	1	we also pray always for you	Paul is using **always** as an exaggeration in order to emphasize how often he prays for them. Alternate translation: “we also pray regularly for you” or “we continue to pray for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 2TH	1	11	hiv9		τῆς κλήσεως	1	of your calling	Here, **calling** refers to God appointing or choosing people to be his children and servants, and to proclaim his message of salvation through Jesus.
 2TH	1	11	r8gk		πληρώσῃ πᾶσαν εὐδοκίαν ἀγαθωσύνης	1	he may fulfill every desire of goodness	“he would make you able to do good in every way that you desire”
-2TH	1	12	q994	figs-activepassive	ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν ὑμῖν	1	so that the name of our Lord Jesus may be glorified in you	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that you may glorify the name of our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2TH	1	12	q994	figs-activepassive	ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν ὑμῖν	1	so that the name of our Lord Jesus might be glorified in you	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that you would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	1	12	pg2i	figs-activepassive	καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ	1	and you in him	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and Jesus will glorify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	1	12	z8k9		κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν	1	according to the grace of our God	“because of God’s grace”
-2TH	2	intro	jq9r			0		# 2 Thessalonians 02 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Being gathered together to be with him”<br><br>This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ’s final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])<br><br>### Man of lawlessness<br><br>This is the same as “son of destruction” and “lawless one” in this chapter. Paul associates him with Satan actively working in the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])<br><br>### Sits in the temple of God<br><br>Paul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2TH	2	intro	jq9r			0		# 2 Thessalonians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Being gathered together to be with him”<br><br>This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ’s final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])<br><br>### Man of lawlessness<br><br>This is the same as “son of destruction” and “lawless one” in this chapter. Paul associates him with Satan actively working in the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])<br><br>### Sits in the temple of God<br><br>Paul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TH	2	1	r36t			0	General Information:	Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back.
 2TH	2	1	q1uq		δὲ	1	Now	The word **Now** marks a change of topic in Paul’s instructions.
 2TH	2	1	cvg5	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -41,32 +41,32 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	2	3	l9c5			0	General Information:	Paul teaches about the man of lawlessness.
 2TH	2	3	ej66		μὴ ἔλθῃ	1	it may not come	“the day of the Lord will not come”
 2TH	2	3	y7ch		ἡ ἀποστασία	1	the apostacy	This refers to a future time when many people will turn away from God.
-2TH	2	3	e86v	figs-activepassive	ἀποκαλυφθῇ ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας	1	the man of lawlessness has been revealed	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has revealed the man of lawlessness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2TH	2	3	e86v	figs-activepassive	ἀποκαλυφθῇ ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας	1	the man of lawlessness may be revealed	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God reveals the man of lawlessness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	2	3	tkg9	figs-metaphor	ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας	1	the son of destruction	Paul speaks of **destruction** as a person who bore a **son** whose goal is to totally destroy everything. Alternate translation: “the one who destroys everything he can” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TH	2	4	t485	figs-activepassive	πάντα λεγόμενον θεὸν ἢ σέβασμα	1	all that is called god or an object of worship	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everything that people consider to be God or everything that people worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2TH	2	4	t485	figs-activepassive	πάντα λεγόμενον θεὸν ἢ σέβασμα	1	everything being called god or an object of worship	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everything that people consider to be God or everything that people worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	2	4	wj33		ἀποδεικνύντα ἑαυτὸν ὅτι ἔστιν Θεός	1	showing that he himself is God	“showing himself as God”
 2TH	2	5	rsz1	figs-rquestion	οὐ μνημονεύετε…ταῦτα	1	Do you not remember … these things?	Paul uses a rhetorical question to remind them of his teaching when he was with them previously. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am sure you remember … these things.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 2TH	2	5	lkk7		ταῦτα	1	these things	This refers to the return of Jesus, the day of the Lord, and the man of lawlessness.
-2TH	2	6	ask4	figs-activepassive	τὸ ἀποκαλυφθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ καιρῷ	1	he will be revealed in his time	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will reveal the man of lawlessness when the time is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2TH	2	6	ask4	figs-activepassive	τὸ ἀποκαλυφθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ καιρῷ	1	he is revealed in his time	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will reveal the man of lawlessness when the time is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	2	7	si9i		μυστήριον…τῆς ἀνομίας	1	mystery of lawlessness	This refers to a sacred secret that only God knows.
 2TH	2	7	fcu7		ὁ κατέχων	1	the one who restrains him	To restrain someone is to hold them back or to keep them from doing what they want to do.
 2TH	2	8	hn67	figs-activepassive	καὶ τότε ἀποκαλυφθήσεται ὁ ἄνομος	1	and then the lawless one will be revealed	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and then God will allow the lawless one to show himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	2	8	vay9	figs-metonymy	τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ	1	with the breath of his mouth	Here, **breath** represents the power of God. Alternate translation: “by the power of his spoken word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-2TH	2	8	hy3y		καὶ καταργήσει τῇ ἐπιφανείᾳ τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ	1	and will bring to nothing by the revelation of his coming	When Jesus returns to earth and shows himself, he will defeat the lawless one.
+2TH	2	8	hy3y		καὶ καταργήσει τῇ ἐπιφανείᾳ τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ	1	and will bring to nothing by the appearance of his coming	When Jesus returns to earth and shows himself, he will defeat the lawless one.
 2TH	2	9	bd5m		ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους	1	with all power, and signs, and false wonders	“with all kinds of power, and signs, and false wonders”
-2TH	2	10	tf75		ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας	1	with all deceit of unrighteousness	This person will use every sort of evil to deceive people to believe in him instead of God.
+2TH	2	10	tf75		ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας	1	in all deceit of unrighteousness	This person will use every sort of evil to deceive people to believe in him instead of God.
 2TH	2	10	v366		τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις	1	to those who are perishing	This man who is given power by Satan will deceive everyone who did not believe in Jesus.
 2TH	2	10	pf48		ἀπολλυμένοις	1	who are perishing	Here, **perishing** has the concept of everlasting or eternal destruction.
 2TH	2	11	sj1v		διὰ τοῦτο	1	because of this	“because the people do not love the truth”
 2TH	2	11	en8e	figs-metaphor	πέμπει αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς ἐνέργειαν πλάνης, εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς τῷ ψεύδει	1	God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie	Paul is speaking of **God** allowing something to happen to people as if he is **sending them** something. Alternate translation: “God is allowing the man of lawlessness to deceive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TH	2	12	d63e	figs-activepassive	κριθῶσιν πάντες	1	they might all be judged	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will judge all of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2TH	2	12	pkw8		οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, ἀλλὰ εὐδοκήσαντες τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1	those who did not believe the truth, but took pleasure in unrighteousness	“those who took pleasure in unrighteousness because they did not believe the truth”
+2TH	2	12	pkw8		οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, ἀλλὰ εὐδοκήσαντες τῇ ἀδικίᾳ	1	those who have not believed the truth, but have taken pleasure in unrighteousness	“those who took pleasure in unrighteousness because they did not believe the truth”
 2TH	2	13	w83a			0	General Information:	Paul gives thanks to God for the believers and encourages them.
 2TH	2	13	bcd5			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul now changes topics.
 2TH	2	13	b3hh		δὲ	1	Now	Paul uses this word here to mark a change in topic.
 2TH	2	13	dze5	figs-hyperbole	ἡμεῖς…ὀφείλομεν εὐχαριστεῖν…πάντοτε	1	we ought always to give thanks	The word **always** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “we should continually give thanks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 2TH	2	13	m418		ἡμεῖς…ὀφείλομεν	1	we ought	Here, **we** refers to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy.
-2TH	2	13	ia4x	figs-activepassive	ἀδελφοὶ ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ Κυρίου	1	brothers loved by the Lord	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for the Lord loves you, brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2TH	2	13	ia4x	figs-activepassive	ἀδελφοὶ ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ Κυρίου	1	brothers having been loved by the Lord	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for the Lord loves you, brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TH	2	13	v15j	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὶ	1	brothers	Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 2TH	2	13	l7a8	figs-metaphor	ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἐν ἁγιασμῷ Πνεύματος καὶ πίστει ἀληθείας	1	as firstfruits for salvation in sanctification of the Spirit and belief in the truth	Being among the first people to be saved is spoken of as if the Thessalonian believers are **firstfruits**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TH	2	13	bpqn	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἐν ἁγιασμῷ Πνεύματος καὶ πίστει ἀληθείας	1	as firstfruits for salvation in sanctification of the Spirit and belief in the truth	You can state this to remove the abstract nouns **salvation**, **sanctification**, **belief**, and **truth**. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe what is true, and whom God has saved and set apart for himself by his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -81,14 +81,14 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	2	16	cm54	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς…Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς	1	our Lord Jesus Christ himself	Here, **himself** gives additional emphasis to the phrase **Lord Jesus Christ.** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 2TH	2	17	x3rr	figs-metonymy	παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι	1	may he comfort and strengthen your hearts	Here, **hearts** represents the seat of emotions. Alternate translation: “may he comfort you and strengthen you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2TH	2	17	yw5f		παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ	1	every good work and word	“every good thing you do and say”
-2TH	3	intro	b8hk			0		# 2 Thessalonians 03 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Idle and lazy persons<br><br>In Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### What should you do if your brother sins?<br><br>In this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
+2TH	3	intro	b8hk			0		# 2 Thessalonians 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Idle and lazy persons<br><br>In Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### What should you do if your brother sins?<br><br>In this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
 2TH	3	1	k33i			0	General Information:	Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions.
 2TH	3	1	jy75		τὸ λοιπὸν	1	Finally	Paul uses the word **Finally** to mark a change in topic.
 2TH	3	1	m1s5	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-2TH	3	1	r54v	figs-metaphor	ἵνα ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου τρέχῃ καὶ δοξάζηται, καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	so that the word of the Lord may run and may be glorified, just as also with you	Paul speaks of God’s **word** spreading as if it were running from place to place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TH	3	1	yvkm	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου τρέχῃ καὶ δοξάζηται, καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	so that the word of the Lord may run and may be glorified, just as also with you	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that more and more people will soon hear our message about our Lord Jesus and honor it, as happened with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2TH	3	2	xg2h	figs-activepassive	ῥυσθῶμεν	1	we may be delivered	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may save us” or “God may rescue us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2TH	3	2	p1ct		οὐ γὰρ πάντων ἡ πίστις	1	for faith is not of all	“for not all have faith” or “for many people do not believe in Jesus”
+2TH	3	1	r54v	figs-metaphor	ἵνα ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου τρέχῃ καὶ δοξάζηται, καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you	Paul speaks of God’s **word** spreading as if it were running from place to place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TH	3	1	yvkm	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου τρέχῃ καὶ δοξάζηται, καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that more and more people will soon hear our message about our Lord Jesus and honor it, as happened with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2TH	3	2	xg2h	figs-activepassive	ῥυσθῶμεν	1	we might be rescued	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may save us” or “God may rescue us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+2TH	3	2	p1ct		οὐ γὰρ πάντων ἡ πίστις	1	for not everyone has faith	“for many people do not believe in Jesus”
 2TH	3	3	yx9g		ὃς στηρίξει	1	who will strengthen	“who will strengthen”
 2TH	3	3	p91k		τοῦ πονηροῦ	1	the evil one	“Satan”
 2TH	3	4	xk85		πεποίθαμεν	1	we are confident	“we have faith” or “we trust”
@@ -104,8 +104,8 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	3	8	d9h1	figs-merism	νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι	1	working night and day	“working during the night and during the day.” Here, **night and day** are a merism and they mean “all the time.” Alternate translation: “working all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 2TH	3	8	w8fq	figs-doublet	ἐν κόπῳ καὶ μόχθῳ	1	in toil and hardship	Paul emphasizes how hard his circumstances were. The word **toil** implies work that requires great effort. The word **hardship** implies they endured pain and suffering. Alternate translation: “in very difficult circumstances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 2TH	3	9	sn3k	figs-doublenegatives	οὐχ ὅτι οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν, ἀλλ’	1	not because we do not have authority, but	Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “and we certainly have the right to receive food from you, but instead we worked for our food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-2TH	3	10	c652	figs-doublenegatives	εἴ τις οὐ θέλει ἐργάζεσθαι, μηδὲ ἐσθιέτω	1	If anyone is not willing to work, do not let him eat	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “If a person wants to eat, he must work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-2TH	3	11	ey6c	figs-metaphor	τινας περιπατοῦντας…ἀτάκτως	1	some walking idly	Here, **walking** stands for behavior in life. Alternate translation: “some living idle lives” or “some being lazy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2TH	3	10	c652	figs-doublenegatives	εἴ τις οὐ θέλει ἐργάζεσθαι, μηδὲ ἐσθιέτω	1	If anyone is not willing to work, do not even let him eat	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “If a person wants to eat, he must work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+2TH	3	11	ey6c	figs-metaphor	τινας περιπατοῦντας…ἀτάκτως	1	some who are walking idly	Here, **walking** stands for behavior in life. Alternate translation: “some who are living idle lives” or “some who are being lazy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TH	3	11	iv1z		ἀλλὰ περιεργαζομένους	1	but meddling	Meddlers are people who interfere in the affairs of others without being asked to help.
 2TH	3	12	bm6z		μετὰ ἡσυχίας	1	with quietness	“in a quiet, peaceful, and mild manner.” Paul exhorts the meddlers to stop getting involved in other people’s affairs.
 2TH	3	13	jx8t		δέ	1	But	Paul uses this word to contrast the lazy believers with the hardworking believers.
@@ -117,5 +117,5 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TH	3	16	nef4			0	General Information:	Paul makes closing remarks to the believers at Thessalonica.
 2TH	3	16	whb9	figs-explicit	αὐτὸς…ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν	1	may the Lord of peace himself give you	You can make explicit that this is Paul’s prayer for the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord of peace himself gives you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TH	3	16	zl1s	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς…ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης	1	the Lord of peace himself	Here, **himself** emphasizes that the Lord will personally give peace to believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-2TH	3	17	c2cb		ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου, ὅ ἐστιν σημεῖον ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ, οὕτως γράφω	1	This greeting is with my own hand—Paul—which is a sign in every letter. In this manner I write	“I, Paul, write this greeting with my own hand, which I do in every letter, as a sign that this letter is truly from me”
+2TH	3	17	c2cb		ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου, ὅ ἐστιν σημεῖον ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ, οὕτως γράφω	1	This greeting is in my own hand—Paul—which is a sign in every letter. In this manner I write	“I, Paul, write this greeting with my own hand, which I do in every letter, as a sign that this letter is truly from me”
 2TH	3	17	wg3f		οὕτως γράφω	1	In this manner I write	Paul makes it clear that this letter is from him and is not a forgery.

en_tn_55-1TI.tsv

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
 1TI	front	intro	wy83			0		# Introduction to 1 Timothy<br><br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy<br><br>In this letter, Paul alternates between personal commands to Timothy that empower him to act as his representative and with his authority, and instructions for how followers of Jesus should live in community.<br><br>1. Greetings (1:1-2)<br>2. Paul commands Timothy to tell people not to teach false doctrines (1:3-20)<br>3. Paul gives instructions about how to re-establish order and decency in the church (2:1-15)<br>4. Paul gives instructions about how to ensure that elders and deacons are properly qualified (3:1-13)<br>5. Paul commands Timothy regarding his own personal conduct (3:14-5:2)<br>6. Paul gives instructions to ensure church support for worthy widows (5:3-16) and elders (5:17-20)<br>7. Paul commands Timothy that he must be impartial (5:21-25)<br>8. Paul gives instructions to ensure order in master-servant relationships (6:1-2a)<br>9. Paul commands Timothy regarding how he should teach and conduct himself (6:2b-16)<br>10. Paul gives instructions for how people who are rich should live (6:17-19)<br>11. Paul commands Timothy to guard what has been entrusted to his care (6:20-21a)<br>12. Closing blessing to the whole church (6:21b)<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?<br><br>A man named Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>Paul may have written other letters to Timothy, but this is the earliest one that we still have. That is why it is known as 1 Timothy or First Timothy. Timothy was Paul’s disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote this letter near the end of his life.<br><br>### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?<br><br>Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches while Timothy himself trained other leaders.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its customary title, “1 Timothy” or “First Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What is discipleship?<br><br>Discipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ”?<br><br>Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 Timothy?<br><br>In [6:5](../06/05.md), the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1TI	1	intro	a4v2			0		# 1 Timothy 01 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Spiritual children<br><br>In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>In this chapter Paul speaks figuratively of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks figuratively of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.”
+1TI	1	intro	a4v2			0		# 1 Timothy 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Spiritual children<br><br>In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>In this chapter Paul speaks figuratively of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks figuratively of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.”
 1TI	1	1	i3zz		Παῦλος	1	Paul	In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Immediately after introducing the writer, you might also want to indicate to whom the letter was written. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am the one writing this letter to you, Timothy”
 1TI	1	1	xl6d		κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν Θεοῦ	1	by the command of God	Alternate translation: “by the authority of God”
 1TI	1	1	wb8j		Θεοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν	1	God our Savior	Alternate translation: “God, who saves us”
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	1	20	ty7n	figs-metaphor	οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ	1	whom I have given over to Satan	Paul speaks figuratively as if he physically took hold of these men and handed them to Satan. If this does not make sense in your language, you can state it plainly. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to command them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	1	20	az10	figs-explicit	οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ	1		This probably means that Paul expelled them from the community of believers. Since they are no longer a part of the community, Satan has access to them and can harm them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you may want to include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to make them suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	1	20	s76c	figs-activepassive	ἵνα παιδευθῶσι	1	so that they may be taught	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God may teach them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1TI	2	intro	c6rf			0		# 1 Timothy 02 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Peace<br><br>Paul encourages Christians to pray for everyone. They should pray for rulers so that Christians can live peacefully, in a godly and dignified way.<br><br>### Women in the church<br><br>Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe that God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Other scholars believe that God wants women to use the gifts He gives them on an equal basis with men. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.
+1TI	2	intro	c6rf			0		# 1 Timothy 2 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Peace<br><br>Paul encourages Christians to pray for everyone. They should pray for rulers so that Christians can live peacefully, in a godly and dignified way.<br><br>### Women in the church<br><br>Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe that God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Other scholars believe that God wants women to use the gifts He gives them on an equal basis with men. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.
 1TI	2	1	yk2z	figs-idiom	πρῶτον πάντων	1	first of all	As in [1:15](../01/15.md), the term **first** figuratively means the superlative example of a class. Alternate translation: “most importantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TI	2	1	iag7		παρακαλῶ	1	I urge	Alternate translation: “I encourage” or “I exhort”
 1TI	2	1	ql7a	figs-activepassive	ποιεῖσθαι δεήσεις, προσευχάς, ἐντεύξεις, εὐχαριστίας	1	for requests, prayers, intercessions, and thanksgivings to be made	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action and who would receive the action. Alternate translation: “I urge all believers to make requests, prayers, intercessions, and thanksgivings to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	2	15	gh3c		ἐὰν μείνωσιν	1	if they remain	Here, **they** refers to women. Paul switches from the singular to the plural as he switches from talking about Eve as the representative of women to women in general. Alternate translation: “if women continue living”
 1TI	2	15	sl57	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πίστει, καὶ ἀγάπῃ, καὶ ἁγιασμῷ	1	in faith and love and holiness	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **faith**, **love**, and **holiness** with verbs. Alternate translation: “trusting Jesus, loving others, and living in a holy way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1TI	2	15	dcf3	figs-idiom	μετὰ σωφροσύνης	1	with self-control	Possible meanings of this expression here are: (1) “with good judgment,” (2) “with modesty,” or (3) “with clear thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1TI	3	intro	d9db			0		# 1 Timothy 03 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>[3:16](../03/16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to express what it understood to be the meaning of who Jesus was and what he did.<br><br>### Overseers and deacons<br><br>The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word “overseer” reflects the Greek term in verses 1-2, which means literally an “over-seer.” The word “bishop” is derived directly from the letters of this Greek term. Paul writes about another kind of church leader, a “deacon,” in verses 8 and 12.<br><br>### Character qualities<br><br>This chapter lists several qualities that an overseer or deacon in the church must have. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1TI	3	intro	d9db			0		# 1 Timothy 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>[3:16](../03/16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to express what it understood to be the meaning of who Jesus was and what he did.<br><br>### Overseers and deacons<br><br>The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word “overseer” reflects the Greek term in verses 1-2, which means literally an “over-seer.” The word “bishop” is derived directly from the letters of this Greek term. Paul writes about another kind of church leader, a “deacon,” in verses 8 and 12.<br><br>### Character qualities<br><br>This chapter lists several qualities that an overseer or deacon in the church must have. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1TI	3	1	t227		πιστὸς ὁ λόγος	1	This word is trustworthy	As in [1:15](../01/15.md), in this context the term **word** has a meaning more like “statement” or “message.” Alternate translation: “this statement is dependable”
 1TI	3	1	t228	figs-quotemarks	πιστὸς ὁ λόγος	1	This word is trustworthy	Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow in the rest of the verse with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 1TI	3	1	t229	translate-unknown	ἐπισκοπῆς	1	overseer	This term describes a leader of the early Christian church whose work was to take care of the spiritual needs of believers and make sure that they received accurate biblical teaching. Alternate translation: “spiritual leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	3	16	h9mb	figs-activepassive	ἐπιστεύθη ἐν κόσμῳ	1	was believed in the world	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “people throughout the world believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	3	16	jz11	figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη ἐν δόξῃ	1	was taken up in glory	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God the Father took him up to heaven in glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	3	16	mr3a	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνελήμφθη ἐν δόξῃ	1	was taken up in glory	The abstract noun **glory** refers to the way Jesus received power from God the Father and is worthy of honor. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind this term with an adjective such as “powerful” and a verb such as “admire.” Alternate translation: “God the Father took him up to heaven, making him powerful and making everyone admire him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1TI	4	intro	b39h			0		# 1 Timothy 04 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>Paul speaks in [4:14](../04/14.md) of prophecy. A “prophecy” is a message that God communicates to people through someone to whom He has given a special gift of hearing and conveying these messages. The specific prophecy that Paul describes revealed how Timothy would become a gifted leader of the church. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Cultural practices<br><br>In verse 14 Paul speaks of church leaders placing their hands on Timothy. That was one way of indicating publicly that a person was being placed in a leadership position in the church.<br><br>### Variation in names<br><br>In this chapter Paul speaks of church leaders called “elders.” They seem to be the same kind of leaders that he calls “overseers” in chapter 3.
+1TI	4	intro	b39h			0		# 1 Timothy 4 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>Paul speaks in [4:14](../04/14.md) of prophecy. A “prophecy” is a message that God communicates to people through someone to whom He has given a special gift of hearing and conveying these messages. The specific prophecy that Paul describes revealed how Timothy would become a gifted leader of the church. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Cultural practices<br><br>In verse 14 Paul speaks of church leaders placing their hands on Timothy. That was one way of indicating publicly that a person was being placed in a leadership position in the church.<br><br>### Variation in names<br><br>In this chapter Paul speaks of church leaders called “elders.” They seem to be the same kind of leaders that he calls “overseers” in chapter 3.
 1TI	4	1	jzr9		δὲ	1	Now	Paul uses this word to introduce background information that will help Timothy and the believers in Ephesus understand the next part of his letter. The false teachings that Timothy must oppose are something that the Spirit has already predicted. You can translate the term with the word or phrase in your language that is most similar in meaning and significance.
 1TI	4	1	b739	figs-idiom	ἐν ὑστέροις καιροῖς	1	in later times	This expression refers to the time period when God’s purposes in history are approaching their culmination and so the evil opposition to them increases. Paul is probably referring to the time period between Jesus’ resurrection and his second coming. Alternate translation: “in these days as God’s purposes advance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1TI	4	1	b931	figs-metaphor	ἀποστήσονταί τινες τῆς πίστεως	1	some will leave the faith	Paul speaks of people ceasing to trust in Christ as if they were physically leaving a place. Alternate translation: “some people will stop trusting in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	4	16	uq6c		ἔπεχε σεαυτῷ καὶ τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ	1	Pay attention to yourself and to the teaching	Alternate translation: “Pay attention to how you live and to what you teach”
 1TI	4	16	zxe7		ἐπίμενε αὐτοῖς	1	Continue in these things	Alternate translation: “continue to do these things”
 1TI	4	16	u7ez		καὶ σεαυτὸν σώσεις καὶ τοὺς ἀκούοντάς σου	1	you will save both yourself and your listeners	Possible meanings are: (1) Timothy will save himself and those who hear him from God’s judgment (2) Timothy will protect himself and those who hear him from the influence of false teachers. Perhaps Paul means both things since, if Timothy can persuade the people of the church in Ephesus not to listen to the false teachers, then he will also spare them from God’s judgment for the wrong things they would have done if they had listened to those teachers. Alternate translation: “you will keep both yourself and your listeners from believing and doing the wrong things”
-1TI	5	intro	jx4e			0		# 1 Timothy 05 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Honor and respect<br><br>Paul encourages younger Christians to honor and respect older Christians. Cultures honor and respect older people in different ways.<br><br>### Widows<br><br>In the ancient Near East, it was important to care for widows because they could not provide for themselves.<br><br>### Variation in names<br><br>In this chapter, as in chapter 4, Paul speaks of church leaders called “elders.” Here, as well, they seem to be the same kind of leaders that he calls “overseers” in chapter 3.
+1TI	5	intro	jx4e			0		# 1 Timothy 5 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Honor and respect<br><br>Paul encourages younger Christians to honor and respect older Christians. Cultures honor and respect older people in different ways.<br><br>### Widows<br><br>In the ancient Near East, it was important to care for widows because they could not provide for themselves.<br><br>### Variation in names<br><br>In this chapter, as in chapter 4, Paul speaks of church leaders called “elders.” Here, as well, they seem to be the same kind of leaders that he calls “overseers” in chapter 3.
 1TI	5	1	wt5y	figs-you		0	General Information:	Paul was giving these commands to one person, Timothy. Languages that have different forms of “you” or different forms for commands would use the singular form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 1TI	5	1	l4w5		πρεσβυτέρῳ μὴ ἐπιπλήξῃς	1	Do not rebuke an older man	Alternate translation: “do not reprimand an older man”
 1TI	5	1	dnf2		ἀλλὰ παρακάλει	1	but exhort him	Alternate translation: “instead, encourage him”
@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1TI	5	25	bl51	figs-metaphor	καὶ τὰ ἄλλως ἔχοντα, κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί	1	and the ones having otherwise are not able to be hidden	Paul speaks of good works as if they were objects that someone could hide. Alternate translation: “and people will find out later about even those good deeds that are not obvious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	5	25	t420	figs-activepassive	καὶ τὰ ἄλλως ἔχοντα, κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί	1	and the ones having otherwise are not able to be hidden	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “and people who secretly do good works will not be able to hide them forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1TI	5	25	bb2t	figs-doublenegatives	κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί	1		If it is clearer in your language, you can say this in a positive way. Alternate translation: “people will learn about later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-1TI	6	intro	rks4			0		# 1 Timothy 06 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Slavery<br><br>In this chapter Paul teaches slaves about honoring, respecting, and diligently serving their masters. This does not mean that he is endorsing slavery as a good thing or as something that God approves of. Instead, Paul is encouraging believers to be godly and content in every situation that they are in. This does not mean that they cannot also work to change those situations.
+1TI	6	intro	rks4			0		# 1 Timothy 6 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Slavery<br><br>In this chapter Paul teaches slaves about honoring, respecting, and diligently serving their masters. This does not mean that he is endorsing slavery as a good thing or as something that God approves of. Instead, Paul is encouraging believers to be godly and content in every situation that they are in. This does not mean that they cannot also work to change those situations.
 1TI	6	1	nm4n	figs-metaphor	ὅσοι εἰσὶν ὑπὸ ζυγὸν δοῦλοι	1	As many slaves as are under the yoke	Paul speaks of people who work as slaves as though they were oxen plowing or pulling with a yoke around their necks. Alternate translation: “concerning people who are working as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1TI	6	1	ep1l	figs-explicit	ὅσοι εἰσὶν	1	as many … as are	The implication in context is that Paul is speaking about believers who are slaves. Alternate translation: “believers who are working as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1TI	6	1	he2n	figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ διδασκαλία βλασφημῆται	1	so that the name of God and the teaching may not be blasphemed	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that unbelievers will not insult God’s character or what we believe and teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

en_tn_56-2TI.tsv

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
 2TI	front	intro	s7fk			0		# Introduction to 2 Timothy<br><br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy<br><br>1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).<br>2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14-26).<br>3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).<br>4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-22).<br><br>### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?<br><br>Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.<br><br>### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?<br><br>Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?<br><br>As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.<br><br>### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?<br><br>God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”<br><br>In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])<br><br>### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?<br><br>For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.<br>* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”<br>* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-2TI	1	intro	p5lf			0		# 2 Timothy 01 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Spiritual children<br><br>Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Persecution<br><br>Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel.
+2TI	1	intro	p5lf			0		# 2 Timothy 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Spiritual children<br><br>Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Persecution<br><br>Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel.
 2TI	1	1	p001	translate-names	Παῦλος	1	Paul	This is the name of a man, the author of the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	1	1	ha4l		Παῦλος	1	Paul	This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you can use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter”
 2TI	1	1	vl2g		διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ	1	through the will of God	Paul became an apostle because God wanted him to be an apostle. Alternate translation: “because of God’s will” or “because God wanted it to be so”
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	1	18	f3ep	figs-explicit	ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	in that day	The expression **that day** refers to the day when God will judge all people; at that time they will receive mercy from the Lord, as Paul mentions, or wrath. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	1	18	p024	translate-names	Ἐφέσῳ	1	Ephesus	This is the name of a city, the place where Timothy, the recipient of the letter, is located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2TI	1	18	p025	figs-explicit	ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις	1	how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well	Paul is reminding Timothy that Onesiphorus helped him earlier, in Ephesus. So, Paul is asking the Lord to bless Onesiphorus because he helped Paul several times. Alternate translation: “you know well how much he also helped me earlier when I was in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2TI	2	intro	k3zn			0		# 2 Timothy 02 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In verses 11b-13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### We will reign with him<br><br>Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Analogies<br><br>In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house.
+2TI	2	intro	k3zn			0		# 2 Timothy 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In verses 11b-13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### We will reign with him<br><br>Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Analogies<br><br>In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house.
 2TI	2	1	bll5	figs-metaphor	τέκνον μου	1	my child	Here, **child** is a term of great love and approval. Timothy is not Paul’s biological child. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so this is why Paul considered him like his own child. Alternate translation: “who are like my child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	1	p026	figs-activepassive	ἐνδυναμοῦ	1	be strengthened	You could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “let God make you strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TI	2	1	e6ex	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ χάριτι τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	in the grace that is in Christ Jesus	Paul wants Timothy to experience the strength that God provides through his **grace** or kindness. Believers experience God’s grace through knowing Jesus Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “as you allow Christ Jesus to kindly empower you through your relationship to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	2	26	mql8	figs-metaphor	ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος	1	from the trap of the devil	Paul refers to the deception of the devil as a physical trap that sinners are captured in. Alternate translation: “and escape from the devil’s deception” or “and reject the devil’s deception” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2TI	2	26	p074	figs-activepassive	ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα	1	having been captured by him for his will	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “after the devil has captured them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2TI	2	26	dj4j	figs-metaphor	ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα	1	having been captured by him for his will	Paul speaks of the devil’s deception as if the devil had physically captured them and made them do what he wanted. Alternate translation: “after the devil has deceived them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2TI	3	intro	k2cr			0		# 2 Timothy 03 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>Many scholars understand the **last days** to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return, which includes Paul’s time. If so, then what Paul teaches in this chapter about being persecuted applies to all believers. But some scholars understand the **last days** to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. If that is the meaning, then Paul is prophesying in verses 1-9 and 13 about those days. If possible, translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])
+2TI	3	intro	k2cr			0		# 2 Timothy 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>Many scholars understand the **last days** to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return, which includes Paul’s time. If so, then what Paul teaches in this chapter about being persecuted applies to all believers. But some scholars understand the **last days** to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. If that is the meaning, then Paul is prophesying in verses 1-9 and 13 about those days. If possible, translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])
 2TI	3	1	g65r	figs-idiom	ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις	1	in the last days	Paul is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the period of time before the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2TI	3	1	n7gs	figs-explicit	ἐνστήσονται καιροὶ χαλεποί	1	there will be difficult times	The implication from what Paul goes on to say about people becoming ungodly and violent is that it will be difficult for believers in this time period. Alternate translation: “believers will face difficult situations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	3	2	p075	figs-gendernotations	οἱ ἄνθρωποι	1	men	Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2TI	3	17	nb12	figs-gendernotations	ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωπος	1	the man of God	Paul is using the word **man** here in a generic sense that includes all believers in God, whether male or female. Of course, Paul also intends for Timothy to apply this to himself. Alternate translation: “the person who serves God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 2TI	3	17	uu7i		ἄρτιος	1	proficient	Alternative translation: “fully capable”
 2TI	3	17	p099	figs-activepassive	ἐξηρτισμένος	1	equipped	If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and have everything he needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2TI	4	intro	k2xa			0		# 2 Timothy 04 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1-8)<br>2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9-18)<br>3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19-22)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “I adjure you”<br><br>With these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.<br><br>### Crown<br><br>Scripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth.
+2TI	4	intro	k2xa			0		# 2 Timothy 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1-8)<br>2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9-18)<br>3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19-22)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “I adjure you”<br><br>With these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.<br><br>### Crown<br><br>Scripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth.
 2TI	4	1	eh3x		διαμαρτύρομαι	1	I adjure you	The word translated **adjure** is used to place someone under a serious and binding obligation. Think about the words that you use to do this in your language. This could mean: (1) This refers to placing someone under an oath to do something. Alternate translation: “I place you under an oath” or “I hereby obligate you” (2) This refers to solemnly commanding someone with great authority. Alternate translation: “I solemnly urge you”
 2TI	4	1	cb15	figs-explicit	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	before God and Christ Jesus	Here the word **before** means “in front of,” that is, “in the presence of.” The implication is that God and Christ Jesus will witness and approve this command or oath. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God and Christ Jesus” or “with God and Christ Jesus as the witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2TI	4	1	u32g	figs-merism	ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς	1	the living and the dead	Paul refers to **the living** and **the dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])

en_tn_57-TIT.tsv

@@ -1,199 +1,199 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
-TIT	front	intro	m2jl			0		# Introduction to Titus<br><br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of Titus<br><br>1. Paul instructs Titus to appoint godly leaders. (1:1-16)<br>2. Paul instructs Titus to train people to live godly lives. (2:1-3:11)<br>3. Paul ends by sharing some of his plans and sending greetings to various believers. (3:12-15)<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of Titus?<br><br>Paul wrote the Book of Titus. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>### What is the Book of Titus about?<br><br>Paul wrote this letter to Titus, his fellow worker, who was leading the churches on the island of Crete. Paul instructed him about selecting church leaders. Paul also described how the believers should behave towards each other. He also encouraged them all to live in a way that pleases God.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Titus.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Titus” or “A Letter to Titus”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### In what roles can people serve within the church?<br><br>There are some teachings in the Book of Titus about whether a woman or divorced man can serve in positions of leadership within the church. Scholars disagree about the meaning of these teachings. Further study on these issues may be necessary before translating this book.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural **you**<br><br>In this book, the word **I** refers to Paul. Also, the word **you** is almost always singular and refers to Titus. The exception to this is 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### What is the meaning of **God our Savior**?<br><br>This is a common phrase in this letter. Paul meant to make the readers think about how God forgave them in Christ for sinning against him, and by forgiving them he saved them from being punished when he judges all people. A similar phrase in this letter is **our great God and Savior Jesus Christ**.
-TIT	1	intro	c7me			0		# Titus 01 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-4. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>In verses 6-9, Paul lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an elder in the church. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) Paul gives a similar list in 1 Timothy 3.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Elders<br><br>The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include overseer, elder, pastor, and bishop.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Should, may, must<br><br>The ULT uses different words that indicate requirements or obligations. These verbs have different levels of force associated with them. The subtle differences may be difficult to translate. The UST translates these verbs in a more general way.
-TIT	1	1	rtc9	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ πίστιν	1	for the faith	**Faith** is an abstract noun. Here it refers to believing or trusting in Jesus. If it is more clear in your language, you can translate it with a verb such as these, as in the UST. Alternate Translation: “to strengthen the faith” or “to help [God’s chosen people] to trust him more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-TIT	1	1	xyz8	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπίγνωσιν	1	the knowledge	Here, **knowledge** is an abstract noun. If it is clearer in your language, you can use a verb such as “to know,” as in the UST. Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-TIT	1	1	abc8	figs-abstractnouns	ἀληθείας	1	of the truth	Here, **truth** is an abstract noun. If it is clearer in your language, you can use an adjective phrase such as “what is true” or “the true message.” Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-TIT	1	1	fyf8	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς κατ’ εὐσέβειαν	1	that agrees with godliness	Here, **godliness** is an abstract noun that refers to living in a way that pleases God. Alternate Translation: “that is suitable for honoring God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-TIT	1	2	xyz9		ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ζωῆς αἰωνίου	1	with the certain hope of everlasting life	“that gives us the certain hope of everlasting life” or “based on our certain hope for everlasting life”
-TIT	1	2	r2gj		πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων	1	before all the ages of time	“before time began”
-TIT	1	3	b22h		καιροῖς ἰδίοις	1	at the right time	“at the proper time”
-TIT	1	3	swi9	figs-metaphor	ἐφανέρωσεν…τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	he revealed his word	Paul speaks of God’s word as if it were an object that could be visibly shown to people. Alternate translation: “He caused me to understand his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	1	3	abc9		ἐν κηρύγματι	1	by the proclamation	“through the proclamation of the message”
-TIT	1	3	m41u	figs-activepassive	ὃ ἐπιστεύθην ἐγὼ	1	that I was entrusted with	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he entrusted to me” or “he gave me the responsibility to preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-TIT	1	3	dpn4		τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	of God our Savior	“of God, who saves us”
-TIT	1	3	xy18	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	1	4	gu55	figs-metaphor	γνησίῳ τέκνῳ	1	a true son	Though Titus was not Paul’s biological **son**, they share a common faith in Christ. Paul considers relationship to Christ through faith to be more important than biological relationship. Thus, because of their relative ages and shared faith in Christ, Paul considers Titus as his own son. It may also be that Paul led Titus to faith in Christ, and so Titus is like a son in this spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “you are like a son to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	1	4	wx6c		κοινὴν πίστιν	1	our common faith	Paul and Titus both share the same faith in Christ. Alternate translation: “because we both believe in Christ”
-TIT	1	4	h93t	figs-ellipsis	χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη	1	Grace and peace	This was a common greeting Paul used. You can state clearly the understood information. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and inner peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-TIT	1	4	s3yr		Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν	1	Christ Jesus our Savior	“Christ Jesus who is our Savior”
-TIT	1	4	xy17	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	1	5	ew8h	grammar-connect-logic-goal	τούτου χάριν	1	For this purpose	The connecting phrase **For this purpose** introduces the goal that Paul wanted to accomplish when he left Titus in Crete (to ordain elders in the church). Alternate translation: “This is the reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-TIT	1	5	lh9b		ἀπέλιπόν σε ἐν Κρήτῃ	1	I left you in Crete	“I told you to stay in Crete”
-TIT	1	5	ga62		ἵνα τὰ λείποντα ἐπιδιορθώσῃ	1	that you might set in order things not yet complete	“so that you would finish arranging things that needed to be done”
-TIT	1	5	b52u		καταστήσῃς…πρεσβυτέρους	1	ordain elders	“appoint elders” or “designate elders”
-TIT	1	5	p56w		πρεσβυτέρους	1	elders	In the early Christian churches, Christian elders gave spiritual leadership to the assemblies of believers. This word refers to people who are mature in faith.
-TIT	1	6	wja4			0	Connecting Statement:	Having told Titus to ordain elders in every city on the island of Crete, Paul then gives the requirements for elders.
-TIT	1	6	jen8		εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἀνέγκλητος	1	if anyone is blameless	This is the beginning of the description of the character of an elder. Titus is to choose men who fit the following description. To be **blameless** is to be known as a person who does not do bad things. Alternate translation: “an elder must be without blame” or “an elder must not have a bad reputation”
-TIT	1	6	ab70	figs-doublenegatives	ἀνέγκλητος	1	blameless	To be **blameless** is to be known as a person who does not do bad things. Alternate translation: “without blame” You can state this positively: “a person who has a good reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-TIT	1	6	q6uy	figs-explicit	μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἀνήρ	1	the husband of one wife	This means that he has only one wife, that is, he does not have any other wives or concubines. This also means that he does not commit adultery and may also mean that he has not divorced a previous wife. Alternate translation: “a man who has only one woman” or “a man who is faithful to his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-TIT	1	6	wd6q		τέκνα…πιστά	1	faithful children	This could mean: (1) This refers to children who believe in Jesus. (2) This refers to children who are trustworthy.
-TIT	1	7	lz7x		τὸν ἐπίσκοπον	1	the overseer	This is another name for the same position of spiritual leadership that Paul referred to as **elder** in 1:5. This term focuses on the function of the elder: he oversees the activities and people of the church.
-TIT	1	7	g2zf	figs-metaphor	Θεοῦ οἰκονόμον	1	the household manager of God	Paul speaks of the church as if it were God’s household, and the overseer as if he were a servant in charge of managing that household. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	1	7	d6l1		μὴ πάροινον	1	not addicted to wine	“not an alcoholic” or “not one who drinks much wine”
-TIT	1	7	j1qq		μὴ πλήκτην	1	not a brawler	“not one who is violent” or “not one who likes to fight”
-TIT	1	8	i549	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Instead	The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast between the things an elder is not to be (that Paul already stated), and the things an elder is to be (which Paul is about to state). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-TIT	1	8	vkq1		φιλάγαθον	1	a friend of what is good	“a person who loves to do good”
-TIT	1	8	xy11	figs-doublet	σώφρονα…ἐγκρατῆ	1	sensible … and self-controlled	These two terms are very similar in meaning and may be translated by one term if the target language does not have two similar terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-TIT	1	8	xy12	figs-doublet	δίκαιον, ὅσιον	1	righteous, holy	These two terms are very similar in meaning and may be translated by one term if the target language does not have two similar terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-TIT	1	9	xwy6	figs-metaphor	ἀντεχόμενον	1	He must hold tightly to	Paul speaks of devotion to the Christian faith as if it were grasping the faith with one’s hands. Alternate translation: “He must be devoted to” or “He should know well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	1	9	xy10		κατὰ τὴν διδαχὴν	1	that is in accordance with the teaching	“that agrees with the things that we taught him”
-TIT	1	9	abcj	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	so that	The connecting words **so that** introduce a goal or purpose relationship. The purpose for the elder to hold tightly to the trustworthy message is for him to be able to encourage others and rebuke those who oppose him. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-TIT	1	9	pzi1		τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ	1	sound teaching	The Greek word rendered at **sound** normally refers to physical health. Paul speaks of this teaching as if it would cause those who believe it to be spiritually healthy, rather than spiritually sick.
-TIT	1	10	xsq9			0	Connecting Statement:	Because of those that would oppose God’s word, Paul gives Titus reasons to preach God’s word and warns him about false teachers.
-TIT	1	10	w9kk	figs-metaphor	ἀνυπότακτοι, ματαιολόγοι	1	rebellious, empty talkers	These are rebellious people who do not obey the gospel message. Here, **empty** is a metaphor for useless, and **empty talkers** are people who say useless or foolish things. Alternate translation: “who refuse to obey and who say useless things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	1	10	ga6n		φρεναπάται	1	deceivers	This phrase describes people who are actively trying to convince people to believe in something other than the true gospel that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “people who persuade others to believe things that are not true”
-TIT	1	10	abcd	figs-hendiadys	ματαιολόγοι, καὶ φρεναπάται	1	empty talkers and deceivers	Both **empty talkers** and **deceivers** refer to the same people. They taught false, worthless things and wanted people to believe them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-TIT	1	10	pu74	figs-metonymy	οἱ ἐκ τῆς περιτομῆς	1	those from the circumcision	This refers to the Jewish Christians who taught that men must be circumcised in order to follow Christ. This teaching is false. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-TIT	1	11	f4iy		οὓς δεῖ ἐπιστομίζειν	1	It is necessary to stop them	“You must prevent them from spreading their teachings” or “Someone must stop them from influencing others by their words”
-TIT	1	11	aqi5		ὅλους οἴκους ἀνατρέπουσιν	1	are upsetting whole households	“are ruining entire families.” The issue was that they were leading families away from the truth and destroying their faith.
-TIT	1	11	tw4e		διδάσκοντες ἃ μὴ δεῖ	1	teaching what they should not	These are things that are not proper to teach regarding Christ and the Law because they are not true.
-TIT	1	11	at7c		αἰσχροῦ κέρδους χάριν	1	for the sake of shameful profit	This refers to profit that people make by doing things that are not honorable.
-TIT	1	12	tr1j		τις ἐξ αὐτῶν, ἴδιος αὐτῶν προφήτης	1	One of them, of their own prophets	“A Cretan that they themselves consider to be a prophet”
-TIT	1	12	y3zb	figs-hyperbole	Κρῆτες ἀεὶ ψεῦσται	1	Cretans are always liars	“Cretans lie all the time”. This is an exaggeration that means that Cretans had a reputation to be liars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-TIT	1	12	h3jb	figs-metaphor	κακὰ θηρία	1	evil beasts	This metaphor compares the Cretans to dangerous wild animals. Alternate translation: “as dangerous as wild animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	1	12	xyz1	figs-synecdoche	γαστέρες ἀργαί	1	lazy bellies	The part of the body that stores food is used to represent the person who eats all the time. Alternate translation: “lazy gluttons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-TIT	1	13	fif8		δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν ἔλεγχε αὐτοὺς ἀποτόμως	1	For this reason, rebuke them severely	“For that reason, you must use strong language that the Cretans will understand when you correct them”
-TIT	1	13	abck	grammar-connect-logic-result	δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν	1	For this reason	The connecting words **For this reason** introduce a reason-result relationship. The reason is that what the Cretan prophet said about his people is true (they are liars, evil, and lazy), and the result is that Titus should rebuke them severely. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-TIT	1	13	je3r		ἵνα ὑγιαίνωσιν ἐν τῇ πίστει	1	so that they may be sound in the faith	See note on **sound** in [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1). Alternate translation: “so they will have a healthy faith” or “so their faith may be true” or “so that they believe only what is true about God”
-TIT	1	13	abcl	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα	1	so that	The connecting words **so that** introduce a reason-result relationship. The reason is the elder rebukes the Cretans severely, and the result is the Cretans become sound in the faith. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-TIT	1	13	xyz2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ πίστει	1	in the faith	Here the abstract noun **faith** represents the things that the people believe about God. Alternate translation: “in what they believe about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-TIT	1	14	abcm	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	μὴ	1	not	The connecting word **not** introduces a contrast to being “sound in the faith” in the previous verse. In order to be sound in the faith, the people must not pay any attention to the Jewish myths or the commands of people who do not follow the truth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-TIT	1	14	p28i		Ἰουδαϊκοῖς μύθοις	1	to Jewish myths	This refers to the false teaching of the Jews.
-TIT	1	14	m4a5	figs-metaphor	ἀποστρεφομένων τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1	who turn away from the truth	Paul speaks of the truth as if it were an object that one could turn away from or avoid. Alternate translation: “who reject the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	1	15	qtb9		πάντα καθαρὰ τοῖς καθαροῖς	1	All things are pure to those who are pure	“If people are pure on the inside, everything that they do will be pure” or “When people have only good thoughts, nothing that they do will offend God”
-TIT	1	15	nx42		τοῖς καθαροῖς	1	to those who are pure	“to those who are acceptable to God”
-TIT	1	15	abcn	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast between people who are pure and people who are corrupt and unbelieving. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-TIT	1	15	n3wk	figs-metaphor	τοῖς…μεμιαμμένοις καὶ ἀπίστοις, οὐδὲν καθαρόν	2	to those who are corrupt and unbelieving, nothing is pure	Paul speaks of sinners as if they were physically dirty. Alternate translation: “if people are morally defiled and do not believe, they cannot do anything pure” or “when people are full of sin and unbelief, nothing that they do is acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	1	16	abco	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	but	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast between what these corrupt people say (they know God) and what their actions show (they do not know God). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-TIT	1	16	i3l2		τοῖς…ἔργοις ἀρνοῦνται	1	they deny him by their actions	“how they live proves that they do not know him”
-TIT	1	16	ja47		βδελυκτοὶ ὄντες	1	They are detestable	“They are disgusting”
-TIT	2	intro	h3il			0		# Titus 02 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Gender roles<br><br>Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.<br><br>### Slavery<br><br>Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches slaves to faithfully serve their masters. He teaches all believers to be godly and live rightly in every situation.
-TIT	2	1	lfu1			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues giving Titus reasons to preach God’s word, and explains how the older men, older women, young men, and slaves or servants should live as believers.
-TIT	2	1	tpi2	figs-explicit	σὺ δὲ	1	But you	Here, **you** is singular and refers to Titus. If it is helpful, you can include the name “Titus” here as in the UST ([[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-TIT	2	1	ph2j		τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ διδασκαλίᾳ	1	with sound teaching	See the note on [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1). Alternate translation: “with sound doctrine” or “with correct teachings”
-TIT	2	2	xyz3	figs-ellipsis	πρεσβύτας…εἶναι	1	Older men are to be	The Greek does not have **are**, but only “Older men to be.” We need to supply a verb here, drawing from the idea of **speak** in the previous verse, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “Teach older men to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-TIT	2	2	xy13	figs-doublet	νηφαλίους…σεμνούς, σώφρονας	1	temperate, dignified, sensible	These three words are very close in meaning and may be combined into one or two terms if the target language does not have three separate terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-TIT	2	2	xc6t		νηφαλίους	1	temperate	“sober-minded” or “self-controlled”
-TIT	2	2	y3j2		εἶναι…σώφρονας	1	to be … sensible	“to … control their desires”
-TIT	2	2	abc1		ὑγιαίνοντας τῇ πίστει	1	sound in faith	Here the word **sound** means to be firm and unwavering. See the note about **sound** on [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1) and the note about **sound in faith** on [Titus 1:13](../01/13/je3r).
-TIT	2	2	m14y	figs-abstractnouns	ὑγιαίνοντας τῇ πίστει	1	sound in faith	You can state the abstract noun **faith** as a verb if that is more clear in your language. Alternate translation: “firmly believe the true teachings about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-TIT	2	2	z14y	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀγάπῃ	1	in love	You can state the abstract noun **love** as a verb if that is more clear in your language. Alternate translation: “truly love others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-TIT	2	2	a14y	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ὑπομονῇ	1	and in perseverance	You can state the abstract noun **perseverance** as a verb if that is more clear in your language. Alternate translation: “and continually serve God even when things are difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-TIT	2	3	gl8e	figs-ellipsis	πρεσβύτιδας ὡσαύτως	1	Older women likewise are to be	The Greek does not have **are to be**, but only “older women likewise.” We need to continue the verbal idea from the previous two verses and apply that here, as well, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “In the same way, teach older women” or “Also teach older women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-TIT	2	3	v9cp		διαβόλους	1	slanderers	This word refers to people who say bad things about other people whether they are true or not.
-TIT	2	3	g9re	figs-metaphor	οἴνῳ πολλῷ δεδουλωμένας	1	enslaved to much wine	People who cannot control themselves and drink too much wine are spoken of as if they were a slave to the wine. Alternate translation: “controlled by their desire for wine” or “addicted to wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	2	3	xyz4	figs-activepassive	οἴνῳ πολλῷ δεδουλωμένας	1	enslaved to much wine	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “drinking too much wine” or “addicted to wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-TIT	2	3	abc4		καλοδιδασκάλους	1	but to be teachers of what is good	The Greek word used here means “a teacher of what is good”. The phrase **but to be** has been added in the English to contrast this good quality with the two preceding bad qualities. Consider if you need to use a similar word to make a contrast between the good and bad qualities.
-TIT	2	4	abc5		φιλάνδρους	1	lovers of their husbands	“lovers of their own husbands”
-TIT	2	4	abca		φιλοτέκνους	1	and lovers of their children	“and lovers of their own children”
-TIT	2	5	abcb		ὑποτασσομένας τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν	1	and subject to their own husbands	“and to obey their own husbands”
-TIT	2	5	t5v6	figs-metonymy	ἵνα μὴ ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ βλασφημῆται	1	so that the word of God may not be insulted	Here, **word** is a metonym for “message”, which in turn is a metonym for God himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-TIT	2	5	abcq	figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ βλασφημῆται	1	so that the word of God may not be insulted	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that no one insults the word of God” or “so that no one insults God by saying bad things about his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-TIT	2	6	i3hv		ὡσαύτως	1	In the same way	Titus was to train the younger men just as he was to train the older people.
-TIT	2	7	x73u		σεαυτὸν παρεχόμενος	1	present yourself	“show yourself to be” or “you yourself must be”
-TIT	2	7	ym6x		τύπον καλῶν ἔργων	1	as an example of good works	“as an example of one who does right and proper things”
-TIT	2	8	xy14		ὑγιῆ	1	sound	This word **sound** has the same basic meaning as “uncorrupted” in 2:7. In 2:7, Paul states the meaning negatively: “uncorrupted,” meaning, “without error,” and in 2:8 he states the meaning positively: **sound**, meaning “correct.” Both terms refer to Titus’s teaching. Use either positive or negative terms in the target language, or use one term with this meaning in both places if it is difficult to use two terms.
-TIT	2	8	xt6v	figs-hypo	ἵνα ὁ ἐξ ἐναντίας ἐντραπῇ	1	so that the opponent may be ashamed	This presents a hypothetical situation in which someone opposes Titus and then becomes ashamed for having done so. Alternate translation: “so that if anyone opposes you, he may be ashamed” or “so that when people oppose you, they may be ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-TIT	2	8	xy15	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	us	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	2	9	xyz5	figs-ellipsis	δούλους ἰδίοις δεσπόταις ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1	Slaves are to be subject to their own masters	The Greek does not have **are**, but only “slaves to be subject to their masters.” We need to apply the verbal idea from verse 6 to here, which is “urge” or “exhort.” Alternate translation: “Exhort slaves to be subject to their masters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-TIT	2	9	abcc		ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1	are to be subject	“must obey”
-TIT	2	9	if6v		ἐν πᾶσιν	1	in everything	“in every situation” or “always”
-TIT	2	9	id15		εὐαρέστους εἶναι	1	to be pleasing	“to please their masters” or “to satisfy their masters”
-TIT	2	10	abc6		μὴ νοσφιζομένους	1	not to steal	“not to steal from their masters”
-TIT	2	10	t87j		πᾶσαν πίστιν ἐνδεικνυμένους ἀγαθήν	1	to demonstrate all good faith	“to show that they are worthy of their masters’ trust”
-TIT	2	10	h2n6		ἐν πᾶσιν	1	in every way	“in everything they do”
-TIT	2	10	f8jy		τὴν διδασκαλίαν τὴν τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ, κοσμῶσιν	1	they may bring credit to the teaching that is about God our Savior	“they may make the teaching about God our Savior attractive” or “they may cause people to understand that the teaching about God our Savior is good”
-TIT	2	10	pn93		Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	God our Savior	“our God who saves us”
-TIT	2	10	xy16	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	Here, **our** is inclusive of Paul, Titus, and all Christians (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	2	11	y44u			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul encourages Titus to look for Jesus’ coming and remember his authority through Jesus.
-TIT	2	11	gp2z	figs-personification	ἐπεφάνη…ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the grace of God has appeared	Paul speaks of the grace of God as if it were a person who has arrived. See the UST for other ways to express this. Alternate translation: “God is now offering his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-TIT	2	12	qy8k	figs-personification	παιδεύουσα ἡμᾶς	1	training us	Paul speaks of the grace of God (2:11) as if it were a person who trains other people how to live holy lives. Alternate translation: “by which God trains us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-TIT	2	12	abce	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	us	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	2	12	lxb3		τὴν ἀσέβειαν	1	godlessness	“things that dishonor God”
-TIT	2	12	n3k5		τὰς κοσμικὰς ἐπιθυμίας	1	worldly passions	“strong desires for the things of this world” or “strong desires for sinful pleasures”
-TIT	2	12	xy19		ἀσέβειαν…εὐσεβῶς	1	godlessness … godly way	These terms are direct opposites, meaning “God-dishonoring” and “God-honoring,” respectively.
-TIT	2	12	fk8j		ἐν τῷ νῦν αἰῶνι	1	in the present age	“while we live in this world” or “during this time”
-TIT	2	13	rz93		προσδεχόμενοι	1	while we look forward to receiving	**while we wait to welcome**
-TIT	2	13	xyz6	figs-metonymy	τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα	1	the blessed hope	Here what is **blessed** is that for which we hope, which is the return of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the wonderful thing for which we hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-TIT	2	13	pss7	figs-metonymy	καὶ ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δόξης τοῦ μεγάλου Θεοῦ καὶ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	and appearing of the glory of our great God and Savior Jesus Christ	Here, **glory** represents Jesus himself who will appear gloriously. Alternate translation: “that is, the glorious appearance of our great God and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-TIT	2	13	abcf	figs-hendiadys	τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα, καὶ ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δόξης	1	the blessed hope and appearing of the glory	Both **blessed hope** and **appearing of the glory** refer to the same event. This can be shown clearly. Alternate translation: “what we are longing for, the blessed and glorious appearing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-TIT	2	13	xyz7	figs-hendiadys	τοῦ μεγάλου Θεοῦ καὶ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	of our great God and Savior Jesus Christ	Both **our great God** and **Savior** refer to the one person, Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ, our great God and Savior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-TIT	2	14	niu4	figs-explicit	ἔδωκεν ἑαυτὸν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν	1	gave himself for us	This refers to Jesus dying willingly. Alternate translation: “gave himself to die for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-TIT	2	14	xy20	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	us	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	2	14	gxe7	figs-metaphor	λυτρώσηται ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἀνομίας	1	to redeem us from all lawlessness	Paul speaks of Jesus as if he were setting slaves free from their evil master. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	2	14	xy21	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	us	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	2	14	fjy1		λαὸν περιούσιον	1	a special people	“a group of people that he treasures”
-TIT	2	14	ii18		ζηλωτὴν καλῶν ἔργων	1	zealous for good works	“who are eager to do good deeds”
-TIT	2	15	abc7		παρακάλει	1	exhort	“encourage them to do these things”
-TIT	2	15	b94z	figs-explicit	ἔλεγχε, μετὰ πάσης ἐπιταγῆς	1	rebuke with all authority	If it is helpful, the people whom Titus should correct can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “correct with all authority those people who do not do these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-TIT	2	15	h15y		μηδείς σου περιφρονείτω	1	Let no one disregard you	“Do not allow anyone to ignore you”
-TIT	2	15	xy22	figs-doublenegatives	μηδείς σου περιφρονείτω	1	Let no one disregard you	You can state this positively: “Make sure that everyone listens to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-TIT	2	15	jbu1	figs-explicit	σου περιφρονείτω	1	Let … disregard you	The way that people would disregard Titus can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “Let … refuse to listen to your words” or “Let … refuse to respect you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-TIT	3	intro	zh6x			0		# Titus 03 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul gives Titus personal instructions in this chapter.<br><br>Verse 15 formally concludes this letter. This is a common way of ending a letter in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Genealogies<br><br>Genealogies (verse 9) are lists that record a person’s ancestors or descendants, and show from what tribe and family a person came. For example, priests came from the tribe of Levi and the family of Aaron. Some of these lists included stories of ancestors and even of spiritual beings. These lists and stories were used to argue about where things came from and about how important various people were.
-TIT	3	1	y9tr			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues giving Titus instructions on how to teach the elders and people under his care in Crete.
-TIT	3	1	j2sa		ὑπομίμνῃσκε αὐτοὺς…ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1	Remind them to submit	“Tell our people again what they already know, to submit” or “Keep reminding them to submit”
-TIT	3	1	w3fy		ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις, ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν	1	to submit to rulers and authorities, to obey them	“to do as the political rulers and government authorities say by obeying them”
-TIT	3	1	wa9x	figs-doublet	ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις	1	to rulers and authorities	These words have similar meanings and both refer to anyone who holds authority in the government. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-TIT	3	1	xy25	figs-doublet	ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν	1	to submit … to obey them	These words have similar meanings and both refer to doing what someone tells you to do. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-TIT	3	1	in7u		πρὸς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἑτοίμους εἶναι	1	be ready for every good work	“be ready to do good whenever there is opportunity”
-TIT	3	2	lug7		βλασφημεῖν	1	to revile	“to speak evil of”
-TIT	3	2	abcx	figs-doublenegatives	ἀμάχους εἶναι	1	to be uncontentious	You can state this positively: “to be peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-TIT	3	3	m9zd		ἦμεν γάρ ποτε καὶ ἡμεῖς	1	For once we also were	“This is because we ourselves were once”
-TIT	3	3	me7b		ποτε	1	once	“formerly” or “at some time” or “previously”
-TIT	3	3	bl8e	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	“even we” or “we ourselves” This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians, referring to the time before they trusted in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	3	3	rrx9		ἦμεν…ἀνόητοι	1	were foolish	“were thoughtless” or “were unwise”
-TIT	3	3	qt8f	figs-personification	πλανώμενοι, δουλεύοντες ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ἡδοναῖς ποικίλαις	1	We were led astray and enslaved by various passions and pleasures	Passion and pleasure are spoken of as if they were masters over people and had made those people into slaves by lying to them. Alternate translation: “We had allowed ourselves to believe the lie that various passions and pleasures could make us happy, and then we were unable to control our feelings or stop doing things we thought would give us pleasure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-TIT	3	3	xy27	figs-activepassive	πλανώμενοι, δουλεύοντες ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ἡδοναῖς ποικίλαις	1	We were led astray and enslaved by various passions and pleasures	You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “Various passions and pleasures had lied to us and so led us astray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-TIT	3	3	tl5n		ἐπιθυμίαις	1	passions	“lusts” or “desires”
-TIT	3	3	dec4		ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ διάγοντες	1	We lived in evil and envy	Here, **evil** and **envy** describe sin. The word **evil** is general and **envy** is a specific kind of sin. Alternate translation: “We were always doing evil things and wanting what others have”
-TIT	3	3	y5lp		στυγητοί	1	detestable	“causing others to hate us”
-TIT	3	4	xy28	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	It is important to mark the contrast here between the evil way that people are (verses 1-3) and the goodness of God (verses 4-7) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-TIT	3	4	ba5a	figs-personification	ὅτε…ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared	Paul speaks of God’s kindness and love as if they were people that came into our sight. Alternate translation: “when God our Savior showed us his kindness and love for people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-TIT	3	4	abcg	figs-abstractnouns	ὅτε…ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared	You can state the abstract nouns **kindness** and **love** as adjectives. Alternate translation: “when God, who saves us, showed how kind and loving he would be to mankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-TIT	3	4	abch	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	3	5	n4ug		κατὰ τὸ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος	1	by his mercy	“because he had mercy on us”
-TIT	3	5	k1a6	figs-metaphor	λουτροῦ παλινγενεσίας	1	the washing of new birth	Paul combines two metaphors here. He is speaking of God’s forgiveness for sinners as if he were physically washing them clean from their sin. He is also speaking of sinners who become responsive to God as if they had been born again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	3	6	fby9	figs-metaphor	οὗ ἐξέχεεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς πλουσίως	1	whom God richly poured on us	It is common for New Testament writers to speak of the Holy Spirit as a liquid that God can pour out in large amounts. Alternate translation: “whom God gave to us generously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	3	6	xy24	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	us	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	3	6	q9ze		διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν	1	through our Savior Jesus Christ	“when Jesus Christ saved us”
-TIT	3	6	xy23	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	3	7	di3g	figs-activepassive	δικαιωθέντες	1	having been justified	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “since God has declared us to be without sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-TIT	3	7	q1cm	figs-metaphor	κληρονόμοι γενηθῶμεν, κατ’ ἐλπίδα ζωῆς αἰωνίου	1	we might become heirs according to the certain hope of everlasting life	The people to whom God has made promises are spoken of as if they were to inherit the things promised, just as a person inherits property or possessions from a family member. Alternate translation: “we might expect to receive the eternal life that God has promised us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	3	8	j8md		ὁ λόγος	1	This message	This message is the one just expressed in verses 4-7, that God freely gives the Holy Spirit and eternal life to believers through Jesus.
-TIT	3	8	xy29		τούτων	1	these things	This refers to the teachings that Paul has talked about in verses 1-7. Alternate translation: “these teachings that I have just talked about”
-TIT	3	8	kqm6		φροντίζωσιν καλῶν ἔργων, προΐστασθαι	1	may be careful to engage themselves in good works	“may seek to do good works”
-TIT	3	9	tzh9			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul explains what Titus should avoid and how to treat those who cause contention among the believers.
-TIT	3	9	j1hf		δὲ…περιΐστασο	1	But avoid	“So avoid” or “Therefore, avoid”
-TIT	3	9	xnf9		μωρὰς…ζητήσεις	1	foolish debates	“arguments concerning unimportant matters”
-TIT	3	9	qk66		γενεαλογίας	1	genealogies	This is the study of family kinship relationships. See the Introduction to Titus.
-TIT	3	9	xu7f		ἔρεις	1	strife	arguments or fights
-TIT	3	9	ky3n		νομικὰς	1	about the law	“about the law of Moses”
-TIT	3	10	x3fh		αἱρετικὸν ἄνθρωπον…παραιτοῦ	1	Reject a divisive person	“Stay away from a person who causes division”
-TIT	3	10	xzx1		μετὰ μίαν καὶ δευτέραν νουθεσίαν	1	after one or two warnings	“after you have warned that person once or twice”
-TIT	3	11	r7pc		ὁ τοιοῦτος	1	such a person	“a person like that”
-TIT	3	11	inh5	figs-metaphor	ἐξέστραπται	1	has turned from the right way	Paul speaks of someone who chooses to do wrong things as if he were leaving the right path to walk in the wrong direction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	3	11	p81k		ὢν αὐτοκατάκριτος	1	being self-condemned	“bringing judgment on himself”
-TIT	3	12	z7i4			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul closes the letter by telling Titus what to do after he appoints elders in Crete and by giving greetings from those with him.
-TIT	3	12	mba6		ὅταν πέμψω	1	When I send	“After I send”
-TIT	3	12	c32w	translate-names	Ἀρτεμᾶν…Τυχικόν	1	Artemas … Tychicus	These are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-TIT	3	12	knt1		σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν	1	hurry to come	“come quickly”
-TIT	3	12	xy30		σπούδασον	1	hurry	The verb is singular and directed at Titus alone. Artemas or Tychicus would stay in Crete, probably to take Titus’ place.
-TIT	3	12	gdw9		παραχειμάσαι	1	to spend the winter	“to stay for the winter”
-TIT	3	13	a46f	translate-names	Ζηνᾶν…Ἀπολλῶν	1	Zenas … Appollos	These are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-TIT	3	13	s757		καὶ Ἀπολλῶν	1	and Apollos	“and also Apollos”
-TIT	3	13	j496		σπουδαίως πρόπεμψον	1	Diligently send on their way	“Do not delay in sending”
-TIT	3	13	xy31	figs-doublenegatives	ἵνα μηδὲν αὐτοῖς λείπῃ	1	so that they lack nothing	You can state this positively: “so that they have everything that they need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-TIT	3	14	v7wg			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul explains that it is important for all believers to provide for those who have needs.
-TIT	3	14	fw98		οἱ ἡμέτεροι	1	our own	Paul is referring to the believers in Crete. Alternate translation: “our own people”
-TIT	3	14	xy33	figs-exclusive	οἱ ἡμέτεροι	1	our own	Here, **our** includes Paul and Titus. The form should be either dual or inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	3	14	tn24		εἰς τὰς ἀναγκαίας χρείας	1	toward essential needs	“that enable them to help people who lack necessary things”
-TIT	3	14	mji4	figs-metaphor	ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι	1	in order not to be unfruitful	Paul speaks of people doing good work as if they were trees bearing good fruit. Alternate translation: “so that they will not lead useless lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-TIT	3	14	xy32	figs-doublenegatives	ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι	1	in order not to be unfruitful	You can state this positively: “in this way they will be fruitful” or “in this way they will be productive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-TIT	3	15	j3y2			0	General Information:	Paul ends his letter to Titus.
-TIT	3	15	abci		ἀσπάζονταί σε	1	greet you	Here, **you** is singular–this is a personal greeting to Titus.
-TIT	3	15	k1sa		οἱ μετ’ ἐμοῦ πάντες	1	All those who are with me	“All the people who are with me” or “All of the believers who are here with me”
-TIT	3	15	f4vc		τοὺς φιλοῦντας ἡμᾶς ἐν πίστει	1	those who love us in faith	Possible meanings are: (1) “the believers who love us” (2) “the believers who love us because we share the same belief”.
-TIT	3	15	xy35	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	us	Here, **us** is probably exclusive and refers to Paul and the group of Christians with him. Paul is sending greetings from this group to the group of Christians that is with Titus on Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-TIT	3	15	kx83		ἡ χάρις μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν	1	Grace be with all of you	This was a common Christian greeting. Alternate translation: “May God’s grace be with you” or “I ask that God will be gracious to all of you”
-TIT	3	15	xy34		ὑμῶν	1	of you	Here, **you** is plural. This blessing is for Titus and all of the believers there in Crete.
+TIT	front	intro	m2jl			0		# Introduction à Tite<br><br>## 1e partie : Introduction générale<br><br>### Aperçu du livre de Tite<br><br>1. Paul ordonne à Tite de nommer des chefs pieux. (1:1-16)<br>2. Paul ordonne à Tite de former les gens à vivre une vie pieuse. (2:1-3:11)<br>3. Paul termine en partageant certains de ses plans et en envoyant des salutations à divers croyants. (3:12-15)<br><br>### Qui a écrit le Livre de Tite ?<br><br>Paul a écrit le livre de Tite. Paul était de la ville de Tarse. Il avait été connu sous le nom de Saul au début de sa vie. Avant de devenir chrétien, Paul était un pharisien. Il a persécuté les Chrétiens. Après être devenu chrétien, il a voyagé plusieurs fois à travers l’Empire Romain pour parler de Jésus aux gens.<br><br>### De quoi parle le Livre de Tite ?<br><br>Paul a écrit cette lettre à Titus, son compagnon de travail, qui dirigeait les églises de l’île de Crète. Paul l’a instruit sur la sélection des dirigeants de l’église. Paul a également décrit comment les croyants devraient se comporter les uns envers les autres. Il les a tous encouragés à vivre d’une manière qui plaît à Dieu.<br><br>### Comment traduire le titre de ce livre ?<br><br>Les traducteurs peuvent choisir d’appeler ce livre par son titre traditionnel, « Tite ». Ou bien, ils peuvent choisir un titre plus clair, comme “Lettre de Paul à Tite” ou “Une lettre à Tite”. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Deuxième partie : Concepts religieux et culturels importants<br><br>### Dans quels rôles les gens peuvent-ils servir au sein de l’Église ?<br><br>Il y a quelques enseignements dans le Livre de Tite sur la question de savoir si une femme ou un homme divorcé peut occuper des postes de direction au sein de l’église. Les érudits sont en désaccord sur le sens de ces enseignements. Une étude plus approfondie de ces questions pourrait être nécessaire avant de traduire ce livre.<br><br>## 3e partie : Problèmes importants de traduction<br><br>### Le singulier et le pluriel du pronom personnel de la 2e personne<br><br>Dans ce livre, le mot “Je” fait référence à Paul. Mais le mot “tu” est presque toujours au singulier et fait référence à Tite. Une exception est notée à 3:15. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### Que signifie **Dieu notre Sauveur** ?<br><br>C’est une expression courante dans cette lettre. Paul voulait faire réfléchir les lecteurs sur la façon dont Dieu leur a pardonné en Christ d’avoir péché contre lui, et en leur pardonnant, il les a sauvés de la punition qui viendra lorsqu’il jugera tout le monde. Une expression semblable dans cette lettre est **notre grand Dieu et Sauveur Jésus-Christ**.
+TIT	1	intro	c7me			0		# Tite 1. Notes génerales<br><br>## Structure et forme<br><br>Paul introduit formellement cette lettre dans les versets 1-4. Les écrivains commençaient souvent des lettres de cette façon dans l’ancien Proche-Orient.<br><br>Aux versets 6-9, Paul énumère plusieurs qualités qu’un homme doit avoir s’il veut être un ancien dans l’église (Voir : rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) Paul donne une liste comparable dans 1 Timothée 3.<br><br>## Concepts spéciaux de ce chapitre<br><br>### Ancien<br><br>L’église a utilisé des titres divers pour ses dirigeants. Quelques-uns de ces titres comprennent surveillant, ancien, pasteur et évêque.<br><br>## Autres difficultés de traduction possibles dans ce chapitre<br><br>### Devrait, peut, doit<br><br>Le GLT utilise des mots différents qui indiquent des exigences ou des obligations. Ces verbes ont des niveaux de force différents auxquels ils sont associés. Ces différences subtiles pourraient être difficiles à traduire. Le GST traduit ces verbes de manière plus générale.
+TIT	1	1	rtc9	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ πίστιν	1	for the faith	**La foi** est un nom abstrait. Ici, il s’agit de croire ou de faire confiance à Jésus. Si c’est plus clair dans votre langue, vous pouvez le traduire avec un verbe comme ceux-ci, comme dans l’UST. Traductions alternatives : “pour renforcer la foi” ou “aider \[le peuple élu de Dieu\] à lui faire davantage confiance” (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+TIT	1	1	xyz8	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπίγνωσιν	1	the knowledge	La \*\*connaissance\*\* est un nom abstrait. Si c’est plus clair dans votre langue, vous pouvez utiliser un verbe tel que “connaître”, comme dans le GST. Paul veut que les gens connaissent le vrai message au sujet de Dieu et de Christ afin qu’ils puissent vivre d’une manière qui plaise à Dieu. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+TIT	1	1	abc8	figs-abstractnouns	ἀληθείας	1	of the truth	La **vérité** est un nom abstrait. Si c’est plus clair dans votre langue, vous pouvez utiliser l’adjectif “vrai” comme dans les expressions “ce qui est vrai” ou “le vrai message”. Paul veut que les gens connaissent le vrai message au sujet de Dieu et de Christ afin qu’ils puissent vivre d’une manière qui plaise à Dieu. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+TIT	1	1	fyf8	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς κατ’ εὐσέβειαν	1	that agrees with godliness	La **piété** est un nom abstrait qui fait référence à une mode de vie qui plaît à Dieu. Traduction alternative : “qui convient pour honorer Dieu” (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+TIT	1	2	xyz9		ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ζωῆς αἰωνίου	1	with the certain hope of everlasting life	“qui nous donne l’espérance solide de la vie éternelle” ou “basé sur notre espérance de la vie éternelle”
+TIT	1	2	r2gj		πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων	1	before all the ages of time	“avant le début du temps”
+TIT	1	3	b22h		καιροῖς ἰδίοις	1	at the right time	D'autres traductions pourraient être, “en son temps”, “au moment approprié”, “au moment fixé”, “au temps propice”
+TIT	1	3	swi9	figs-metaphor	ἐφανέρωσεν…τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	he revealed his word	Paul parle de la parole de Dieu comme si c’était un objet qui pouvait être visiblement montré aux gens. Traduction alternative : “Il m’a fait comprendre son message” (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	1	3	abc9		ἐν κηρύγματι	1	by the proclamation	“par la proclamation du message”
+TIT	1	3	m41u	figs-activepassive	ὃ ἐπιστεύθην ἐγὼ	1	that I was entrusted with	Vous pouvez le dire à la voix active. Traductions alternatives : “il m’a fait confiance du message “ ou “il m’a confié la responsabilité de prêcher”  (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+TIT	1	3	dpn4		τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	of God our Savior	Traduction alternative : “de Dieu, qui nous sauve”
+TIT	1	3	xy18	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	Paul, Tite et tous les chrétiens sont inclus. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+TIT	1	4	gu55	figs-metaphor	γνησίῳ τέκνῳ	1	a true son	Tite n’était pas le fils biologique de Paul, mais ils partageaient une foi commune en Christ. Paul considère que la relation avec Christ par la foi est plus importante que la relation biologique. Donc, à cause de leurs âges relatifs et de la foi qu’ils partageaient en Christ, Paul considère Tite comme son propre fils. Il se peut aussi que Paul ait conduit Tite à la foi en Christ, et ainsi Tite est comme un fils dans le sens spirituel. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	1	4	wx6c		κοινὴν πίστιν	1	our common faith	Paul et Tite partagent la même foi dans le Christ.
+TIT	1	4	h93t	figs-ellipsis	χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη	1	Grace and peace	C’était une salutation courante que Paul utilisait. Vous pouvez indiquer clairement les informations comprises. Traduction alternative : "Que tu puisses ressentir la bonté et la paix intérieure…" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+TIT	1	4	s3yr		Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν	1	Christ Jesus our Savior	“Jésus Christ qui est notre Sauveur”
+TIT	1	4	xy17	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	Paul, Tite et tous les chrétiens sont inclus. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+TIT	1	5	ew8h	grammar-connect-logic-goal	τούτου χάριν	1	For this purpose	La phrase de connexion **Pour cette raison** introduit le but que Paul voulait accomplir lorsqu’il a laissé Tite en Crète (pour ordonner des anciens dans l’église), et l'expression "Tu sais pourquoi" dans le GST confirme que Tite savait ce que Paul voulait qu'il fasse : Finir le travail et ordonner des anciens. Traduction alternative: “C’est la raison” (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+TIT	1	5	lh9b		ἀπέλιπόν σε ἐν Κρήτῃ	1	I left you in Crete	“Je t’ai dit de rester en Crète”
+TIT	1	5	ga62		ἵνα τὰ λείποντα ἐπιδιορθώσῃ	1	that you might set in order things not yet complete	L'instruction de Paul "pour que tu finisses le travail qui reste inachevé" pourrait être reformulée de manière positive comme “afin que tu finisses d’organiser les choses qui doivent encore être complétées”, si ce serait plus naturel dans votre langue.
+TIT	1	5	b52u		καταστήσῃς…πρεσβυτέρους	1	ordain elders	Les instructions de Paul que Tite établisse des anciens implique quíl doit non seulement  "choisir ou désigner des anciens” mais aussi "les ordonner et les placer en poste".
+TIT	1	5	p56w		πρεσβυτέρους	1	elders	Dans les premières églises chrétiennes, les anciens donnaient une direction spirituelle aux assemblées des croyants. Le mot “ancien” fait référence à des personnes matures dans la foi.
+TIT	1	6	wja4			0	Connecting Statement:	Après avoir dit à Tite d'ordonner des anciens dans chaque ville de l'île de Crète, Paul donne ensuite les exigences pour les anciens.
+TIT	1	6	jen8		εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἀνέγκλητος	1	if anyone is blameless	C'est le début de la description du caractère d'un ancien donnée par Paul. Tite doit choisir des hommes qui correspondent à cette description. Être **irréprochable**, c'est être connu comme une personne qui ne mérite aucune accusation. Traductions alternatives : "un ancien doit être irrépréhensible" ou "un ancien doit être quelqu'un qu'on ne peut pas blâmer".
+TIT	1	6	ab70	figs-doublenegatives	ἀνέγκλητος	1	blameless	Être **irréprochable**, c'est être connu comme une personne qui ne mérite aucune accusation. Traduction alternative : "irrépréhensible". Vous pouvez dire d'une manière positive : "une personne qui a une bonne réputation". (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+TIT	1	6	q6uy	figs-explicit	μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἀνήρ	1	the husband of one wife	Cela signifie qu'il n'a qu'une seule épouse, c'est-à-dire qu'il n'a pas d'autres épouses ou concubines. Cela signifie aussi qu'il ne commet pas d'adultère. Traduction alternative : "un homme qui est marié à une seule femme". (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+TIT	1	6	wd6q		τέκνα…πιστά	1	faithful children	L’expression "des enfants fidèles" peut être interprétée par "des enfants qui croient en Jésus" ou encore par "des enfants qui sont dignes de confiance".
+TIT	1	7	lz7x		τὸν ἐπίσκοπον	1	the overseer	Un évêque est un autre nom pour la même position spirituelle de leadership que Paul a appelé **ancien** dans 1:5. Ce terme se concentre sur la fonction de l’ancien : il supervise les activités et les personnes de l’église.
+TIT	1	7	g2zf	figs-metaphor	Θεοῦ οἰκονόμον	1	the household manager of God	Paul parle de l’église comme si c’était la maison de Dieu, et le surveillant comme s’il était un serviteur en charge de la gestion de cette maison. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	1	7	d6l1		μὴ πάροινον	1	not addicted to wine	Paul ne parle pas d'une personne qui boit du vin avec les repas ou de temps en tems mais d'une personne qui "boit du vin à l'excès" ou qui "s'adonne à la boisson". 
+TIT	1	7	j1qq		μὴ πλήκτην	1	not a brawler	L'adjectif "immodéré" implique que la personne aime se battre et aussi se disputer. Traductions alternatives : "ni quelqu’un qui manque de modération" ou "ni quelqu’un qui aime se battre"
+TIT	1	8	i549	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Instead	Le mot de connexion **Au contraire** introduit un contraste entre ce qu’un ancien ne doit pas être (ce que Paul a déjà dit), et ce qu’un ancien doit être (ce que Paul est sur le point d’énoncer). (voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+TIT	1	8	vkq1		φιλάγαθον	1	a friend of what is good	Un ami de ce qui est bien est "une personne qui aime faire le bien"
+TIT	1	8	xy11	figs-doublet	σώφρονα…ἐγκρατῆ	1	sensible … and self-controlled	Les deux expressions "sensé" et "ayant le contrôle de lui-même" on une signification très proche. Si la langue cible n'a pas deux termes semblables, le traducteur pourrait remplacer les deux expressions par une seule comme "la maîtrise de soi". (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+TIT	1	8	xy12	figs-doublet	δίκαιον, ὅσιον	1	righteous, holy	These two terms are very similar in meaning and may be translated by one term if the target language does not have two similar terms. (See: [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+TIT	1	9	xwy6	figs-metaphor	ἀντεχόμενον	1	He must hold tightly to	Paul parle de la vérité de la Parole comme étant digne d'être tenue fermement à deux mains. Traduction alternative : "Il doit être dévoué à" ou "Il doit être enraciné dans la foi en la parole"<br>(Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	1	9	xy10		κατὰ τὴν διδαχὴν	1	that is in accordance with the teaching	Paul dit à Tite que la Parole en laquelle un ancien croit et enseigne doit être en accord avec celle que nous enseignons.
+TIT	1	9	abcj	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	so that	L'expression de connexion, **afin que**, introduit une relation d'objectif. L'objectif de l'ancien est de s'accrocher fermement au message digne de confiance pour qu’il soit capable d'encourager les autres et de réprimander ceux qui s'opposent à lui. Utilisez un connecteur dans votre langue qui montre clairement cet objectif. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+TIT	1	9	pzi1		τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ	1	sound teaching	Le mot grec rendu ici par bon est **sain**. Il fait normalement référence à la santé physique. Paul parle de cet enseignement comme s'il permettra à ceux qui y croient d’être spirituellement sain.
+TIT	1	10	xsq9			0	Connecting Statement:	À cause de ceux qui s'opposeront à la parole de Dieu, Paul donne à Tite des raisons de prêcher la parole de Dieu et le met en garde contre les faux enseignants.<br><br><br><br>
+TIT	1	10	w9kk	figs-metaphor	ἀνυπότακτοι, ματαιολόγοι	1	rebellious, empty talkers	Dans le texte grec, **creux** ou **vide** est une métaphore pour **futile** ou **qui n'a pas de substance**. En  français le mot **bavards** s'applique aux personnes qui parlent en "phrases creuses", en phrases qui n'ont pas de substance. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	1	10	ga6n		φρεναπάται	1	deceivers	Les séducteurs sont des personnes qui essaient activement de convaincre les gens de croire en quelque chose d'autre que l'Évangile que Paul prêche. Traductions alternatives : "trompeurs" ou "des gens qui convainquent d'autres personnes de croire des choses qui ne sont pas vraies"
+TIT	1	10	abcd	figs-hendiadys	ματαιολόγοι, καὶ φρεναπάται	1	empty talkers and deceivers	**Les bavards** et les **séducteurs** font tous deux référence à des personnes qui enseignaient des choses fausses et sans valeur et voulaient que les gens les croient. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+TIT	1	10	pu74	figs-metonymy	οἱ ἐκ τῆς περιτομῆς	1	those from the circumcision	Selon Paul, beaucoup de bavards et de séducteurs étaient des chrétiens juifs qui enseignaient à tort que les hommes doivent être circoncis comme eux pour suivre Christ. (Voir: [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+TIT	1	11	f4iy		οὓς δεῖ ἐπιστομίζειν	1	It is necessary to stop them	Paul dit qu'il faut arrêter les gens rebelles et que Tite et les anciens qu’il va nommer devront le faire ; pour rendre la phrase plus explicite et plus naturelle, vous devrez peut-être ajouter le sujet implicite et remplacer le pronom objet direct "les". Traductions alternatives : "Tite et les anciens, vous devez empêcher les gens rebelles de répandre leurs enseignements parmi les croyants" ou "quelqu’un doit empêcher les gens rebelles d’influencer les croyants par leurs paroles"
+TIT	1	11	aqi5		ὅλους οἴκους ἀνατρέπουσιν	1	are upsetting whole households	Le problème causé par les bavards et les séducteurs, c’est qu’ils détournaient les familles de la vérité et détruisaient leur foi.
+TIT	1	11	tw4e		διδάσκοντες ἃ μὴ δεῖ	1	teaching what they should not	**ce qu'ils ne devraient pas** pourrait être reformulé plus clairement comme suit : "Ce sont des choses qu'on ne doit pas enseigner concernant Christ et la Loi parce qu’elles ne sont pas vraies".
+TIT	1	11	at7c		αἰσχροῦ κέρδους χάριν	1	for the sake of shameful profit	L'expression "un profit honteux" n'est peut-être pas claire dans votre langue. L'adjectif honteux s’applique à ce qu’ils ont fait pour gagner l’argent, mais pas au profit lui-même. Le GST clarifie cela en mettant "honteux" dans une phrase distincte.
+TIT	1	12	tr1j		τις ἐξ αὐτῶν, ἴδιος αὐτῶν προφήτης	1	One of them, of their own prophets	Paul détourne son attention des gens rebelles parmi les chrétiens de Crête, vers quelqu'un que les Crétois croyaient être un prophète. Il se réfère à lui comme "l'un d'entre eux", ce qui implique qu'il était un Crétois.
+TIT	1	12	y3zb	figs-hyperbole	Κρῆτες ἀεὶ ψεῦσται	1	Cretans are always liars	"Les Crétois mentent tout le temps". C’est une exagération qui signifie que les Crétois avaient la réputation d’être des menteurs. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+TIT	1	12	h3jb	figs-metaphor	κακὰ θηρία	1	evil beasts	Cette métaphore compare les Crétois à des animaux sauvages qui sont dangereux. Traduction alternative : "Les Crétois sont aussi dangereux que des animaux sauvages" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	1	12	xyz1	figs-synecdoche	γαστέρες ἀργαί	1	lazy bellies	Le ventre, qui est la partie du corps qui stocke la nourriture, est utilisé ici pour représenter une personne qui mange tout le temps. Traduction alternative: "des gloutons paresseux" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+TIT	1	13	abck	grammar-connect-logic-result	δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν	1	For this reason	Les mots de connexion **Pour cette raison** introduisent une relation raison-résultat. La raison est que ce que le prophète crétois a dit à propos de son peuple est vrai (ce sont des menteurs, des méchants et des paresseux). Et le résultat est que Tite devrait les réprimander sévèrement. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+TIT	1	13	fif8		δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν ἔλεγχε αὐτοὺς ἀποτόμως	1	For this reason, rebuke them severely	À cause de la vérité de ce que le prophète crétois a dit, Paul insiste que Tite et les anciens les corrigent rigoureusement. Traduction alternative : "Pour cette raison, vous devez utiliser un langage très fort quand vous corrigez les Crétois".
+TIT	1	13	je3r		ἵνα ὑγιαίνωσιν ἐν τῇ πίστει	1	so that they may be sound in the faith	Voir la note sur **sain** à [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1). Traduction alternative : "afin qu’ils aient une foi saine" ou "afin que leur foi soit ferme" ou "afin qu’ils croient seulement ce qui est vrai au sujet de Dieu"
+TIT	1	13	abcl	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα	1	so that	Les mots de connexion **afin que** introduisent une relation raison-résultat. La raison, c'est que l'ancien réprimande sévèrement les Crétois, et le résultat, c’est que les Crétois deviennent sains dans la foi. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+TIT	1	13	xyz2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ πίστει	1	in the faith	Ici le nom abstrait **foi** représente les choses que les gens croient au sujet de Dieu. Traduction alternative : "ce qu’ils croient au sujet de Dieu" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+TIT	1	14	abcm	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	μὴ	1	not	L'adverbe de négation, **ne… pas**, introduit un contraste avec l'état d'être "solide dans la foi" dans le verset précédent. Afin d'être sain dans la foi, le peuple ne doit prêter aucune attention aux mythes juifs ou aux commandements de gens qui ne suivent pas la vérité. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+TIT	1	14	p28i		Ἰουδαϊκοῖς μύθοις	1	to Jewish myths	Paul compare les mythes judaïques à des faux enseignement des Juifs et à des histoires inventées par les Juifs.
+TIT	1	14	m4a5	figs-metaphor	ἀποστρεφομένων τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1	who turn away from the truth	Paul parle de la vérité comme si c’était un objet que les commandements des hommes pouvait contourner ou éviter. Traduction alternative : "les commandements des hommes rejettent la vérité" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	1	15	qtb9		πάντα καθαρὰ τοῖς καθαροῖς	1	All things are pure to those who are pure	On pourrait aussi exprimer ces pensées comme suit : "Si les gens sont purs à l'intérieur, tout ce qu'ils font sera pur" ou "Quand les gens n'ont que de bonnes pensées, tout ce qu'ils font honorera Dieu"
+TIT	1	15	nx42		τοῖς καθαροῖς	1	to those who are pure	C'est-à-dire "à ceux qui sont acceptables à Dieu"
+TIT	1	15	abcn	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	Le mot de connexion **Mais** introduit un contraste entre les gens qui sont purs et les gens qui sont corrompus et incroyants. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+TIT	1	15	n3wk	figs-metaphor	τοῖς…μεμιαμμένοις καὶ ἀπίστοις, οὐδὲν καθαρόν	2	to those who are corrupt and unbelieving, nothing is pure	Paul utilise la métaphore d'une personne physiquement sale en parlant d'une personne moralement souillée et qui ne croit pas. Il dit de ces personnes qu'elles ne peuvent rien faire de pur » ou « que lorsque les gens sont pleins de péché et d'incrédulité, rien de ce qu'ils font n'est acceptable à Dieu » (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	1	16	abco	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	but	Le mot de connexion **mais** introduit un contraste entre ce que ces personnes corrompues disent (elles connaissent Dieu) et ce que leurs actions manifestent (elles ne connaissent pas Dieu). (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+TIT	1	16	i3l2		τοῖς…ἔργοις ἀρνοῦνται	1	they deny him by their actions	Le verbe **renier** exprime l'idee de ne plus croire en Dieu comme le vrai Dieu; Paul dit que les Cretois montrent qu'ils ne croient plus en Dieu par leur actions. Traduction alternative : "leurs actions montrent qu'ils ne croient plus en Dieu"  
+TIT	1	16	ja47		βδελυκτοὶ ὄντες	1	They are detestable	On peut aussi dire qu'ils sont odieux, haïssables, exécrables. Traduction alternative : "odieux" 
+TIT	2	intro	h3il			0		# Tite 2 Remarques générales<br><br>## Concepts spéciaux dans ce chapitre<br><br>### Les rôles des hommes et des femmes<br><br>Les savants sont divisés sur la façon de comprendre ce passage dans son contexte historique et culturel. Certains érudits croient que les hommes et les femmes sont parfaitement égaux en toutes choses. D'autres croient que Dieu a créé les hommes et les femmes pour qu'ils remplissent des rôles distinctement différents dans le mariage et dans l'église. Les traducteurs doivent faire attention à ne pas laisser la façon dont ils comprennent ce problème affecter la façon dont ils traduisent ce passage.<br><br>### L'esclavage<br><br>Paul ne nous dit pas dans ce chapitre si l'esclavage est bon ou mauvais. Il enseigne aux esclaves à servir fidèlement leurs maîtres. Il enseigne à tous les croyants d'être pieux et de vivre correctement dans toutes les situations.
+TIT	2	1	lfu1			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continue de donner des instructions à Tite pour prêcher la parole de Dieu, et il explique comment les hommes et les femmes plus âgés, les jeunes hommes et les esclaves ou serviteurs devraient vivre en tant que croyants.
+TIT	2	1	tpi2	figs-explicit	σὺ δὲ	1	But you	Ici, le pronom "toi" est au singulier et fait référence à Tite. Si c’est plus clair, vous pouvez inclure le nom "Tite" comme dans l'UST ([[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+TIT	2	1	ph2j		τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ διδασκαλίᾳ	1	with sound teaching	Voir la note à [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1). Traductions alternatives : "à une saine doctrine" ou "à des enseignements corrects"
+TIT	2	2	xyz3	figs-ellipsis	πρεσβύτας…εἶναι	1	Older men are to be	Le grec n'a pas de verbe d'action ici, mais seulement l'expression "que les hommes plus âgés **doivent être**". Nous devons fournir un verbe comme enseigner ou exhorter ici, en nous inspirant du verset précédent. Traduction alternative : "Enseigne aux hommes plus âgés à être" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+TIT	2	2	xy13	figs-doublet	νηφαλίους…σεμνούς, σώφρονας	1	temperate, dignified, sensible	Ces trois adjectifs ont une signification très proche et peuvent être combinés en un ou deux si la langue cible n’a pas trois adjectifs distincts. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+TIT	2	2	xc6t		νηφαλίους	1	temperate	On pourrait dire "sobre d'esprit" ou "maître de soi" si c'est plus naturel dans la langue cible.
+TIT	2	2	y3j2		εἶναι…σώφρονας	1	to be … sensible	L'adjectif **raisonnable** s'applique a un homme qui pense et agit avec bon sens, qui réfléchit avant d'agir. Traduction alternative : "doivent être… capable de contrôler leurs désirs"
+TIT	2	2	abc1		ὑγιαίνοντας τῇ πίστει	1	sound in faith	Ici, le mot **accompli** signifie être parfait, ferme et inébranlable. Voir la note sur **de bons enseignements** à [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1) et la note sur **solides dans leur foi** à \[Titus 1:13\](../01/ 13/je3r).
+TIT	2	2	m14y	figs-abstractnouns	ὑγιαίνοντας τῇ πίστει	1	sound in faith	Vous pouvez utiliser le nom abstrait "la foi" comme un verbe si c'est plus clair dans votre langue. Traduction alternative : "des hommes qui croient totalement aux vrais enseignements au sujet de Dieu" (Voir : \[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns\])
+TIT	2	2	z14y	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἀγάπῃ	1	in love	Vous pouvez utiliser le nom abstrait "amour" comme un verbe si cela est plus clair dans votre langue comme dans le GST. (Voir : \[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns\])
+TIT	2	2	a14y	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ὑπομονῇ	1	and in perseverance	Vous pouvez remplacer le nom abstrait **persévérance** par un verbe si cela est plus clair dans votre langue. Par exemple : "et persévérer au service de Dieu même lorsque c'est difficile". (Voir : \[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns\])
+TIT	2	3	gl8e	figs-ellipsis	πρεσβύτιδας ὡσαύτως	1	Older women likewise are to be	Le Grec n’a pas l'expression **doivent être**, mais seulement "des femmes plus âgées de même". Nous devons continuer l’idée d'enseigner et exhorter venant des deux versets précédents et l’appliquer ici aussi. Traductions alternatives : "De la même manière, enseignez que les femmes plus âgées" ou "Enseignez aussi aux femmes plus âgées qu'elles" (Voir : \[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis\])
+TIT	2	3	v9cp		διαβόλους	1	slanderers	Cet adjectif fait référence aux gens qui disent de mauvaises choses au sujet d’autres personnes, qu’elles soient vraies ou non.
+TIT	2	3	g9re	figs-metaphor	οἴνῳ πολλῷ δεδουλωμένας	1	enslaved to much wine	L'expression "asservies à trop de vin" parle des gens qui ne peuvent pas se contrôler et boivent trop de vin comme s’ils étaient esclaves du vin. Voici d'autres façons de dire cela : "contrôlé par leur désir de boire du vin" ou "accro au vin" (Voir : [rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor])
+TIT	2	3	xyz4	figs-activepassive	οἴνῳ πολλῷ δεδουλωμένας	1	enslaved to much wine	Vous pouvez déclarer cela à la voix active. Traductions alternatives : "buvant trop de vin" ou " accros au vin" (Voir : [rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive])
+TIT	2	3	abc4		καλοδιδασκάλους	1	but to be teachers of what is good	Le mot grec utilisé ici signifie "un maître de ce qui est bon". Le groupe de mots "mais doivent être" est implicite dans l'expression **mais enseignantes de ce qui est bon** qui contraste cette bonne qualité avec les deux mauvaises qualités précédentes. Considérez l’utilisation d’une expression de contraste comme "mais elles doivent être" ou "au lieu de cela, elles doivent être" pour faire un contraste entre les bonnes et les mauvaises qualités dans votre langue.
+TIT	2	4	abc5		φιλάνδρους	1	lovers of their husbands	Paul dit à Tite qu'íl veut que, par leur comportement, les femmes plus âgées enseignent aux jeunes femmes "d'être les amants de leurs propres maris".
+TIT	2	4	abca		φιλοτέκνους	1	and lovers of their children	Paul dit à Tite qu'il veut aussi que, par leur comportement, les femmes plus âgées enseignent aux jeunes femmes d'aimer leurs propres enfants.
+TIT	2	5	abcb		ὑποτασσομένας τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν	1	and subject to their own husbands	Le terme "être soumises" veut dire obéir de bon gré, volontairement. Donc, on peut dire en traduction alternative : "à obéir de bon gré à leurs maris".
+TIT	2	5	t5v6	figs-metonymy	ἵνα μὴ ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ βλασφημῆται	1	so that the word of God may not be insulted	Ici, **la Parole** est une métonymie de « message », qui à son tour est un synonyme pour Dieu lui-même. (Voir : [rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy])
+TIT	2	5	abcq	figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ βλασφημῆται	1	so that the word of God may not be insulted	Vous pouvez déclarer le passage surligné sous forme active. Traductions alternatives : "pour que personne n’insulte la Parole de Dieu" ou "pour que personne n’insulte Dieu en disant du mal de son message" (Voir : \[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive\])
+TIT	2	6	i3hv		ὡσαύτως	1	In the same way	Tite devait former les jeunes hommes tout comme il devait former les personnes âgées. Traduction alternative : "De la même manière"
+TIT	2	7	x73u		σεαυτὸν παρεχόμενος	1	present yourself	Si c'est plus clair dans votre langue, utilisez la traduction alternative : "montre-toi" ou "tu dois être".
+TIT	2	7	ym6x		τύπον καλῶν ἔργων	1	as an example of good works	Traduction alternative : "comme un exemple de quelqu’un qui fait des actions bonnes"
+TIT	2	8	xy14		ὑγιῆ	1	sound	Ce mot **solide** a la même signification de base que "pas corrompu" dans 2:7. Là, Paul donne la signification négativement : "pas corrompu", signifiant "sans erreur", mais dans 2:8, il donne le sens positivement : **solide**, signifiant "correct". Les deux termes se réfèrent à l'enseignement de Tite. Utilisez des termes positifs ou négatifs dans la langue cible. S'il est difficile d'utiliser deux termes, utilisez un seul terme ayant le même sens dans les deux versets.
+TIT	2	8	xt6v	figs-hypo	ἵνα ὁ ἐξ ἐναντίας ἐντραπῇ	1	so that the opponent may be ashamed	Cela présente une situation hypothétique dans laquelle quelqu'un s'oppose à Titus et devient ensuite honteux de l'avoir fait. Traductions alternatives : « afin que, si quelqu'un s'oppose à vous, il ait honte » ou « afin que lorsque les gens s'opposent à vous, ils aient honte » (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs- hypo]])
+TIT	2	8	xy15	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	us	Le pronom complément d'object indirect "nous" parle de Paul, de Tite, et de tous les Chrétiens. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+TIT	2	9	xyz5	figs-ellipsis	δούλους ἰδίοις δεσπόταις ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1	Slaves are to be subject to their own masters	Le Grec n’a pas le terme **doivent être**, mais seulement "des esclaves à soumettre à leurs maîtres". Nous devons appliquer l’idée verbale du verset 6 à ce passage, c’est-à-dire "recommander" ou "exhorter". Traduction alternative : "Recommande aux esclaves de se soumettrent à leurs maîtres" (Voir : \[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis\])
+TIT	2	9	abcc		ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1	are to be subject	Il pourrait être plus clair dans votre langue d'éviter la construction qui ne se trouve pas dans le grec “doivent être”. Traduction alternative : "doivent obéir"
+TIT	2	9	if6v		ἐν πᾶσιν	1	in everything	Peut-être qu' **en toute chose** n'est pas clair dans votre langue, essayez une des traductions alternatives : "dans chaque situation" ou "toujours"
+TIT	2	9	id15		εὐαρέστους εἶναι	1	to be pleasing	On peut réécrire le verset 2:9 comme suit pour éviter la voix passive. Les esclaves doivent obéir à leurs propres maîtres en toute chose. Traduction alternative : "faire plaisir à leurs maîtres".
+TIT	2	10	abc6		μὴ νοσφιζομένους	1	not to steal	Traduction alternative : "ne rien voler de leurs maîtres"
+TIT	2	10	t87j		πᾶσαν πίστιν ἐνδεικνυμένους ἀγαθήν	1	to demonstrate all good faith	Paul dit à Tite d'enseigner aux esclaves de montrer qu'ils doivent "être dignes de la confiance de leurs maîtres".
+TIT	2	10	h2n6		ἐν πᾶσιν	1	in every way	**En toute choses** est un synonyme de "dans toutes les choses" qui signifie "dans tout ce qu'ils vont faire" dans le contexte de ce verset. Traduction alternative : "dans tout ce qu'ils vont faire"
+TIT	2	10	f8jy		τὴν διδασκαλίαν τὴν τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ, κοσμῶσιν	1	they may bring credit to the teaching that is about God our Savior	Traductions alternatives : "pourra faire honneur à l’enseignement qui est au sujet de Dieu notre Sauveur" ou "amènera les gens à comprendre que l’enseignement sur Dieu notre Sauveur doit être respecté"
+TIT	2	10	pn93		Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	God our Savior	Traduction alternative: "notre Dieu qui nous sauve"
+TIT	2	10	xy16	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	L'emploi du pronom possessif **votre** nous dit que Dieu, le Sauveur appartient à Paul, Tite et à tous les Chrétiens  (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+TIT	2	11	y44u			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul encourage Tite à attendre avec impatience la venue de Jésus et à se rappeler que son autorité est venue de Jésus.
+TIT	2	11	gp2z	figs-personification	ἐπεφάνη…ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the grace of God has appeared	Paul parle de la grâce de Dieu comme si c'était une personne qui est arrivée. Voir le GST pour d'autres façons d'exprimer cela ou bien considérer la traduction alternative : "Dieu offre maintenant sa grâce" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+TIT	2	12	qy8k	figs-personification	παιδεύουσα ἡμᾶς	1	training us	Paul parle de la grâce de Dieu (2:11) comme s'il s'agissait d'une personne qui nous apprend à vivre une vie sainte. Traduction alternative : "par laquelle Dieu nous forme" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+TIT	2	12	abce	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	us	Le pronom personnel "nous" inclut Paul, Tite, et tous les Chrétiens. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+TIT	2	12	lxb3		τὴν ἀσέβειαν	1	godlessness	Paul dit à Tite que la grâce de Dieu nous apprend à rejeter "le mépris que les gens ont pour Dieu".
+TIT	2	12	n3k5		τὰς κοσμικὰς ἐπιθυμίας	1	worldly passions	"les désirs intenses pour les choses de ce monde" ou "les désirs pour les plaisirs du péché"
+TIT	2	12	xy19		ἀσέβειαν…εὐσεβῶς	1	godlessness … godly way	Ce qui est **mauvais**, l'impiété, n'honore pas Dieu. Mais **lui obéir**, la justice, honore Dieu. Ces deux phrases présentent des idées qui contrastent la vie des gens qui honorent Dieu avec celle des gens qui le déshonorent.
+TIT	2	12	fk8j		ἐν τῷ νῦν αἰῶνι	1	in the present age	"la période de temps pendant laquelle nous vivons dans ce monde" ou "pendant notre vie"
+TIT	2	13	rz93		προσδεχόμενοι	1	while we look forward to receiving	Traduction alternative : "pendant que nous attendons"
+TIT	2	13	xyz6	figs-metonymy	τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα	1	the blessed hope	Ici, ce qui est **bienheureux** est ce que nous espérons, le retour de Jésus-Christ. Traduction alternative : "l'événement merveilleux que nous espérons" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+TIT	2	13	pss7	figs-metonymy	καὶ ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δόξης τοῦ μεγάλου Θεοῦ καὶ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	and appearing of the glory of our great God and Savior Jesus Christ	La **gloire** représente Jésus lui-même qui apparaîtra glorieusement. Traduction alternative : "c'est-à-dire l'apparition glorieuse de notre grand Dieu et Sauveur Jésus-Christ" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+TIT	2	13	abcf	figs-hendiadys	τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα, καὶ ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δόξης	1	the blessed hope and appearing of the glory	**La bienheureuse espérance** et **l'apparition de la gloire** font référence au même événement. Cela peut être démontré clairement. Traduction alternative : "ce que nous espérons, l'apparition bénie et glorieuse" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+TIT	2	13	xyz7	figs-hendiadys	τοῦ μεγάλου Θεοῦ καὶ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	of our great God and Savior Jesus Christ	**notre grand Dieu** et **Sauveur** font tous deux référence à une seule personne, Jésus-Christ. Traduction alternative : "de Jésus-Christ, notre grand Dieu et Sauveur" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+TIT	2	14	niu4	figs-explicit	ἔδωκεν ἑαυτὸν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν	1	gave himself for us	Il s’agit de la mort volontaire de Jésus. Traduction alternative : "s’est donné lui-même pour mourir à notre place" (Cf. [rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit])
+TIT	2	14	xy20	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	us	Le pronom personnel complément d'objet indirect "nous" signifie "chaque personne" dont on parle, y compris Paul, Tite, et tous les Chrétiens. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+TIT	2	14	gxe7	figs-metaphor	λυτρώσηται ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἀνομίας	1	to redeem us from all lawlessness	Paul parle de ce que Jésus fait pour nous comme s'il libérait des esclaves de leurs mauvais maîtres. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	2	14	xy21	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	us	Le pronom **nous** comprend Paul, Titus et tous les Chrétiens. (Voir : [rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive])
+TIT	2	14	fjy1		λαὸν περιούσιον	1	a special people	Paul dit aussi qu'**un peuple spécial** repésente le peuple de croyants que Dieu a choisi, qu'il a pris pour lui-même, le peuple de Dieu, pour lequel Jésus Christ a donné sa vie. Traduction alternative : "un groupe de personnes qui compte tellement à Jésus"
+TIT	2	14	ii18		ζηλωτὴν καλῶν ἔργων	1	zealous for good works	Traduction alternative : "qui désirent vivement de faire de bonnes actions"
+TIT	2	15	abc7		παρακάλει	1	exhort	Paul veut que Tite "pousse les croyants à faire tout ce qu'il a écrit"
+TIT	2	15	b94z	figs-explicit	ἔλεγχε, μετὰ πάσης ἐπιταγῆς	1	rebuke with all authority	Si c'est utile, on peut rendre explicites les personnes que Titus doit corriger. Traduction alternative : "corrige avec toute autorité les gens qui ne font pas toutes ces choses" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+TIT	2	15	h15y		μηδείς σου περιφρονείτω	1	Let no one disregard you	Traduction alternatives : "Ne permets à personne de t'ignorer" ou "Ne permets à personne d'être indifférent à ce que tu dis"
+TIT	2	15	xy22	figs-doublenegatives	μηδείς σου περιφρονείτω	1	Let no one disregard you	Vous pouvez le dire positivement : "Assure-toi que tout le monde t'écoute" (Voir : [rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives])
+TIT	2	15	jbu1	figs-explicit	σου περιφρονείτω	1	Let … disregard you	On peut rendre explicite la façon que les gens ne prêterait pas attention à Tite. Alternate translation: “Ne permets à personne de refuser d'écouter ce que tu dis” ou “Ne permets à personne de refuser de te respecter” (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+TIT	3	intro	zh6x			0		# Tite 3 Remarques générales<br><br>## Structure et mise en forme<br><br>Paul donne des instructions personnelles à Tite dans ce chapitre.<br><br>Le verset 15 termine formellement cette lettre. C’est une façon classique de terminer une lettre dans l’ancien Proche-Orient.<br><br>## Concepts particuliers de ce chapitre<br><br>### généalogies<br><br>Les généalogies (verset 9) sont des séries d'ancêtres ou de descendants qui établissent une filiation. Elles montrent de quelle tribu et de quelle famille une personne est issue. Par exemple, les prêtres venaient de la tribu de Lévi et de la famille d'Aaron. Certaines de ces listes comprenaient des histoires d'ancêtres et même d'êtres spirituels qui étaient utilisées pour discuter d'où venaient les traditions et croyances et l'importance de diverses personnes.
+TIT	3	1	y9tr			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continue de donner à Tite des instructions sur la façon d’enseigner aux anciens et aux gens dont il a la charge à Crète.
+TIT	3	1	j2sa		ὑπομίμνῃσκε αὐτοὺς…ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1	Remind them to submit	"Répète à tous ce qu’ils savent déjà ; ils doivent se soumettre aux" ou "Continue de leur rappeler de soumettre aux"
+TIT	3	1	w3fy		ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις, ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν	1	to submit to rulers and authorities, to obey them	Traduction alternative : "de faire ce que disent les dirigeants politiques et les autorités gouvernementales, de leur obéir"
+TIT	3	1	wa9x	figs-doublet	ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις	1	to rulers and authorities	Les mots dirigeants et autorités ont des significations semblables et tous deux se réfèrent à quiconque détient l’autorité dans le gouvernement. Si la langue cible n’a qu’un seul terme pour cela, il suffira d’utiliser ce terme (voir [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+TIT	3	1	xy25	figs-doublet	ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν	1	to submit … to obey them	Ces deux verbes ont des significations semblables et tous deux disent de faire ce que quelqu’un vous dit de faire. Si la langue cible n’a qu’un seul terme pour cela, il suffira d’utiliser ce terme (voir [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+TIT	3	1	in7u		πρὸς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἑτοίμους εἶναι	1	be ready for every good work	Traduction alternative : “d'être toujours prêts à faire tout ce qui est bien"
+TIT	3	2	lug7		βλασφημεῖν	1	to revile	Traduction alternative : “de… insulter”
+TIT	3	2	abcx	figs-doublenegatives	ἀμάχους εἶναι	1	to be uncontentious	Vous pouvez le dire positivement : "être tolérant" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+TIT	3	3	m9zd		ἦμεν γάρ ποτε καὶ ἡμεῖς	1	For once we also were	"C’est parce que nous aussi, nous avons été nous-mêmes".
+TIT	3	3	me7b		ποτε	1	once	Traductions alternatives : "dans le temps passé", "il y a longtemps" ou “auparavant” ou “bien avant cela”
+TIT	3	3	bl8e	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	Dans cette phrase, le pronom, "nous", signifie "même nous" ou "nous-mêmes". Paul veut que Tite comprenne qu’il se réfère au temps quand lui-même, Tite et tous les chrétiens ne se confiaient pas encore en Christ. (Voir : \[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive\])
+TIT	3	3	rrx9		ἦμεν…ἀνόητοι	1	were foolish	Traductions alternatives : "nous étions… irréfléchis" ou "nous étions…inconsidérés" ou "nous étions… imprudents"
+TIT	3	3	qt8f	figs-personification	πλανώμενοι, δουλεύοντες ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ἡδοναῖς ποικίλαις	1	We were led astray and enslaved by various passions and pleasures	La passion et le plaisir sont évoqués comme s'ils étaient les maîtres des hommes et avaient fait des esclaves ceux qui croyaient au mensonge. Traduction alternative : "Nous nous étions permis de croire au mensonge selon lequel diverses passions et plaisirs pouvaient nous rendre heureux, puis nous étions incapables de contrôler nos sentiments ou d'arrêter de faire des choses que nous pensions pouvoir nous donner du plaisir" (Voir : [[rc:/ /fr/ta/man/translate/figs-personnification]])
+TIT	3	3	xy27	figs-activepassive	πλανώμενοι, δουλεύοντες ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ἡδοναῖς ποικίλαις	1	We were led astray and enslaved by various passions and pleasures	Vous pouvez traduire cela à la voix active. Traduction alternative : "Diverses passions et plaisirs nous ont menti et nous ont fait perdre notre chemin". (Voir : \[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive\])
+TIT	3	3	tl5n		ἐπιθυμίαις	1	passions	Traduction alternative : “la convoitise" et ”les désirs"
+TIT	3	3	dec4		ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ διάγοντες	1	We lived in evil and envy	Ici, **le mal** et **l'envie** décrivent le péché. Le mot **mal** est général et **l'envie** est un type spécifique de péché. Traduction alternative : "Nous faisions toujours des choses mauvaises et voulions ce que les autres avaient".
+TIT	3	3	y5lp		στυγητοί	1	detestable	Traduction alternative : "amenant les autres à nous haïr”
+TIT	3	4	xy28	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	Il est important de marquer par la conjonction "mais" le contraste entre la mauvaise voie des gens (versets 1-3) et la bonté de Dieu (versets 4-7) (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect- contraste logique]])
+TIT	3	4	ba5a	figs-personification	ὅτε…ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared	Paul parle de la bonté et de l'amour de Dieu pour l'humanité comme s'ils étaient soudainement devenus visibles aux hommes. Traduction alternative : « quand Dieu notre Sauveur nous a montré sa bonté et son amour pour les êtres humains » (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+TIT	3	4	abcg	figs-abstractnouns	ὅτε…ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared	Vous pouvez remplacer les noms abstraits **gentillesse** et **amour** par des adjectifs. Traduction alternative : "quand Dieu, qui nous sauve, a montré combien il est bon et aimant envers les êtres humains" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+TIT	3	4	abch	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	Dans cette phrase, le pronom, "nous", inclut Paul, Tite, et tous les chrétiens. (See: [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+TIT	3	5	n4ug		κατὰ τὸ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος	1	by his mercy	La miséricorde est un nom abstrait qu'on peut exprimer de la façon suivante: Traduction alternative : "Par l'attribut divin par lequel Dieu montre combien il est compatissant, désireux de pardonner au coupable"
+TIT	3	5	k1a6	figs-metaphor	λουτροῦ παλινγενεσίας	1	the washing of new birth	Paul emploie deux métaphores. Premièrement, il parle du pardon de Dieu pour les pécheurs comme si Dieu les nettoyait physiquement de leur péché dans les eaux du baptême. Deuxièment, il parle des pécheurs qui ont reçu le pardon de Dieu comme s'ils étaient nés de nouveau et commençaient une nouvelle manière de vivre pour Dieu. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	3	6	fby9	figs-metaphor	οὗ ἐξέχεεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς πλουσίως	1	whom God richly poured on us	Il est commun pour les écrivains du Nouveau Testament de parler du Saint-Esprit comme d'un liquide que Dieu peut verser en grandes quantités. Traduction alternative : « que Dieu nous a donné généreusement » (Voir : [rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor])
+TIT	3	6	xy24	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	us	Le pronom, "nous", inclut Paul, Tite et tous les chrétiens. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+TIT	3	6	q9ze		διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν	1	through our Savior Jesus Christ	« quand Jésus-Christ nous a sauvés »
+TIT	3	6	xy23	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	Le pronom possessif "notre" dit que Jésus Christ est le sauveur de Paul, Tite, et de tous les chrétiens. (See: [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+TIT	3	7	di3g	figs-activepassive	δικαιωθέντες	1	having been justified	Vous pouvez utiliser la voix active. Traduction alternative : "puisque Dieu nous a déclarés sans péché" (Voir : [[rc://fr/taman/translation/figs-active passive]])
+TIT	3	7	q1cm	figs-metaphor	κληρονόμοι γενηθῶμεν, κατ’ ἐλπίδα ζωῆς αἰωνίου	1	we might become heirs according to the certain hope of everlasting life	On parle du peuple à qui Dieu a fait des promesses comme s'il devait hériter des choses promises, tout comme une personne hérite des biens ou des possessions d'un membre de sa famille. Traduction alternative : "nous pouvons nous attendre à recevoir la vie éternelle que Dieu nous a promise" (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	3	8	j8md		ὁ λόγος	1	This message	Le message est celui qui vient d'être exprimé dans les versets 4-7, que Dieu donne librement le Saint-Esprit et la vie éternelle aux croyants par Jésus.
+TIT	3	8	xy29		τούτων	1	these things	**ces choses** font référence aux enseignements de Paul dans les versets 1-7. Traduction alternative : "ces enseignements dont je viens de parler"
+TIT	3	8	kqm6		φροντίζωσιν καλῶν ἔργων, προΐστασθαι	1	may be careful to engage themselves in good works	Paul dit à Tite qu'il doit insister que les croyants prennent soin de s'engager dans les bonnes oeuvres. Traduction alternative : "prennent soin de s'engager dans de bonnes œuvres"
+TIT	3	9	tzh9			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul explique ce que Tite devrait éviter et comment il devrait traiter ceux qui provoquent des querelles parmi les croyants.
+TIT	3	9	j1hf		δὲ…περιΐστασο	1	But avoid	Ayant présenté à Tite ce qu'íl doit faire, Paul met en opposition les choses dont il doit se protéger. Traductions alternatives : "Alors évitez" ou "Par conséquent, évitez"
+TIT	3	9	xnf9		μωρὰς…ζητήσεις	1	foolish debates	Traductions alternatives : "les arguments concernant des questions sans importance" ou "les discussions qui n'ont aucune valeur, qui sont absurdes" 
+TIT	3	9	qk66		γενεαλογίας	1	genealogies	Il s’agit de la science ou l'étude qui a pour objet la recherche des filiations, des relations familiales. Voir l’Introduction à Titus.
+TIT	3	9	xu7f		ἔρεις	1	strife	Paul parle des disputes, des controverses, des arguments que les dirigeants juifs avaient au sujet des lois religieuses d'Israel. Traductions alternatives : "arguments" ou "disputes"
+TIT	3	9	ky3n		νομικὰς	1	about the law	Traduction alternative : "à propos de la loi de Moïse"
+TIT	3	10	x3fh		αἱρετικὸν ἄνθρωπον…παραιτοῦ	1	Reject a divisive person	Traductions alternatives : "Écarte-toi de la personne qui cause la division" ou "Maintient de la distance entre toi et la personne qui sème la discorde"
+TIT	3	10	xzx1		μετὰ μίαν καὶ δευτέραν νουθεσίαν	1	after one or two warnings	Paul désire que Tite avertisse une personne divisive une ou deux fois avant de les rejeter. Traduction alternative : ”après avoir averti cette personne une ou deux fois"
+TIT	3	11	r7pc		ὁ τοιοῦτος	1	such a person	Il s'agit d'une personne divisive comme celle que Paul va décrire. Traduction alternative : "Une personne mauvaise comme celle dont je parle"
+TIT	3	11	inh5	figs-metaphor	ἐξέστραπται	1	has turned from the right way	Paul parle de quelqu'un qui choisit de faire de mauvaises choses comme d'une personne qui quitte le bon chemin pour marcher dans la mauvaise direction. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+TIT	3	11	p81k		ὢν αὐτοκατάκριτος	1	being self-condemned	Traduction alternative : “porte judgment sur elle-même”
+TIT	3	12	z7i4			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul termine la lettre en disant à Tite ce qu’il doit faire après avoir nommé des anciens en Crète et en transmettant les salutations de ceux qui sont avec lui.
+TIT	3	12	mba6		ὅταν πέμψω	1	When I send	Traduction alternative : “Lorsque je t'aurai envoyé”
+TIT	3	12	c32w	translate-names	Ἀρτεμᾶν…Τυχικόν	1	Artemas … Tychicus	Ce sont des noms d'hommes. (See: [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+TIT	3	12	knt1		σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν	1	hurry to come	Traduction alternative : “dépêchez-vous de venir”
+TIT	3	12	xy30		σπούδασον	1	hurry	Le verbe est singulier et dirigé vers Tite seul. Artémas ou Tychique resterait en Crète, probablement pour prendre la place de Tite.
+TIT	3	12	gdw9		παραχειμάσαι	1	to spend the winter	Paul dit à Tite qu’il a décidé de rester à Nicopolis pendant l'hiver. Traduction alternative : "d'y rester pour l'hiver"
+TIT	3	13	a46f	translate-names	Ζηνᾶν…Ἀπολλῶν	1	Zenas … Appollos	Ce sont des noms d'hommes. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+TIT	3	13	s757		καὶ Ἀπολλῶν	1	and Apollos	Traduction alternative : “et aussi Apollos”
+TIT	3	13	j496		σπουδαίως πρόπεμψον	1	Diligently send on their way	Paul veut que Tite prenne soin des préparations de voyage pour Zénas et Appolos. Traduction alternative : "prend soin de m'envoyer"
+TIT	3	13	xy31	figs-doublenegatives	ἵνα μηδὲν αὐτοῖς λείπῃ	1	so that they lack nothing	Vous pouvez le dire positivement : "afin qu’ils aient tout ce dont ils ont besoin" (Voir : \[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives\])
+TIT	3	14	v7wg			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul explique qu'il est important pour tous les croyants de subvenir au nécessaire de ceux qui ont des besoins.
+TIT	3	14	fw98		οἱ ἡμέτεροι	1	our own	Paul fait référence aux croyants en Crète. Traduction alternative : "ceux de nos assemblées"
+TIT	3	14	xy33	figs-exclusive	οἱ ἡμέτεροι	1	our own	Ici, **les nôtres** s'applique aux croyants à qui Paul et Tite demandent à pratiquer de bonnes œuvres. La forme devrait être inclusive. (Voir : [[rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+TIT	3	14	tn24		εἰς τὰς ἀναγκαίας χρείας	1	toward essential needs	Traduction alternative : “leur permettant d’aider les gens qui manquent de choses nécessaires”
+TIT	3	14	mji4	figs-metaphor	ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι	1	in order not to be unfruitful	Paul parle des gens qui font du bon travail comme s’ils étaient des arbres portant de bons fruits. Traduction alternative : "afin qu’ils ne mènent pas des vies inutiles" (Voir : [rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor])
+TIT	3	14	xy32	figs-doublenegatives	ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι	1	in order not to be unfruitful	Vous pouvez le dire positivement : "de cette façon ils seront fructueux" ou "de cette façon ils seront productifs" (Voir : [rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives])
+TIT	3	15	j3y2			0	General Information:	Paul termine sa lettre à Tite.
+TIT	3	15	abci		ἀσπάζονταί σε	1	greet you	Ici, **te** est singulier – c’est une salutation personnelle à Tite.
+TIT	3	15	k1sa		οἱ μετ’ ἐμοῦ πάντες	1	All those who are with me	Traductions alternatives : "Tous les gens qui sont avec moi" ou "Tous les croyants qui sont ici, avec moi"
+TIT	3	15	f4vc		τοὺς φιλοῦντας ἡμᾶς ἐν πίστει	1	those who love us in faith	Deux sens sont possibles: Traductions alternatives : (1) "les croyants qui nous aiment" (2) "les croyants qui nous aiment parce que nous partageons la même foi".
+TIT	3	15	xy35	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	us	Ici, **nous** est probablement exclusif et se réfère à Paul et au groupe de chrétiens avec lui. Paul envoie les salutations de ce groupe aux chrétiens qui sont avec Tite en Crète. (Voir : [rc://fr/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive])
+TIT	3	15	kx83		ἡ χάρις μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν	1	Grace be with all of you	C'était une salutation chrétienne courante. Traduction alternative : "Que la grâce de Dieu soit avec vous" ou "Je prie Dieu d'être miséricordieux envers vous tous"
+TIT	3	15	xy34		ὑμῶν	1	of you	Ici, **vous** est pluriel. Cette bénédiction est pour Titus et tous les croyants en Crète.

en_tn_61-1PE.tsv

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
-1PE	front	intro	c1uv			0		# Introduction to 1 Peter<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of 1 Peter<br><br>1. Introduction (1:1-2)<br>1. Praise for God’s salvation of the believers (1:3-2:10)<br>1. Christian living (2:11-4:11)<br>1. Encouragement to persevere when suffering (4:12-5:11)<br>1. Closing (5:12-14)<br><br><br>### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?<br><br>The Book of 1 Peter was written by the Apostle Peter. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.<br><br>### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?<br><br>Peter stated that he wrote this letter for the purpose of “encouraging you and testifying that this is the true grace of God” (5:12).<br><br>He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also gave instructions about Christians submitting to persons in authority.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### How were Christians treated in Rome?<br><br>Peter probably was in Rome when he wrote this letter. He gave Rome the symbolic name of “Babylon” (5:13). It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were badly persecuting Christians.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?<br><br> “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth. This was for the purpose of sincere brotherly love; so love one another earnestly from the heart” (1:22). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth through the Spirit for the purpose of sincere brotherly love, so love one another earnestly from the heart.”<br><br>If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1PE	1	intro	ql4i			0		# 1 Peter 01 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 1:24-25.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### What God reveals<br><br>When Jesus comes again, everyone will see how good God’s people were to have faith in Jesus. Then God’s people will see how gracious God has been to them, and all people will praise both God and his people.<br><br>### Holiness<br><br>God wants his people to be holy because God is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])<br><br>### Eternity<br><br>Peter tells Christians to live for things that will last forever and not to live for the things of this world, which will end. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Peter writes that his readers are glad and sad at the same time ([1 Peter 1:6](../01/06.md)). He can say this because they are sad because they are suffering, but they are glad because they know that God will save them “in the last time” ([1 Peter 1:5](../01/05.md))
+1PE	front	intro	c1uv			0		# Introduction to 1 Peter<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of 1 Peter<br><br>1. Introduction (1:1-2)<br>1. Praise for God’s salvation of the believers (1:3-2:10)<br>1. Christian living (2:11-4:11)<br>1. Encouragement to persevere when suffering (4:12-5:11)<br>1. Closing (5:12-14)<br><br><br>### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?<br><br>The Book of 1 Peter was written by the Apostle Peter. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.<br><br>### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?<br><br>Peter stated that he wrote this letter for the purpose of “encouraging you and testifying that this is the true grace of God” (5:12).<br><br>He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also gave instructions about Christians submitting to persons in authority.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### How were Christians treated in Rome?<br><br>Peter probably was in Rome when he wrote this letter. He gave Rome the symbolic name of “Babylon” (5:13). It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were badly persecuting Christians.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?<br><br>“You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth. This was for the purpose of sincere brotherly love; so love one another earnestly from the heart” (1:22). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth through the Spirit for the purpose of sincere brotherly love, so love one another earnestly from the heart.”<br><br>If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1PE	1	intro	ql4i			0		# 1 Peter 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 1:24-25.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### What God reveals<br><br>When Jesus comes again, everyone will see how good God’s people were to have faith in Jesus. Then God’s people will see how gracious God has been to them, and all people will praise both God and his people.<br><br>### Holiness<br><br>God wants his people to be holy because God is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])<br><br>### Eternity<br><br>Peter tells Christians to live for things that will last forever and not to live for the things of this world, which will end. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Peter writes that his readers are glad and sad at the same time ([1 Peter 1:6](../01/06.md)). He can say this because they are sad because they are suffering, but they are glad because they know that God will save them “in the last time” ([1 Peter 1:5](../01/05.md))
 1PE	1	1	g6b4			0	General Information:	Peter identifies himself as the writer and identifies and greets the believers to whom he is writing.
 1PE	1	1	u3zc	figs-metaphor	ἐκλεκτοῖς παρεπιδήμοις διασπορᾶς	1	to the elect foreigners of the dispersion	Peter speaks of his readers as people who live away from their homes in many different countries. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	1	1	qkl8		Καππαδοκίας…Βιθυνίας	1	Cappadocia … Bithynia	Along with the other places that Peter mentions, **Cappadocia** and **Bithynia** were Roman provinces located in what is now the country of Turkey.
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	1	24	hd2f	figs-simile	πᾶσα δόξα αὐτῆς ὡς ἄνθος χόρτου…τὸ ἄνθος ἐξέπεσεν	1	all its glory is like the flower of the grass … its flower falls off	Here the word **glory** refers to beauty or goodness. Isaiah compares the things that people consider to be good or beautiful about humanity to flowers that die quickly. Alternate translation: “all their goodness is as temporary as a flower … it will fall away like a dying flower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1PE	1	25	aba2		τὸ…ῥῆμα Κυρίου	1	the word of the Lord	“the message that comes from the Lord”
 1PE	1	25	s11j	figs-activepassive	τὸ ῥῆμα τὸ εὐαγγελισθὲν	1	the word that has been proclaimed	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the gospel that we proclaimed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1PE	2	intro	a121			0		# 1 Peter 02 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:6, 7, 8, and 22.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:10.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Stones<br><br>The Bible uses a building made of large stones as a metaphor for the church. Jesus is the cornerstone, the most important stone. The apostles and prophets are the foundation, the part of the building on which all the other stones rest. In this chapter, Christians are the stones that make up the walls of the building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/cornerstone]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/foundation]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Milk and babies<br><br>When Peter tells his readers to “long for pure spiritual milk,” he is using the metaphor of a baby craving his mother’s milk. Peter wants Christians to crave God’s word the same way a baby craves milk. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	2	intro	a121			0		# 1 Peter 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:6, 7, 8, and 22.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:10.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Stones<br><br>The Bible uses a building made of large stones as a metaphor for the church. Jesus is the cornerstone, the most important stone. The apostles and prophets are the foundation, the part of the building on which all the other stones rest. In this chapter, Christians are the stones that make up the walls of the building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/cornerstone]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/foundation]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Milk and babies<br><br>When Peter tells his readers to “long for pure spiritual milk,” he is using the metaphor of a baby craving his mother’s milk. Peter wants Christians to crave God’s word the same way a baby craves milk. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	2	1	cch5			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter continues teaching his readers about holiness and obedience.
 1PE	2	1	n3x5	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore	The word **Therefore** here refers back to everything that Peter has said about being holy and obedient. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1PE	2	1	g65y	figs-metaphor	ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς	1	having put aside all evil, and all deceit and hypocrisy and envy, and all slander	These sinful actions are spoken of as if they were objects that people could throw away. Alternate translation: “get rid of everything that is evil, and hypocrisy, and envy, and all slander” or “stop being evil, or being deceptive, or being hypocritical, or envying, or slandering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	2	24	ep4s	figs-activepassive	οὗ τῷ μώλωπι ἰάθητε	1	of whose wounds you were healed	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has healed you because people bruised him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	2	25	sgt9	figs-simile	ἦτε…ὡς πρόβατα πλανώμενοι	1	you as sheep are being led astray	Peter speaks about his readers before they believed in Christ as if they had been similar to lost sheep wandering around aimlessly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1PE	2	25	i5lu	figs-metaphor	τὸν ποιμένα καὶ ἐπίσκοπον τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν	1	the shepherd and guardian of your souls	Peter speaks of Jesus as if he were a **shepherd**. Just as a shepherd protects his sheep, Jesus protects those who trust in him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE	3	intro	cqf4			0		# 1 Peter 03 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 3:10-12.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Outward ornaments”<br><br>Most people want to look good so other people will like them and think they are good people. Women are especially careful to look good by wearing nice clothes and jewels. Peter is saying that what a woman thinks and says and does are more important to God than how she looks.<br><br>### Unity<br><br>Peter wanted his readers to agree with each other. More importantly, he wanted them to love each other and be patient with each other.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>Peter quotes a psalm that describes God as if he were a person with eyes, ears, and a face. However, God is a spirit, so he does not have physical eyes or ears or a physical face. But he does know what people do, and he does act against wicked people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	3	intro	cqf4			0		# 1 Peter 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 3:10-12.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Outward ornaments”<br><br>Most people want to look good so other people will like them and think they are good people. Women are especially careful to look good by wearing nice clothes and jewels. Peter is saying that what a woman thinks and says and does are more important to God than how she looks.<br><br>### Unity<br><br>Peter wanted his readers to agree with each other. More importantly, he wanted them to love each other and be patient with each other.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>Peter quotes a psalm that describes God as if he were a person with eyes, ears, and a face. However, God is a spirit, so he does not have physical eyes or ears or a physical face. But he does know what people do, and he does act against wicked people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	3	1	p454			0	General Information:	Peter begins to speak specifically to women who are wives.
 1PE	3	1	cj7z		ὁμοίως, γυναῖκες, ὑποτασσόμεναι τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν	1	In the same way, wives, submit to your own husbands	Just as believers are to “obey every human authority” ([1 Peter 2:13](../02/13.md)) and servants are to “be subject” to their masters ([1 Peter 2:18](../02/18.md)), wives are to **submit** to their **husbands**. The words “obey,” “be subject,” and “submit” translate the same word.
 1PE	3	1	wp5p	figs-metonymy	τινες ἀπειθοῦσιν τῷ λόγῳ	1	some are disobedient to the word	Here, **the word** refers to the gospel message. To disobey means that they do not believe. See how you translated a similar phrase in [1 Peter 2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “some men do not believe the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	3	21	jti3		δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	through the resurrection of Jesus Christ	“because of the resurrection of Jesus Christ.” This phrase completes the thought, “This is a symbol of the baptism that saves you now.”
 1PE	3	22	g4qh	figs-metonymy	ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ	1	who is at the right hand of God	To be at the **right hand of God** is a symbol that God has given Jesus greatest honor and authority over all others. Alternate translation: “who is beside God in the place of honor and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	3	22	f6jq		ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ	1	after … had been subjected to him	“when … had submitted to Jesus Christ”
-1PE	4	intro	zh5n			0		# 1 Peter 04 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:18.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Ungodly Gentiles<br><br>This passage uses the term “Gentiles” to refer to all ungodly people who are not Jews. It does not include Gentiles who have become Christians. “Sensuality, passion, drunkenness, carousings, wild parties, and disgusting acts of idolatry” were actions that characterized or typified the ungodly Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])<br><br>### Martyrdom<br><br>It is apparent that Peter is speaking to many Christians who are experiencing great persecution and are facing death for their beliefs.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “Let it” and “Let none” and “Let him” and “Let those”<br><br>Peter uses these phrases to tell his readers what he wants them to do. They are like commands because he wants his readers to obey. But it is as if he is telling one person what he wants other people to do.
+1PE	4	intro	zh5n			0		# 1 Peter 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:18.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Ungodly Gentiles<br><br>This passage uses the term “Gentiles” to refer to all ungodly people who are not Jews. It does not include Gentiles who have become Christians. “Sensuality, passion, drunkenness, carousings, wild parties, and disgusting acts of idolatry” were actions that characterized or typified the ungodly Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])<br><br>### Martyrdom<br><br>It is apparent that Peter is speaking to many Christians who are experiencing great persecution and are facing death for their beliefs.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “Let it” and “Let none” and “Let him” and “Let those”<br><br>Peter uses these phrases to tell his readers what he wants them to do. They are like commands because he wants his readers to obey. But it is as if he is telling one person what he wants other people to do.
 1PE	4	1	b8d4			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter continues to teach the believers about Christian living. He begins by giving a conclusion to his thoughts from the previous chapter about Christ’s sufferings.
 1PE	4	1	ess6		σαρκὶ	1	in the flesh	“in his body”
 1PE	4	1	p2rv	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν ὁπλίσασθε	1	arm yourselves with the same intention	The phrase **arm yourselves** makes readers think of soldiers who get their weapons ready for battle. It also pictures **the same intention** as a weapon or perhaps as a piece of armor. Here this metaphor means that believers should be determined in their mind to suffer as Jesus did. Alternate translation: “prepare yourselves with the same thoughts that Christ had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	4	18	wb4v	figs-doublet	ὁ ἀσεβὴς καὶ ἁμαρτωλὸς	1	the ungodly and the sinner	The words **ungodly** and **sinner** mean basically the same thing and emphasize the wickedness of these people. Alternate translation: “ungodly sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1PE	4	19	qm3u	figs-synecdoche	παρατιθέσθωσαν τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν	1	let … entrust their souls	Here the word **souls** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “let … entrust themselves” or “let … entrust their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1PE	4	19	wih1	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγαθοποιΐᾳ	1	in well-doing	The abstract noun **well-doing** can be translated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “while they do good” or “while they live rightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1PE	5	intro	a6d9			0		# 1 Peter 05 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Most people in the ancient Near East would end a letter the way Peter ends this one.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Crowns<br><br>The crown that the Chief Shepherd will give is a reward, something that people who do something especially good receive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Lion<br><br>All animals are afraid of lions because they are fast and strong, and they eat almost every other kind of animal. They also eat people. Satan wants to make God’s people afraid, so Peter uses the simile of a lion to teach his readers that Satan can harm their bodies, but if they trust in God and obey him, they will always be God’s people, and God will care for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])<br><br>### Babylon<br><br>Babylon was the evil nation that in Old Testament times had destroyed Jerusalem, taken the Jews away from their homes, and ruled over them. Peter uses Babylon as a metaphor for the nation that was persecuting the Christians he was writing to. He could have been referring to Jerusalem because the Jews were persecuting the Christians. Or he could have been referring to Rome because the Romans were persecuting the Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE	5	intro	a6d9			0		# 1 Peter 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Most people in the ancient Near East would end a letter the way Peter ends this one.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Crowns<br><br>The crown that the Chief Shepherd will give is a reward, something that people who do something especially good receive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Lion<br><br>All animals are afraid of lions because they are fast and strong, and they eat almost every other kind of animal. They also eat people. Satan wants to make God’s people afraid, so Peter uses the simile of a lion to teach his readers that Satan can harm their bodies, but if they trust in God and obey him, they will always be God’s people, and God will care for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])<br><br>### Babylon<br><br>Babylon was the evil nation that in Old Testament times had destroyed Jerusalem, taken the Jews away from their homes, and ruled over them. Peter uses Babylon as a metaphor for the nation that was persecuting the Christians he was writing to. He could have been referring to Jerusalem because the Jews were persecuting the Christians. Or he could have been referring to Rome because the Romans were persecuting the Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1PE	5	1	s8fr			0	General Information:	Peter speaks specifically to men who are elders.
 1PE	5	1	yb3l	figs-metonymy	τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης	1	of the glory that is about to be revealed	This is a reference to Christ’s second coming. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1PE	5	1	a6ve	figs-activepassive	τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης	1	of the glory that is about to be revealed	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “of the glory of Christ that God will soon reveal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -294,4 +294,4 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 1PE	5	13	muq7	writing-symlanguage	ἡ ἐν Βαβυλῶνι	1	She who is in Babylon	Here, **she** probably refers to the group of believers who live in **Babylon**. Here, **Babylon** could mean: (1) This is a symbol for the city of Rome. (2) This is a symbol for anywhere that Christians are suffering. (3) This is a literal reference to the city of Babylon. It most likely refers to the city of Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
 1PE	5	13	rpf5	figs-activepassive	συνεκλεκτὴ	1	chosen together with you	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whom God has chosen as he has chosen you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1PE	5	13	ws2x	figs-metaphor	ὁ υἱός μου	1	my son	Peter speaks of Mark as if he is his spiritual **son**. Alternate translation: “my spiritual son” or “who is like a son to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1PE	5	14	fc7b		φιλήματι ἀγάπης	1	a kiss of love	“a loving kiss” or “a kiss to show your love for each other”
+1PE	5	14	fc7b		φιλήματι ἀγάπης	1	a kiss of love	“a loving kiss” or “a kiss to show your love for each other”

en_tn_62-2PE.tsv

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
 2PE	front	intro	mvk9			0		# Introduction to 2 Peter<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of 2 Peter<br><br>1. Introduction (1:1-2)<br>1. Reminder to live good lives because God has enabled us to (1:3-21)<br>1. Warning against false teachers (2:1-22)<br>1. Encouragement to prepare for the second coming of Jesus (3:1-17)<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of 2 Peter?<br><br>The author identified himself as Simon Peter. Simon Peter was an apostle. He also wrote 1 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter while in a prison in Rome just before he died. Peter called this letter his second letter, so we can date it after 1 Peter. He addressed the letter to the same audience as his first letter. The audience probably was Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.<br><br>### What is the Book of 2 Peter about?<br><br>Peter wrote this letter to encourage believers to live good lives. He warned them about false teachers who were saying Jesus was taking too long to return. He told them that Jesus was not slow in returning. Instead, God was giving people time to repent so that they would be saved.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Peter” or “Second Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Second Letter from Peter” or “The Second Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### Who were the people Peter spoke against?<br><br>It is possible that the people Peter spoke against were those who would become known as Gnostics. These teachers distorted the teachings of scripture for their own gain. They lived in immoral ways and taught others to do the same.<br><br>### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?<br><br>The doctrine of scripture is a very important one. 2 Peter helps readers to understand that while each writer of scripture had his own distinct way of writing, God is the true author of scripture (1:20-21).<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter. Also, the word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Peter?<br><br>For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.<br>* “to be kept in chains of lower darkness until the judgment” (2:4). Some modern versions and older versions have, “to be kept in pits of lower darkness until the judgment.”<br>* “They enjoy their deceitful actions while they are feasting with you” (2:13). Some versions have, “They enjoy their actions while they are feasting with you in love feasts.”<br>* “Beor” (2:15). Some other versions read, “Bosor.”<br>* “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed” (3:10). Other versions have, “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be burned up.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-2PE	1	intro	wjw5			0		# 2 Peter 01 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Knowledge of God<br><br>Having knowledge of God means to belong to him or to have a relationship with him. Here, “knowledge” is more than just mentally knowing about God. It is a knowledge that causes God to save a person and to give him grace and peace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])<br><br>### Living godly lives<br><br>Peter teaches that God has given believers all that they need for living godly lives. Therefore, believers should do everything they can to obey God more and more. If believers continue to do this, then they will be effective and productive through their relationship with Jesus. However, if believers do not continue living godly lives, then it is like they have forgotten what God did through Christ to save them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### The truth of Scripture<br><br>Peter teaches that the prophecies in Scripture were not made up by men. The Holy Spirit revealed God’s message to the men who spoke them or wrote them down. Also, Peter and the other apostles did not make up the stories they told people about Jesus. They witnessed what Jesus did and heard God call Jesus his son.
+2PE	1	intro	wjw5			0		# 2 Peter 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Knowledge of God<br><br>Having knowledge of God means to belong to him or to have a relationship with him. Here, “knowledge” is more than just mentally knowing about God. It is a knowledge that causes God to save a person and to give him grace and peace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])<br><br>### Living godly lives<br><br>Peter teaches that God has given believers all that they need for living godly lives. Therefore, believers should do everything they can to obey God more and more. If believers continue to do this, then they will be effective and productive through their relationship with Jesus. However, if believers do not continue living godly lives, then it is like they have forgotten what God did through Christ to save them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### The truth of Scripture<br><br>Peter teaches that the prophecies in Scripture were not made up by men. The Holy Spirit revealed God’s message to the men who spoke them or wrote them down. Also, Peter and the other apostles did not make up the stories they told people about Jesus. They witnessed what Jesus did and heard God call Jesus his son.
 2PE	1	1	n1di			0	General Information:	Peter identifies himself as the writer and identifies and greets the believers he is writing to.
 2PE	1	1	v381		δοῦλος καὶ ἀπόστολος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	a servant and apostle of Jesus Christ	Peter speaks of being a **servant of Jesus Christ**. He also was given the position and authority of being Christ’s **apostle**.
 2PE	1	1	yy7j	figs-explicit	τοῖς ἰσότιμον…λαχοῦσιν πίστιν	1	to those who have received the same precious faith	That these people have **received** **faith** implies that God has given that faith to them. Alternate translation: “to those to whom God has given the same precious faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	1	20	wcn9		τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες	1	Above all, you must understand	“Most importantly, you must understand”
 2PE	1	20	s4k2		πᾶσα προφητεία Γραφῆς ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται	1	every prophecy of scripture does not coms from one’s own interpretation	This could mean: (1) The prophets did not make any of their prophecies on their own. (2) People must rely on the Holy Spirit to understand all the prophecies. (3) People must interpret every prophecy with the help of the entire Christian community of believers.
 2PE	1	21	mh2s	figs-metaphor	ὑπὸ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου φερόμενοι, ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι	1	men spoke from God being carried along by the Holy Spirit	Peter speaks of the **Holy Spirit** helping the prophets to write what God wanted them to write as if the Holy Spirit was carrying them from one place to another. Alternate translation: “men spoke from God as the Holy Spirit directed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2PE	2	intro	mv79			0		# 2 Peter 02 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Flesh<br><br>“Flesh” is a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. “Flesh” represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])<br><br>### Implicit information<br><br>There are several analogies in 2:4-8 that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2PE	2	intro	mv79			0		# 2 Peter 2 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Flesh<br><br>“Flesh” is a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. “Flesh” represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])<br><br>### Implicit information<br><br>There are several analogies in 2:4-8 that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2PE	2	1	us8u			0	General Information:	Peter begins to warn the believers about false teachers.
 2PE	2	1	l2cg		ἐγένοντο…καὶ ψευδοπροφῆται ἐν τῷ λαῷ, ὡς καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν ἔσονται ψευδοδιδάσκαλοι	1	false prophets also came to the people, as false teachers will also come to you	Just as **false prophets** came deceiving Israel with their words, so will false teachers come teaching lies about Christ.
 2PE	2	1	tbz8		αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας	1	destructive heresies	The word **heresies** refers to opinions that are contrary to the teaching of Christ and the apostles. These heresies destroy the faith of those who believe them.
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNo
 2PE	2	21	blr5	figs-activepassive	τῆς παραδοθείσης αὐτοῖς ἁγίας ἐντολῆς	1	the holy commandment delivered to them	You can state this in active terms. Alternate translation: “the holy commandment that God delivered to them” or “the holy commandment that God made sure that they received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2PE	2	22	hqr3		συμβέβηκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ τῆς ἀληθοῦς παροιμίας	1	This has happened to them according to the true proverb	“What the true proverb says has happened to them” or “This proverb describes what happened to them”
 2PE	2	22	h42r	writing-proverbs	κύων ἐπιστρέψας ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα, καί, ὗς λουσαμένη, εἰς κυλισμὸν βορβόρου	1	A dog returns to its own vomit, and a washed pig to wallowing in the mud	Peter uses two proverbs to illustrate how the false teachers, although they have known “the way of righteousness,” have turned back to the things that make them morally and spiritually impure. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
-2PE	3	intro	c1id			0		# 2 Peter 03 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Fire<br><br>People often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, it is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])<br><br>### Day of the Lord<br><br>The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+2PE	3	intro	c1id			0		# 2 Peter 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Fire<br><br>People often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, it is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])<br><br>### Day of the Lord<br><br>The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 2PE	3	1	n92f			0	General Information:	Peter begins to talk about the last days.
 2PE	3	1	gc3m	figs-metaphor	διεγείρω ὑμῶν…τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν	1	I am stirring up your sincere mind	Peter speaks of causing his readers to think about these things as if he were waking them from sleep. Alternate translation: “I am causing you to think pure thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2PE	3	2	gxj7	figs-activepassive	τῶν προειρημένων ῥημάτων, ὑπὸ τῶν ἁγίων προφητῶν	1	the words spoken beforehand by the holy prophets	You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the words that the holy prophets spoke in the past” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

manifest.yaml

@@ -371,12 +371,13 @@ dublin_core:
   issued: '2021-08-26'
   language:
     direction: 'ltr'
-    identifier: 'en'
-    title: 'English'
+    identifier: 'fr'
+    title: 'French'
   modified: '2021-08-26'
-  publisher: 'unfoldingWord'
+  publisher: 'Bussard'
   relation:
-  - 'en/ult'
+  - 'fr/gst'
+  - 'fr/ult'
   - 'hbo/uhb?v=2.1.22'
   - 'el-x-koine/ugnt?v=0.21'
   rights: 'CC BY-SA 4.0'
@@ -391,8 +392,8 @@ dublin_core:
 
 checking:
   checking_entity:
-  - 'unfoldingWord'
-  checking_level: '3'
+  - 'Bussard'
+  checking_level: '1'
 
 projects:
   -
@@ -400,7 +401,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'gen'
     sort: 1
-    path: './en_tn_01-GEN.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_01-GEN.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -408,7 +409,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'exo'
     sort: 2
-    path: './en_tn_02-EXO.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_02-EXO.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -416,7 +417,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'lev'
     sort: 3
-    path: './en_tn_03-LEV.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_03-LEV.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -424,7 +425,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'num'
     sort: 4
-    path: './en_tn_04-NUM.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_04-NUM.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -432,7 +433,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'deu'
     sort: 5
-    path: './en_tn_05-DEU.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_05-DEU.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -440,7 +441,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'jos'
     sort: 6
-    path: './en_tn_06-JOS.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_06-JOS.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -448,7 +449,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'jdg'
     sort: 7
-    path: './en_tn_07-JDG.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_07-JDG.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -456,7 +457,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'rut'
     sort: 8
-    path: './en_tn_08-RUT.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_08-RUT.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -464,7 +465,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '1sa'
     sort: 9
-    path: './en_tn_09-1SA.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_09-1SA.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -472,7 +473,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '2sa'
     sort: 10
-    path: './en_tn_10-2SA.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_10-2SA.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -480,7 +481,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '1ki'
     sort: 11
-    path: './en_tn_11-1KI.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_11-1KI.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -488,7 +489,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '2ki'
     sort: 12
-    path: './en_tn_12-2KI.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_12-2KI.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -496,7 +497,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '1ch'
     sort: 13
-    path: './en_tn_13-1CH.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_13-1CH.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -504,7 +505,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '2ch'
     sort: 14
-    path: './en_tn_14-2CH.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_14-2CH.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -512,7 +513,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'ezr'
     sort: 15
-    path: './en_tn_15-EZR.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_15-EZR.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -520,7 +521,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'neh'
     sort: 16
-    path: './en_tn_16-NEH.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_16-NEH.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -528,7 +529,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'est'
     sort: 17
-    path: './en_tn_17-EST.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_17-EST.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -536,7 +537,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'job'
     sort: 18
-    path: './en_tn_18-JOB.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_18-JOB.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -544,7 +545,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'psa'
     sort: 19
-    path: './en_tn_19-PSA.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_19-PSA.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -552,7 +553,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'pro'
     sort: 20
-    path: './en_tn_20-PRO.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_20-PRO.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -560,7 +561,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'ecc'
     sort: 21
-    path: './en_tn_21-ECC.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_21-ECC.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -568,7 +569,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'sng'
     sort: 22
-    path: './en_tn_22-SNG.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_22-SNG.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -576,7 +577,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'isa'
     sort: 23
-    path: './en_tn_23-ISA.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_23-ISA.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -584,7 +585,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'jer'
     sort: 24
-    path: './en_tn_24-JER.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_24-JER.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -592,7 +593,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'lam'
     sort: 25
-    path: './en_tn_25-LAM.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_25-LAM.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -600,7 +601,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'ezk'
     sort: 26
-    path: './en_tn_26-EZK.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_26-EZK.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -608,7 +609,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'dan'
     sort: 27
-    path: './en_tn_27-DAN.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_27-DAN.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -616,7 +617,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'hos'
     sort: 28
-    path: './en_tn_28-HOS.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_28-HOS.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -624,7 +625,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'jol'
     sort: 29
-    path: './en_tn_29-JOL.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_29-JOL.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -632,7 +633,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'amo'
     sort: 30
-    path: './en_tn_30-AMO.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_30-AMO.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -640,7 +641,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'oba'
     sort: 31
-    path: './en_tn_31-OBA.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_31-OBA.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -648,7 +649,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'jon'
     sort: 32
-    path: './en_tn_32-JON.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_32-JON.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -656,7 +657,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'mic'
     sort: 33
-    path: './en_tn_33-MIC.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_33-MIC.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -664,7 +665,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'nam'
     sort: 34
-    path: './en_tn_34-NAM.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_34-NAM.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -672,7 +673,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'hab'
     sort: 35
-    path: './en_tn_35-HAB.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_35-HAB.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -680,7 +681,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'zep'
     sort: 36
-    path: './en_tn_36-ZEP.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_36-ZEP.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -688,7 +689,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'hag'
     sort: 37
-    path: './en_tn_37-HAG.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_37-HAG.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -696,7 +697,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'zec'
     sort: 38
-    path: './en_tn_38-ZEC.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_38-ZEC.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -704,7 +705,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'mal'
     sort: 39
-    path: './en_tn_39-MAL.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_39-MAL.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-ot' ]
 
   -
@@ -712,7 +713,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'mat'
     sort: 40
-    path: './en_tn_41-MAT.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_41-MAT.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -720,7 +721,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'mrk'
     sort: 41
-    path: './en_tn_42-MRK.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_42-MRK.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -728,7 +729,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'luk'
     sort: 42
-    path: './en_tn_43-LUK.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_43-LUK.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -736,7 +737,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'jhn'
     sort: 43
-    path: './en_tn_44-JHN.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_44-JHN.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -744,7 +745,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'act'
     sort: 44
-    path: './en_tn_45-ACT.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_45-ACT.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -752,7 +753,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'rom'
     sort: 45
-    path: './en_tn_46-ROM.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_46-ROM.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -760,7 +761,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '1co'
     sort: 46
-    path: './en_tn_47-1CO.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_47-1CO.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -768,7 +769,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '2co'
     sort: 47
-    path: './en_tn_48-2CO.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_48-2CO.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -776,7 +777,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'gal'
     sort: 48
-    path: './en_tn_49-GAL.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_49-GAL.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -784,7 +785,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'eph'
     sort: 49
-    path: './en_tn_50-EPH.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_50-EPH.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -792,7 +793,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'php'
     sort: 50
-    path: './en_tn_51-PHP.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_51-PHP.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -800,7 +801,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'col'
     sort: 51
-    path: './en_tn_52-COL.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_52-COL.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -808,7 +809,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '1th'
     sort: 52
-    path: './en_tn_53-1TH.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_53-1TH.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -816,7 +817,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '2th'
     sort: 53
-    path: './en_tn_54-2TH.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_54-2TH.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -824,7 +825,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '1ti'
     sort: 54
-    path: './en_tn_55-1TI.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_55-1TI.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -832,7 +833,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '2ti'
     sort: 55
-    path: './en_tn_56-2TI.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_56-2TI.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -840,7 +841,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'tit'
     sort: 56
-    path: './en_tn_57-TIT.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_57-TIT.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -848,7 +849,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'phm'
     sort: 57
-    path: './en_tn_58-PHM.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_58-PHM.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -856,7 +857,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'heb'
     sort: 58
-    path: './en_tn_59-HEB.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_59-HEB.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -864,7 +865,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'jas'
     sort: 59
-    path: './en_tn_60-JAS.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_60-JAS.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -872,7 +873,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '1pe'
     sort: 60
-    path: './en_tn_61-1PE.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_61-1PE.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -880,7 +881,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '2pe'
     sort: 61
-    path: './en_tn_62-2PE.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_62-2PE.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -888,7 +889,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '1jn'
     sort: 62
-    path: './en_tn_63-1JN.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_63-1JN.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -896,7 +897,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '2jn'
     sort: 63
-    path: './en_tn_64-2JN.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_64-2JN.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -904,7 +905,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: '3jn'
     sort: 64
-    path: './en_tn_65-3JN.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_65-3JN.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -912,7 +913,7 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'jud'
     sort: 65
-    path: './en_tn_66-JUD.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_66-JUD.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]
 
   -
@@ -920,5 +921,5 @@ projects:
     versification: 'ufw'
     identifier: 'rev'
     sort: 66
-    path: './en_tn_67-REV.tsv'
+    path: './fr_tn_67-REV.tsv'
     categories: [ 'bible-nt' ]